DECLAS: Social Media Nukes An Entire Generation… But Why? [Free Ebook!]

Finally, after a year and a half of buildup, the team behind Q Anon appears to be on the verge of unsealing thousands of indictments and declassifying a wealth of contentious information.

Our latest briefings indicate that there is a “hard deadline” of mid-September 2019 for what they are calling DECLAS. By then, a huge wealth of world-changing intel should have been released.

It has been quite a long and arduous journey to reach this point, but the proof of a coming Major Event is utterly undeniable once we survey the landscape.

This is a 51,000-word, completely free Ebook. Not one word of it has been wasted.

It took nine days of non-stop effort and a 258-page document of nothing but select links, from last August to the present, to make this a reality.

We needed to put this data all together in one place so the overall message could not be suppressed, blocked or marginalized.

The Deep State has made a series of critical mistakes in this battle, now including the mass betrayal of ALL YouTube content creators in favor of “Approved” mainstream media sources.


In case you haven’t noticed, it has become nearly impossible to find any alternative news on YouTube now. It has become a wasteland of check-marked trash.

We will include unbiased statistics that make this plainly obvious. Then as we go on, you will see compelling new evidence that the all-important DECLAS is finally upon us.

We will review a stunning new insider disclosure that is one of the most significant testimonials we have ever seen… truly. It is an absolute must-read.

Additionally, we will discuss the all-important Quote 2700, what it means for disclosure, and why UFOs and Atlantis are now going mainstream.

This is our first write-up on current events since last October, and we hope you enjoy it! Every current events piece we have written since Christmas 2017 has had nearly 4 million views or more.

Disclosure and DECLAS is finally happening now. Everything we have been working towards throughout our entire online existence is finally coming to fruition.

It is scary and amazing all at the same time. Release the Kraken!





YouTube. Dude. We need to talk.

You have just dropped a nuke (or a dook) on the entire Millennial generation. It is a mass betrayal far beyond anything most people could ever have imagined.

Let me make an analogy for those familiar with the pre-MTV “Golden Age” of rock in the 1970s.

This current YouTube mega-attack could be seen as the cultural equivalent of de-publishing all rock music on every radio station or TV spot in existence in the height of the ’70s.

Then, imagine that all those immortal classics were immediately replaced with non-stop Lawrence WelkEnglebert Humperdinck and Helen Reddy.

[These were my father’s favorite artists to “diss” while he was working as a New York rock critic for popular newspapers in the 1970s.

Compared to the Illuma-Pop being shoveled out now, Helen Reddy’s use of chords, melodies and arrangement is like listening to Mozart.]



Then, to take it a step further, imagine that after destroying their airplay entirely, ALL funding sources to the musicians themselves were terminated… effective immediately.

They have no one they can call, no staff to solve the problem, and no viable legal grounds upon which to sue for damages.

How would they go on tour? How would they get into the studio to record another album?

Could any of them have afforded to finance the construction and promotion of their own airwaves… to compete with Big Radio?

Would they all have been forced to stop writing the hits we now know and love as historical masterpieces, and instead have to go and get “regular jobs?”

Imagine sitting in a restaurant and asking your waiter, “Hey, aren’t you that guy from Deep Purple?”

What happens to a society when its creative visionaries are completely betrayed, disenfranchised and left for dead?

And how would their audiences feel about the entity that killed Rock and replaced it with Schlock?



In case you are not tuned into the world of YouTube, this might all seem like a gross exaggeration, but it truly is not.

YouTube has just killed the modern equivalent of rock and roll. And people are PISSED. This is just the beginning.

And, as we so often like and need to do, this initial phase of the story will expand into a vastly more interesting mega-conspiracy as you read on.

YouTube has just become PooTube — a Myspace of controlled mainstream-media propaganda, now offered up in a shiny white bowl, free of charge, with no cable subscription required.

In Stalinist Russia, no one had money for books, but the propaganda was free. This is a common story throughout history. Bread and circuses.



For as long as this next video remains online, I highly recommend “taking the plunge” and downloading it while YouTube circles the bowl.

The first 22 minutes are a super-cut of top YouTube stars sounding off about the massive betrayal their entire generation has just suffered:



In historical terms, it is hard to even imagine the ramifications of betraying the creative soul of an entire generation — and beheading all of its stars in a virtual mass execution.

It is truly sickening. I have had plenty of beef with YouTube for quite some time myself, as we will discuss, so this is nothing new.

Independent videos are so buried by mainstream content now that the fun has been extinguished, and revenues have drastically decreased.

The Roman saying “Vox Populi, Vox Dei” applies here: “The Voice of the Public is the Voice of God.”

Angering the public this much — taking away their main source of creative passion and joy, and ruining their heroes — is a move you don’t make unless you feel you have no other choice.

It is effectively a suicide leap… sacrificing the public goodwill towards an entire mega-platform for some greater and yet-unseen purpose.

This was clearly a decision. As we go on, we will explore the likely means, motive and opportunity for why this was done.



In the Golden Age of rock, you could buy a musical instrument, learn how to jam, get some friends together and have a great time chasing the dream of stardom.

The ‘learning curve’ was pretty easy. Rock drumming is very basic. We used to call it the “Doom-Chic-DoomDoom-Chic” beat.

Hence the infamous joke, “What do you call a guy who hangs around with a bunch of musicians? A drummer!”

Most basslines are not difficult unless it’s art-rock or jazz fusion. The greatest challenge is in being okay with playing very simple and repetitive patterns, in time, without getting “busy.”

Delicious-sounding power chords on rock guitar only require you to play two strings, and to slide that same simple shape up and down the neck as needed.

Blazing guitar solos and powerful rock vocals are where the more difficult artistry and glory comes into play, but it is all attainable if you practice.

Through the purple haze of beer and weed, a group of losers could come together and make miracles happen on Earth.



If your band held together through all the sex, drugs and infighting, you could start playing bigger gigs, make a decent living, and get to enjoy a bit of the good life.

If you were lucky enough, a record executive might even materialize at one of your shows to offer you the Holy Grail: A record deal!

Every day, my father would get boxes and boxes of signed-rock-band albums from Atlantic, Arista, Capitol, CBS, Columbia, Elektra, EMI, Geffen, Polydor, RCA, Sony, Warner and the like, via UPS.

The records were free, since they all wanted Dad to write about their bands. It was admittedly an amazing phenomenon.

Our entire basement was a Vault of Rock… hundreds of feet of albums stacked four levels high on shelves.



Thousands of bands came and went without getting noticed… but at least they got their record deals and some degree of exposure and fun.

I was also lucky enough to meet hundreds of top rock musicians with Dad backstage, and get to experience their dream world firsthand.

Robert Plant was the only one who stunned me into silence, where I stood two feet away from him and never said a word.




YouTube has become the equivalent rock and roll dream of the younger generation.

Think of it as that sparkling vision of glory that dances in one’s mind while they are high… on life.

Best of all, no musical education, gigging or “woodshedding” is necessary.

Just get on up, get into it, and get involved.

With a very short learning curve, you can open a channel, start talking into your phone or laptop, edit your videos together, figure out where the upload button is, and shoot for the stars.

You may not “make it,” but you can certainly be very inspired in trying. That hope can fuel you through a great deal of adolescent angst.

Knowing that a stunning success is at least theoretically possible is what keeps you going. It is the modern equivalent of shooting for a record deal.



There is clear evidence that the entertainment mega-corps very deliberately destroyed rock and roll — well before finishing off YouTube.

If you study the history of Guns ‘N Roses, they were put through a prolonged equivalent of music school by Geffen Records to develop their signature sound.

This is very often a necessary step, and was considered an industry secret for many years. Now certain films have spilled the beans.



Various documentaries like Muscle Shoals reveal that many, if not most bands did not play on their own albums.

This was because the in-house studio performers were far more talented, and could knock tracks out much faster.

As another example, the entire “Motown Sound” emerged from one single group of performers known as The Funk Brothers.Only the singers changed.

Smokey Robinson wrote a majority of all the Motown songs with the help of The Funk Brothers, regardless of who was singing them.



Similarly, the “West Coast Sound” of so many different top acts was again driven by a single group of musicians called The Wrecking Crew.



Having seen countless rock concerts with my father, I observed firsthand how bands would be actively learning their material while performing live on tour.

I didn’t put together what was happening at the time, but I definitely noticed that they sounded far less ‘tight’ than the studio recordings.

Bands do not just appear out of nowhere and sound great, as a general rule.

Jimmy Page was a prolific, uncredited session player before forming Led Zeppelin. And Toto was a breakaway group of session players.

It takes an entire industry to finance and ‘develop’ the artists — to make them into what they then become.

If the industry no longer chooses to invest in developing artists, then the music itself will die. And that is what has happened.



Since the 1990s, there has been little to no financing, development, promotion or exposure of new rock bands of any real prominence, other than a handful of examples like Papa Roach.

This de-incentivizes people from getting together to make socially transformative musical statements, like we saw in the late 1960s with Woodstock.

The mainstream media has proudly announced this death as if it happened organically, from old age, in articles like the following:


4/8: MSM Declares “Rock is Dead”

Las Vegas (AFP) – Mick Jagger “on the mend” following a heart valve procedure, Ozzy Osbourne postponing his tour over a fall, The Who’s Pete Townshend nearly deaf: time is no longer on the side of rock’s legends….

In a 2018 piece entitled “Rock is Dead, Thank God,” Dan Ozzi, a music critic for Vice, wrote that “the genre has been eclipsed in all measures of popularity and profitability by pop, hip-hop, and EDM.”

“And by those standards, yes, rock is dead.”



And yet, look at this… millennials are clearly going back through the Golden Age of rock’s catalog to hear the songs they want to listen to:

2/7: Millennials Prefer 1960-90s “Golden Age” Music to Today’s (Big Shock)

Research has suggested that modern music really isn’t as good as the old classics.

A study has found that golden oldies stick in millennials’ minds far more than the relatively bland, homogenous pop of today.

A golden age of popular music lasted from the 1960s to the 1990s, academics claimed. Songs from this era proved to be much more memorable than tunes released in the 21st century….

‘Spotify was launched in 2008, well after nearly 90% of the songs we studied were released, which indicates millennials are aware of the music that, in general, preceded their lives and are nonetheless choosing to listen to it,’ said Dr Wallisch.


Not surprisingly, movies like Bohemian Rhapsody and Rocketman have done very well with their rich soundtracks and performances.

Compared to what we are hearing now, a good Queen or Elton John song seems like an utter and absolute impossibility to achieve.

Disco-funk songs on YouTube have breathless comments of people marveling at how they are playing “Real Instruments.”

The music has taken on almost a mystical, larger-than-life significance, which even dwarfs the respect these artists had in their heyday.

I expect a similar Billy Joel movie will appear before too long as well, as he is still one of the best-selling performers in the world.



Another great example of the potential that still exists for rock music is the Oscar-winning film A Star is Born.

Lady Gaga effectively gave a big middle finger to the cheesy stuff she used to do, with the flashy costumes, ensemble dance moves, synth sounds and hyper-sexuality.

A Star is Born argues that traditional rock has far more emotional authenticity and depth than modern pop. The film’s huge success easily proved the point.

And it’s not just rock. All different types of popular music that stir the soul have been deplatformed, to use a modern term.

The music industry could certainly find new women who could sing like Whitney Houston, but this type of fare is simply never being offered.



This now-infamous quote from the 1970s mega-star Joni Mitchell makes a similar point:

“I heard someone from the music business saying they are no longer looking for talent. They want people with a certain look, and a willingness to cooperate.

I thought, that’s interesting, because I believe a total unwillingness to co-operate is what is necessary to be an artist – not for perverse reasons, but to protect your vision.

The considerations of a corporation, especially now, have nothing to do with art or music.

That’s why I spend my time now painting.”

– Joni Mitchell, quoted in the LA Times, Sept 5th 2004



On April 24th, 2012, a fascinating anonymous whistleblower letter appeared online from an alleged music executive.

He claimed to be a decision-maker in one of the more established companies in the music industry as of the late 80s and early 90s.

In it, he describes a closed, private meeting with a “small group of music industry insiders” he was called into in 1991.

Featured there were some shadowy characters, who none of his colleagues recognized:


4/24/12: The Secret Meeting That Changed Hip-Hop Music and Destroyed a Generation

The meeting was held at a private residence on the outskirts of Los Angeles. I remember about 25 to 30 people being there, most of them familiar faces.

Speaking to those I knew, we joked about the theme of the meeting, as many of us did not care for rap music and failed to see the purpose of being invited to a private gathering to discuss its future.

Among the attendees was a small group of unfamiliar faces who stayed to themselves and made no attempt to socialize beyond their circle.

Based on their behavior and formal appearances, they didn’t seem to be in our industry….




Everyone was asked to sign a strict, one-page NDA. Some left the room immediately when this was offered, but the insider stayed out of curiosity.

Very soon after the meeting began, it turned into a real-life horror movie as the main speaker revealed their hidden agenda:


4/24/12: The Secret Meeting That Changed Hip-Hop Music and Destroyed a Generation

The subject quickly changed as the speaker went on to tell us that the respective companies we represented had invested in a very profitable industry, which could become even more rewarding with our active involvement.

He explained that the companies we work for had invested millions into the building of privately owned prisons, and that our positions of influence in the music industry would actually impact the profitability of these investments….

He told us that since our employers had become silent investors in this prison business, it was now in their interest to make sure that these prisons remained filled.

Our job would be to help make this happen by marketing music which promotes criminal behavior, rap being the music of choice.

He assured us that this would be a great situation for us, because rap music was becoming an increasingly profitable market for our companies — and as employees, we’d also be able to buy personal stocks in these prisons.



If this was envisioned as a movie scene, you might expect everyone to be chuckling, rubbing their hands together and congratulating their ‘brothers’ in the ‘Illuminati.’

This is not at all what happened:


4/24/12: The Secret Meeting That Changed Hip-Hop Music and Destroyed a Generation

Immediately, silence came over the room. You could have heard a pin drop. I remember looking around to make sure I wasn’t dreaming, and saw half of the people with dropped jaws.

My daze was interrupted when someone shouted, “Is this a f****** joke?”

At this point, things became chaotic.

Two of the men who were part of the “unfamiliar” group grabbed the man who shouted out, and attempted to remove him from the house.

A few of us, myself included, tried to intervene. One of them pulled out a gun — and we all backed off.

They separated us from the crowd, and all four of us were escorted outside.

My industry colleague who had opened the meeting earlier hurried out to meet us.

[He] reminded us that we had signed agreements, and would suffer the consequences of speaking about this publicly or even with those who attended the meeting.

I asked him why he was involved with something this corrupt. He replied that it was bigger than the music business… and nothing we’d want to challenge without risking consequences.



This letter aroused great controversy when it appeared in 2012. Many readers simply couldn’t believe it was true. It’s simply too awful.

Based on what I know, the people I have met and the data I have studied, this most definitely does not appear to be a LARP (Live Action Role Play).

It has multiple ‘markers’ I look for in distinguishing true insider testimonials from fictionalized LARPs.

Others have since followed up on these leads and discovered that the main shareholders of the music-industry companies are indeed the top investors in the prison complex as well:


9/7/16: Facts About Hip-Hop And Prison For Profit

Last year Corrections Corporation of America (CCA), the biggest name in the private prison industry, contacted 48 states offering to buy their prisons.

One stipulation of eligibility for the deal was particularly bizarre: “an assurance by the agency partner that the agency has sufficient inmate population to maintain a minimum 90% occupancy rate over the term of the contract….

Ninety percent of what Americans read, watch and listen to is controlled by only six media companies.

PBS’s Frontline has described the conglomerates that determine what information is disseminated to the public as a “web of business relationships that now defines America’s media and culture.” Business relationships.

Last year a mere 232 media executives were responsible for the intake of 277 million Americans, controlling all the avenues necessary to manufacture any celebrity and incite any trend….


None of this is exactly breaking news, but when ownership of these media conglomerates is cross-checked with ownership of the biggest names in prison privatization, interesting new facts emerge.

According to public analysis from Bloomberg, the largest holder in Corrections Corporation of America is Vanguard Group Incorporated.

Interestingly enough, Vanguard also holds considerable stake in the media giants determining this country’s culture….


The number-one holder of both Viacom and Time Warner is a company called Blackrock.

Blackrock is the second largest holder in Corrections Corporation of America, second only to Vanguard…

There are many other startling overlaps in private-prison/mass-media ownership, but two underlying facts become clear very quickly:

The people who own the media are the same people who own private prisons. The EXACT same people.

Using one to promote the other is (or “would be,” depending on your analysis) very lucrative….


Conspiracy theorists get a lot of flak for daring entertain the notion that people will do evil things for money.

Historical atrocities like slavery and the Holocaust are universally acknowledged.

Yet, simultaneously adopted is the contradictory position that there can’t possibly be any human beings around intelligent enough and immoral enough to perpetrate such things [now].


And while Blackrock and Vanguard are at it, why not also own the guns that their rap lyrics encourage listeners to use — to speed up their entry into the prison complex?




Mainstream media. Check. The music industry. Check. The prison complex. Check. This is crazy stuff if it turns out to be true.

The insider’s testimony checks out perfectly with the actual, provable facts of this case.

If this alleged meeting actually did happen, then we are looking at some very sinister connections between seemingly disparate corporations.

Indeed, after this alleged meeting in 1991, the entire rap music industry shifted to promote violence and drug abuse. For 28 years.

Let’s not forget that Black music in the 1960s, 70s and 80s, such as Motown and disco, was almost always about people being in love.

Granted, you had some early and humorous harbingers of what was coming, such as Curtis Mayfield’s “I’m Your Pusher Man.”

Warning: Do not watch the “Pusherman” video if you are recovering from a cocaine habit, as it would be very triggering:




If this horrific plan is indeed real, what happens when we analyze the principal investors in Facebook and Alphabet, the parent company of Google?

12/4/17: Blackrock and Vanguard Are Less Than a Decade Away From Managing $20 Trillion

The firms [Blackrock and Vanguard] are among the biggest holders of some of the world’s largest companies across a range of industries, including Google parent Alphabet Inc. and Facebook Inc. in technology, and lenders like Wells Fargo & Co.


3/19/18: And The Award For Facebook’s Largest Shareholders Goes To….

Key Points: Facebook’s largest shareholders are Vanguard, Fidelity, BlackRock and State Street.


This is what insiders call “vertical integration.”

The same firms that own the mainstream media and music industry also own the social-media giants, Google and YouTube.

Just like we saw with mega-banks in the LIBOR scandal, they only appear to be in competition with each other.

In actuality, they are merely akin to different branch offices within a single, larger (and hidden) corporation.

This interlocking directorate is what many are now calling the Deep State, though it goes by many other names as well.

The sudden, shock merger of YouTube and mainstream media makes far more sense once you understand that they are owned by the same entities.



Blackrock, Vanguard, Fidelity (with its pyramid-capstone logo) and State Street effectively control the US economy, as well as much of the world.

There are four investment funds — the Big Four — that control the US economy:

  • BlackRock
  • Vanguard Group
  • State Street
  • Fidelity

The 8 largest US financial companies — JP Morgan, Wells Fargo, Bank of America, Citigroup, Goldman Sachs, U.S. Bancorp, Bank of New York Mellon and Morgan Stanley — are 100% controlled by ten shareholders.

The “big four” are major shareholders in all of these eight financial institutions.

As a result, the privately-owned Federal Reserve [which prints the U.S. dollar] is controlled by the Big Four…



The younger generation has almost completely lost interest in corporate television and celebrities at this point.

Unlike other eras, they are not being fed by the popular music that “young people are supposed to like,” simply because mega-corporations tell them to.

Rock music was a great social outlet and therapeutic tool, and it has arguably been killed off by the Big Four despite its innate profitability.

That didn’t snuff out the youthful spark of inspiration. Everyone simply migrated over to the instant, one-man-band world of YouTube.

The cool people are all on YouTube…. or they were.

You don’t need to learn an instrument, you don’t need to team up with other people, and you can “go viral” and become an overnight sensation without ever worrying about a record deal.

If your channel takes off, you can actually make enough money to survive, even while Alphabet / Google / YouTube quietly amasses the other half of your cash.



Perhaps it was my Gen-X cynicism, or my innate suspicion that it was only a matter of time before the noose would tighten on YouTube.

I admit it. I neglected YouTube like an absentee, phone-in father. Success occurred in spite of my actions, not because of them.

I felt incredibly betrayed and unsupported by this platform all along, for reasons we will now discuss.

This will therefore be the first of two ‘personal’ sections of the article, if you are interested. Otherwise, you can click ahead to Section Two.

This story is about as crazy as you can imagine. I ask you to try to visualize what it would be like to actually go through all of this yourself.

There was no love, no inspiration, and no desire for me to participate in YouTube.

I was aware that something was seriously wrong — well before this current “Big Plot Twist” and mass betrayal just happened.

For years I showed up to deliver maybe one or two videos a year. That was it. I still only have 31 videos on my channel as of today.



Literally hundreds of thousands of stolen copies of my material circulated on YouTube. They were low-grade bootlegs of conferences, radio shows and other episodes.

The sheer weight of stolen content would have made it impossible for me to make a living from doing my own videos.

The stolen videos were always monetized, sometimes to perverse extremes. And as I eventually discovered, someone was burning in links to child porn in many of these videos.

This is the first time that I feel safe enough to actually reveal what was going on, with the help of fully-legal photo documentation, as you will soon see.

The ad money was going into a real bank account, which should have been completely traceable and actionable to a real person.

Even with the help of attorneys pointing out the gravity of the crimes involved, we got absolutely nowhere.



The amounts of money involved in this theft were worthy of multiple felony counts for Grand Larceny, likely in the millions.

People would still watch videos that had a line of thirty or more yellow ad dots all marching along the timeline in military formation.

Until I joined a network last year that specialized in alternative content, it was literally impossible for me to get AdSense enabled myself.

I was perpetually waiting for a validation postcard in the mail that never arrived, and there was literally no other way to get started.

And as we will see in Section Two, almost immediately after I finally got up and running this past February with a creator network, I was body-slammed once again.



There was an enormous cottage industry of hundreds, if not thousands of stolen videos being uploaded every day… on various channels.

They were getting plenty of clicks… often tens if not hundreds of thousands of unique views. It was the “big time,” in a sense, but I had no control over it whatsoever.

This entity was almost certainly making far more off of my work than I ever did, just by this incredible industrial-scale operation.

A core of perhaps 100 pieces of content was being constantly and misleadingly re-titled, assigned the current date, and re-uploaded.

Apparently millions of people were going to YouTube, typing in “David Wilcock,” and watching whatever came up.

No one even seemed to care about the name or the origin of the channel. It was all about the name.

I even had people coming up and saying things like, “Hey, I watch you all the time on ____,” as if it was some legitimate entity.



You could look at any one of these channels and see that it had as many as thirty to fifty new uploads per day. Literally!

I made multiple attempts to contact YouTube about this overwhelmingly awesome theft, numbering in the hundreds of thousands of titles.

When you typed in my name and looked at how many videos there were, it went from a quarter million to over 500,000, depending upon when you did it.

YouTube told me that audio-only content, like a radio show appearance, was essentially open source.

Unless I owned and ran the radio show, I could not attach copyright to my audio.

Then, I would have to convince the radio-show copyright holder to fight constantly on my behalf to delete videos. Not going to happen.

Best of all, YouTube told me that “if a person thinks some audio is new, then to them it is,” and they can give it whatever date they want.



I did not want to supply this bootlegging monster with any usable new content.

Any new radio show would instantly “feed the beast” and re-appear hundreds of times a day.

Content was also being edited, modified, and packaged in various ways to make me look stupid, annoying, et cetera.

This even included cases where my voice was deliberately slowed down to make it sound like I had a disability.

The more unprotected radio shows I did, the more this problem would just mushroom completely out of control.

At the same time, there was a constant churn of wildly defamatory and mostly anonymous video attacks.

My audience was becoming enraged. The damage done to my reputation from all of this still reverberates for some people.

Many people were saying “David is So Greedy, Look At All His Ads,” and “Why Is He Constantly Re-Uploading His Old S#it With Misleading Dates to Make Money?”

In that second case, the question itself contained the apparent answer.



As a result, I disavowed the release of any and all audio, such as a radio show, unless the host had Content ID verification and would actually fight to delete bootlegs.

This simple math quickly reduced it down to only two choices: Coast to Coast AM with George Noory and Fade to Black with Jimmy Church.

At least this way, when the shows were stolen — and they constantly were — it was at least theoretically possible to take the videos down.

Just recently, YouTube demonetized Jimmy Church’s channel — for a good chunk of time.

Their excuse was that he had “far too many videos on his channel that re-appear all over YouTube.” These were his shows with me!

He had a horrific struggle convincing them that he was actually the ORIGINAL SOURCE of this massive cancerous growth!



It was so overwhelming that I could not stand to load up YouTube at all. My sidebar was clogged with endless, low-quality stolen copies of my own stuff.

I was told to file copyright strikes and given no other option. If I did this all day long, it was still impossible to even put a small dent in it.

Occasionally I could actually score “three strikes” and get a channel taken down, but it would immediately sprout back up again, often with the same name, videos and images.

I filmed footage of myself looking at all of this, and did not end up publishing it at the time. I largely kept all of this quiet.

The whole process was so disheartening that I could only ever dip in and TRY to do takedowns once every few months.

I did not have the money to hire someone else to do it for me, and it really served no purpose. This was industrial-scale stuff.



Eventually, in December 2016, the main guy doing all of this at the time got my channel “Permanently Deleted” —

by filing a legal challenge where he claimed that he owned the copyright on my videos!

But wait… that’s me in the videos, and here’s a copy of my driver’s license, YouTube!

Nothing. Crickets.

I had to deal with the guy directly. I didn’t actually look at where those burned-in links went until after he attacked me… and I legally responded.

YouTube forced me to hand over my address and contact info in order to legally respond to a dispute of this nature.

All he had to do was say he was going to use an attorney. He didn’t actually need one to fill out and send the form.



I actually had an email exchange with him, and quickly discovered that he was viciously hateful and manipulative. Not surprising.

He effectively wanted to hold me at gunpoint and have me beg on my knees for forgiveness and clemency, when it was very clear that he would then shoot me anyway.

He wanted me to be grateful for everything that he was doing.

He said he was “Promoting” me and building up the strength of my name. But of course, he never sent me so much as a single dollar of the massive ad revenue he was making off of my work.

It was all very psychopathic stuff. And then I went to the burned-in website addresses he put in my videos and had the shock of a lifetime.

The total lack of support from YouTube for well over a week, despite multiple attorney letters, was incredibly demoralizing and depressing.

It was right during Christmas, while on a family vacation. For several days I had no idea if I would ever get my channel back.



It was only after I wrote an entire emergency article exposing the problem, and asked you to help me, that YouTube restored my channel.

We actually had far more information on this guy than we released at the time. The legal proof was shared with YouTube.

We knew his real name. He had stalked, screamed at, and threatened other associates of mine with violence.

I was fortunate enough to have never dealt with him in person or over a voice line.

He had tried to break into the circuit and just never made it. His content always had very disturbing elements in it.

He was doing this same mass-reuploading to everyone in the UFO / disclosure community. I just seemed to be his biggest target.

We found out he would seduce women, move in with them, abuse them, threaten them, then steal everything they had and leave their house a horrific mess.



There were many different websites documenting these crimes, complete with the pictures, and tracking his movements.

For legal reasons I am not going to give out any of the names or website addresses at this time.

I typed one of his old phishing sites in just now, which had the porn links in it, and it is no longer active.

Either way, this could still be an actionable issue.

We had witnesses to his crimes, but they were terrified to speak because this man was so violently evil.

They knew he was a mega-womanizer and very dangerous, and one of them had witnessed him orchestrating this mass YouTube campaign against me on his computer.

He was apparently working as a team with two other guys, one of whom was his brother and a master computer hacker.

Shortly after they got my contact info through YouTube, I got weird phishing texts purporting to be from my associate Corey Goode.

It also seemed that one of these guys’ names was an alias, since it had a creepy sexual joke implied in the name.



Worst of all, my own videos were being re-uploaded with burned-in links and “bugs” that went over to child exploitation sites.

You could apparently order various disturbing videos through these sites.

This was almost certainly a credit-card phishing scam, and this guy would just ruin your life if he got anything from you.

This proof, again, was shared with YouTube through a top cyber-exploitation attorney.

We did not disclose this publicly at the time for multiple reasons, including simple personal safety.

The name I picked for him was deliberately chosen to hint at what was really going on, but no one connected the dots in a prominent fashion.



This disgusting agenda made his takedown of my own channel, for the better part of a week, all the more sinister.

It absolutely looked like a set-up to frame me for serious crimes that I was completely innocent of.

If my own channel had gone missing, and the only remaining videos linked back to kiddie stuff, that sure looked like a setup.

We finally got someone at YouTube to read our letters, and he promised to help. I believed him.

Our team wanted joint cooperation with law enforcement, as well as the following ‘wish list’ that would have followed:

  • Special flagging of anyone who starts uploading videos with this and other key names in them, in bulk;
  • Blockage of any and all linked bank accounts from being able to receive AdSense revenue ever again;
  • Freezing and depublication of any and all channels linked to these bank accounts;
  • IP tracing of where these accounts were originating from;
  • Cooperation in handing this sensitive and very serious information over to the FBI;
  • Et cetera.


Then our guy disappeared, and others showed up who ignored our entire thread. We were starting over from scratch every time.

First you would get the automated responses that had no awareness of the letter whatsoever, and simply told you to file takedowns or complaints.

Then you might get a ‘real person’ who obviously had not spent more than 30 seconds skimming through your letter or letters.

It was literally impossible to get any protective action on this.

It was a miracle that we were even able to get my channel back at all.



Here is a shortened excerpt from one of the emails we sent to YouTube at the time, which got us nowhere:

———- Forwarded message ———-
From: David Wilcock <____>
Date: Wed, Dec 28, 2016 at 6:54 PM
Subject: Re: [0-4185000015108] [1-1317000015183] YouTube Partner Support PLEASE HELP: MORE FALSE STRIKES FROM SAME CRIMINAL



A violent criminal is attacking my channel, and is widely exposed online for committing multiple felonies. He has just escalated the war with ANOTHER copyright strike against content that I own….

He burned his own weblink in as well as a “bug” at the bottom right. This obviously indicates he added these things to my existing video. This is copyright theft….

These two websites (in the link) OPENLY SOLICIT their viewers to download “forbidden” X-rated films that appear to involve sex acts with children. They also harvest credit card information….

There are literally dozens of places online where you can read about the awesome scope of “con” that this man has conducted. [LINKS NOT PROVIDED HERE]

He is an international fugitive with multiple felony warrants out for his arrest. He has fled from Britain to France to Spain to Monaco to Iceland….



Finallly, here are two of the disturbing, evil images that we included in the legal package that was sent, taken right off of these linked websites.

There is nothing illegal in these images. I would not upload anything here that was. Nor did I see anything like that on these sites, thankfully.

The girl on the right is wearing a weird Satanic backpack, giving a clear hint that she is supposed to be an under-age schoolgirl.

One of the characters is wearing an Eyes-Wide-Shut-style mask with a phallic nose and “fallen angel” wings.

Notice also that whoever commissioned this illustration used a “Blue Avian” cartoon character that was touching the pizza in the center.

This character shifted from blue to green due to the overall gray filter they used on the original image:





It clearly seemed that this man was being sponsored by very dark forces to do this, and was not acting alone.

Corey Goode had asserted on our show that the alleged ‘Blue Avian’ ETs had also helped the Muslims.

Notice that the little Blue Avian guy in the above illustration has a Muslim prayer cap on.

The clear insinuation, from the wording and context, was that people I knew, like Corey, were involved in a “Demon Sex Crime Syndicate.”

Nothing could be further from the truth.

This stalker himself may have been a member of some sort of ‘Syndicate’ — in a classic case of projection.



Again… try to imagine if this had happened to you, and someone tried to set you up like this… on such a massive scale.

Potentially tens of thousands of videos are out there, trying to frame you as a peddler of the worst criminal material there is.

You pay for a great attorney. You have tons of evidence. Documents. Websites. Witnesses.

You believe there is no way this will be ignored.

You keep silent in the public eye, because you don’t want to enrage the guy and have him generate even crazier stuff to try to frame you with.

And then… absolutely nothing.

How in the world was this guy actually able to take my entire channel down with false copyright strikes for nearly a week?



The “Teddy Bear” had so greatly diluted my message that it was nearly impossible to find actual, new stuff by typing in my name.

If anyone had bothered to type in the links he burned into many of those videos, they would have soon found their way back to this disturbing solicitation.

I do believe that the law finally caught up with him, just based on how quiet things have gotten in the aftermath.

My lawyer did talk me through the entire process of filing all of this with the FBI through official channels, and I did it.

It also appears that the people Teddy had once hired to upload the videos then took over the business on their own.

In that case it was just to make money. Various clues suggested they were located somewhere in Southeast Asia.

Now it finally appears that YouTube has stopped this mass re-uploading scam as a whole, across the platform. That is a huge relief.

That is one of the main reasons why I even feel comfortable talking about this now. It was very demoralizing at the time.



So yeah. This stuff admittedly messed me up for a while. It is not fun having this level of evil directed at you. It is not at alllike being a rock star.

No one was bootlegging rock albums and overdubbing messages in them linking the listener to disgusting criminal material.

Had this hideous frame-up actually caused any problems, I would have definitely gone public with this much sooner.

Social media? Maybe I’ll post something if I feel like it, and maybe for months at a time I will prefer to have a private and solitary life.

If I had really wanted to “Make Money,” I could have / would have / should have done a hell of a lot more than I was doing, like running multi-city conference tours… but I was fine with the quiet life of an artist.

That’s what made it so ironic when various attackers would accuse me of getting rich from this, or only doing it for the money.

If I wanted to ‘cash in’, I would have been constantly deploying social media, doing very regular conferences, and having lots of products for sale.



I did all the Old Stuff — I wrote a few published books, updated my own website, luckily got into a good show on Cable TV, and did three or four real-world conferences a year.

I continued to boldly expose the evil that I saw happening in the world, regardless of all these vicious counter-attacks.

The thing that disturbed me the most about YouTube and social media was that there was no management team I could call and hold accountable.

In the rock and roll era, your band had a manager, an agent, an accountant, and at least one executive at the label who your team could grill if something went wrong.

Not here.

Therefore, in light of my own experience, I can’t say I’m too surprised now that everyone has had the “Big Twist” and an epic betrayal from the tech giants.

If the crimes I exposed with my attorneys were not ‘good enough’ to catch even a moment’s attention, then it was complete anarchy.

The connections between these seemingly separate industries, through financiers like the Big Four, needs to be talked about.






Even though the lamentations in the original video of people mourning the death of YouTube are very, very intense, and well worth your time to review, let’s say you didn’t watch it — and are just skimming through this.

Here again is the video from Section One, in case now you want to see it and you didn’t watch it before:



“Ok, rock and roll, blah blah, the kids are getting high, personal info, I don’t get this YouTube connection. YouTube just sucks. Whatever.”

Here is a written version of the virtual nuclear holocaust that has just occurred for this generation:


4/5: YouTube Abandoning Independent Creators For MSM Content

The golden age of YouTube — the YouTube of a million different creators all making enough money to support themselves by creating videos about doing what they love — is over….

In 2016, personalities like Philip DeFranco, comedians like Jesse Ridgway, and dozens of other popular creators started noticing that their videos were being demonetized.

[This is] a term popularized by the community to indicate when something had triggered YouTube’s system to remove advertisements from a video, depriving them of revenue.

No one was quite sure why, and it prompted complaints about bigger algorithm changes that appeared to be happening.


Kjellberg [the number-one YouTube star “PewDiePie”] posted a video detailing how changes had dropped his viewership numbers.

He’d been getting 30 percent of his traffic from YouTube’s suggested feed, but after the apparent algorithm update, the number fell to less than 1 percent.

Kjellberg jokingly threatened to delete his channel as a result, which was enough to get YouTube to issue a statement denying that anything had changed.

(The denial sidestepped questions of the algorithm specifically, and spoke instead to subscriber counts.)….


There’s a moment in the podcast, toward the end, when [top YT star] Logan looks at the Philippou brothers and asks them, “So what do you do? What happens next?”

They laugh, and then Michael answers without hesitation, with the expediency of someone who’s thought of this for some time.

“We leave. We find somewhere else that wants our videos. That used to be YouTube, but it’s not anymore. And I don’t think it ever will be again.”



Again, just so that we are clear, everyone’s videos are now being completely buried by unwanted and unpopular mainstream-media content!

Creators’ subscriber counts have greatly decreased or almost leveled off entirely. Ad revenues are drastically down, if not outright gone.

Viewing numbers have dropped by 50, 60, 70, even 90 percent or more. And everyone knows this has been engineered very deliberately, by design.

The waxen wings of the YouTube dream have melted — and it has come thundering down to the earth in a flaming heap.

The specifics were also revealed in a recent video linked on as of May 2019.

The creator of the following video did a rigorous scientific study of the data, and absolutely proved that this massive bias is now in place against ALL independent creators.

In case you don’t recognize him, the ‘1x’ guy on the left is PewDiePie / Kjellberg, who was the number-one YouTube celebrity for several years:



YouTube’s Trending Tab Incredible Biases: 95% Mainstream Media

Notes from video:

3:30: Mainstream media is now overwhelmingly over-represented on the YouTube Trending tab.

This has nothing to do with the mainstream sources getting more views… in fact it is just the opposite.

8:12: 95% of all news now promoted on YouTube’s all-important Trending tab is traditional media, as opposed to being independently created.


The Associated Press hit the Trending tab seven times, with videos having as little as ten thousand views.

A formerly very popular independent creator only trended once after getting 1.4 million views.

12:45: This is a “Systemic Bias” throughout all of YouTube. Dafuqqq?!….



If you want to witness this for yourself, go over to YouTube, click on any video, and look at the sidebar. Everything that comes up is check-marked MSM junk. It’s crazy.

This is not what people come to YouTube for. If they want mainstream media, they go turn on the TV. YouTube is a haven… or was… for independent creators.

Now, if I want to watch anything of potential interest, I have to know exactly who I am looking for, and then manually type their name into the search window.

It is now nearly impossible to find the videos you want to watch without hand-typing the name of their creators into the Search bar.

You can still find them, but this extra legwork has caused precipitous declines in viewership numbers.

The entire platform has radically changed. The water temperature has been turned up on the frog much too quickly, and he is pissed.

What could possibly be the reason behind this? How does this make any sense at all, from a business perspective?

Think about it as if you were running this business, without exploring any exotic conspiracy theories just yet.

YouTube owns the platform. Why give preferential treatment to the very entities you are supposedly competing with for advertising revenue?

Why attempt to steer people into the dying old world of television? Why forge an unholy alliance with the mainstream media that you were oh-so-recently competing with and destroying?

If YouTube actually succeeds in quieting this massive and angry mob, now numbering in the millions, their time and attention will now migrate over to a platform that YouTube makes no apparent money from.

This is the big paradox. This is what everyone is struggling to understand right now. Without the “Big Picture” of what we will be calling the “Forbidden Story,” it makes no sense at all.

You don’t come here to Divine Cosmos looking for the conventional view. We will “get our hands dirty” and look at all possible explanations, including the most controversial ones.



In my second book The Synchronicity Key, I suggest that historical events are following a mass informational template most know as the Hero’s Journey, popularized by Joseph Campbell.

This is the basic blueprint for all TV shows, movies and novels, as I discovered by studying the top thirteen books on screenwriting in detail.

Films such as Star Wars, E.T., Alien, Dances With Wolves, The Lion King, Matrix and Avatar all follow this ‘structure’ so closely as to be almost like paint-by-numbers classes — and yet it works.

We laugh, cry, gasp and cheer at all the right points in these movies. It feels oddly familiar, and yet it never ceases to delight.

The Hero’s Journey is the core pattern of all good storytelling. It is also the spiritual DNA of our own journey through life, with all its ups and downs.

In the Hero’s Journey archetypal story, millennials have definitely hit the “All is Lost” point with what YouTube has just done in the cyber-verse over the last three months.

This is the equivalent of “hitting bottom” in addiction-recovery parlance, where deep and meaningful lifestyle change can then occur after a harrowing collapse.



It is very important to remember that the All is Lost point is NOT the end of the Hero’s Journey. It only appears to be that way.

In a screenplay, it is expected to happen somewhere around page 85 out of 120. I had one of many during the apex of the Teddy Bear attacks, as my channel went down during Christmas.

The hero must appear to have been completely defeated and destroyed, and to have exhausted all hope of completing the Quest.

The screenwriting books even recommend that the hero, or at least his or her quest, should appear to have literally died… for five full pages of script.

Then as you hit page 90, you move into the Third Act, where the Setup and Conflict launches into Resolution, Victory and the Hero’s Return.

I do argue in the book that this is an archetype, and it holds true in any and all situations. It is, again, our spiritual DNA.



Our own “home territory” of the UFO and conspiracy genre has most definitely felt the All is Lost point very strongly during the Great PooTube Transfiguration.

Within this virtual world of YouTube, all the talents you know and love are being systematically hunted down and extinguished like animals.



Two of the most popular talents in the UFO community on YouTube, who have not yet entered into the conference or traditional TV circuit, are SecureTeam 10 and Third Phase of the Moon.

If you want to really feel and smell the guts of this All is Lost moment within the UFO community — the fear, anxiety, desperation and helplessness — watch these two short videos:


Secure Team 10: 5/23/19


Third Phase of the Moon: 6/20/19


I am no stranger to these impossible showdowns with faceless bureaucracy.

SecureTeam 10 was rescued by a massive and peaceful audience uprising on Twitter, as it says in the comments section. Tyler and his family were thankfully spared from disaster.

It is very likely that Tyler does not sleep well at night either way. With the constantly-worsening rules, he might not be so lucky the next time.

Blake from Third Phase is still very much on cyber “death row” at this point, unless we mount a massive audience effort to save him and his channel.

Blake did a great job editing a movie-length video together for us to promote Above Majestic, which now has over 1.3 million views.

I shot a wealth of original footage for him to use in this project, and most of it made the cut. I was very pleased with the results.

As a gesture of thanks for his tireless work, I do ask that you follow his instructions on the video and peacefully protest his demonetization on Twitter.



I personally lost all ability to livestream on my channel for three months beginning in early March, despite the advice and support of five different legal teams as well as my network.

I had spent five years and many thousands of dollars building up to the big debut, with three camera angles; good sound and lighting; and normal HD-quality video resolution.

I also had After Effects-driven opening sequences, conference-quality slides and animated lower thirds.

In short, it looked, sounded and felt like a “real” television show, and not a typical one-camera-angle livestream.

I could now knock out live shows that had better camera, sound and picture quality than the countless bootlegs of my old conference footage and radio shows circulating on YouTube.

I waited to launch this new initiative until I knew I had everything mastered… and it was seriously hard work to get there.

I was only able to knock out three videos on 2/916 and 23 before it all came crashing down. In context, this was not surprising.



The problem was that new rules had just been implemented. One single strike against a livestream now caused it to die off for three months unless successfully challenged.

YouTube completely refused to listen to provable arguments that were self-evident within 30 seconds of surveying the obvious data we provided them.

None of this struggle was made public for various reasons.

The head of my content network had never seen such inflexibility before, as this should have been a very simple issue to resolve. I was well within Fair Use guidelines, according to all five teams.

I did one additional live video on Twitter/Periscope on March 13th, and then manually uploaded it to YouTube before getting swept away in the launch and delivery of Ascension Mystery School.

This proved to be very intense work. I “over-delivered,” with a total of eight videos averaging four hours in length each. I do sincerely thank each of you who participated!

Elizabeth and I were both doing course deliveries at the same time, and all week we were either editing, preparing or delivering content.



This relentless, weekly effort then collided with three big conferences: Sedona Cosmic Awakening, New Living Expo and Contact in the Desert.

Our third event was marred by an unprecedented attack, defamation and physical threat campaign online, with a heaping dollop of betrayal on top.

Never before had I seen such organized and threatening efforts being made, complete with such sneering and total contempt for its intended targets.

The people making the threats then ridiculed the fact that we were forced to respond to them with law enforcement, by necessity.

There is so much projection in these attacks that whoever they think they are talking about bears almost no resemblance to me whatsoever.



My former co-star Corey Goode was targeted in these attacks even more than I was, though he was not speaking at Contact in the Desert.

By necessity, the attacks triggered the release of a comprehensive Public Statement from Goode’s legal team in order to address multiple misunderstandings and/or flat-out lies.

The people chatting this all up were doing so in an echo chamber, thinking it was a huge movement when really no more than 1-2 percent of Goode’s audience was even casually watching.

One key member of the attack group has publicly admitted to practicing black magic and attempting to summon demons, and thinks it is hilarious.

Other ‘friends’ called every business associate they could find, and tried to sabotage our relationships and contracts.

There are a variety of actionable crimes that have been committed in the process, some of which are felonies.

Best of all, they made multiple calls to the FBI, only to discover the core accusations were not criminal even if the false allegations were proven correct.



I do agree wholeheartedly with the sentiments in the Statement. If you want to defend us from attacks, please do so without descending to their level.

That means no harassment, bullying, intimidation, threats or otherwise… just a peacefully-worded statement of what you think and feel.

It is certainly OK to disagree, have your own point of view, and present strong and healthy boundaries, particularly in the face of violent threats.

Not long after Corey’s Statement emerged, the entire foundation of the allegations began crumbling apart.

The originators of the attack have now been caught in multiple, provable lies and deceptions, to an almost ridiculous level.

New evidence is surfacing on almost a daily basis at this time, and it is quite the elaborate tapestry of deception.

The perps may yet get the fame they have obviously been seeking, but not for the reasons they had anticipated.

The hate speech reminds me of the laughably absurd circular arguments I used to hear in PBS fundraisers, but this time with far more aggression and profanity.


“We Just Don’t Like Him Very Much! Donate Now!”



One of the most ridiculous themes in this hate genre is the idea that I “Stole Pete Peterson’s Fundraiser Money” from TWO YEARS AGO.

They have talked about this so much, after digging around for “Evidence,” that they are absolutely convinced this fantasy must be true.

Pete has been the number-one whistleblower teaching us about the Alliance all these years, dating back to when we met in 2009.

Pete’s house had been illegally foreclosed upon after a crazy, multi-year legal battle with Big Four bank bureaucracy. All of his worldly possessions were then illegally seized and thrown in the dump.

It was absolutely heartbreaking. I had sent him 18,000 dollars over the years to help fight this legal battle and to have enough money to continue eating.

I recently called Pete on the phone after tracking him down to a new nursing home, and have a recording I will soon be releasing where he debunks this crazy idea that I robbed him of this money.



There was a weird and sinister aspect to this whole situation as well.

The theft accusations started ramping up almost immediately after Pete was transferred to another nursing home, with no forwarding info.

No one outside of Pete’s immediate inner circle should have known that anything about his housing and accessibility status had changed.

The previous facility told me that “due to HIPAA regulations,” they could not confirm where he was, or even if he was alive.

Thankfully, one of Pete’s old friends was able to out-manipulate one of the clerks and get them to break the “rules” and reveal where they sent him.

If there was some greater initiative behind this, the planners may have hoped that I would never have been able to speak to Pete again.

BZZZT! Not so. We found him! We asked him. And we recorded it… with his permission. That is coming soon in a video, but I needed to get this written up first.



It was very difficult to get the money to Pete, because GoFundMe was so paranoid about such a theft actually happening.

From my own personal experience, if someone did try to organize a fraud like this, it would be nearly impossible to accomplish it through GoFundMe.

I had to get special executive approval to have Power of Attorney, just to be able to provide GoFundMe with Pete’s correct bank information online, which they then audited and verified before trusting the data.

Pete was nowhere near Internet savvy enough to know how to provide them with his own bank information through any online means they would accept, and we did try.

The only power I had in the situation was to control when and how much of the money was transferred into Pete’s account. All of it went in… at least everything but GoFundMe’s cut of it.

Pete did not pay me so much as a single dollar for helping him with this fundraiser. It was all volunteer on my part.

I wasn’t even the one who started the fundraiser either! The originator transferred it to me, I eventually got Power of Attorney, and wired all of it directly to Pete.



Though these things always happen, the latest attacks have gotten far out of hand.

It is not cool to publicly confront my family and possibly my audience alike with what could be legally construed as terror threats.

The entire hotel was on super-high alert after seeing the evidence, and it escalated all the way up to senior executive management.

If the people who did this are unaware of why this is so serious, they obviously haven’t gone back and studied their own words carefully enough.



We had thirty staff on high alert, two armed hotel guards on call, local police on call, two unarmed private security guards hired by the event in the room, and two big unarmed Samoans as my personal security guards.

Had anyone actually tried to deliver on the physical threats, we may well have had a repeat performance of the Internet classic, “Don’t Tase Me, Bro!”

I still chose to get up on stage for six different events over a total of thirteen hours, despite unprecedented threats to my wife and to me alike.

Not only that, but I decided to completely re-work all of my talks at the last minute to drop a MOAB on the “Partial Disclosure” UFO agenda.

When all other content is being aggressively stripped clean from social media and YouTube, and one narrative is pushed by a bunch of CIA guys, you do the math.



These threats may become a far bigger story in coming months, and I can say no more about them at this time. We made the best of a ridiculously bad situation.

The organizer of the event was surprised when I was about to get on stage in front of 1200 people and was not smiling or visibly excited.

Why? Because I had no idea what I was getting myself into every time I went up on that stage.

And I did get heckled by one person during my panel, who then left the room after security approached.

I still delivered a quality presentation when I went up there, but enough is enough. Serious lines have been crossed.

I have now finally recovered enough from physical and emotional stress to “get back on the horse” and continue doing this work without fear.

Any events I do from now on will be far more structured, prepared and equipped to prevent any threats of this nature from materializing.



We just got our YouTube live-streaming capability back a couple of weeks ago.

I wanted to write up this important article before doing anything else, as my life had gotten so crazy that I haven’t written a piece like this since last October.

I will probably do a few live broadcasts in the midst of this All is Lost point before we head into the all-important Global Third Act.

It seems very likely, almost inevitable, that I will either get permanently demonetized or deleted just for speaking, regardless of what I say when I go live.

This is the “new normal” of public life on YouTube.

That’s how bad it has gotten — particularly if you dare to talk about anything other than the ‘approved’ political storyline.

I will at least make it difficult for them to find anything actually real to complain about, and we will back it all up as we go.



Our own unique All is Lost point, at least with YouTube, began after I mentioned the number of videos with my name in the title during a live video on February 16th, 2019.

This was only a week after my live-streaming debut on February the 9th.

The video count was worked into a live broadcast at the last minute, with no telegraphing in advance over the phone or otherwise.

This gigantic number may have been the one and only positive gift I ever received from the Teddy Bear’s horrific legacy.

The numbers went from 5.15 million up to 5.98 million unique videos with my name in the title, over just a three-day period:


February 12th, 2019


February 14th, 2019


February 15th, 2019


By comparison, the number of videos with “Hillary Clinton” in the title during the same timeframe was half as much, at only 2.9 million:


February 19th, 2019


If this was being done by a Teddy Bear-style mass re-uploading effort, it was truly prodigious… in fact utterly astonishing.

And whoever was doing this against me, if it was indeed an organized attack, did not see any need to boost Hillary the same way.

I assume this would require a massive arsenal of ‘drone’ computers just to handle all the uploading and processing.

I knew it might piss some people off to point out this gigantic and provocative number… obviously.

I was completely floored by the data myself. I kept checking and checking in disbelief.

I certainly have never run for an election, nor had even a fraction of a percentage of the marketing money or mainstream publicity behind me as Hillary has.

Yet, there it was!



I am sure that many of these videos were made by real people, but certainly a healthy number of them were automated re-uploads.

That helps to explain the sudden appearance of 720 thousand more videos in one day… between February 14th and 15th, as you can see here again:


February 14th, 2019


February 15th, 2019


That’s 30,000 videos an hour, 500 videos per minute, 8.3 new videos being uploaded per second.

This “Grand Washout Attempt” also happened right after I had just debuted my new live-streaming setup the week before.

Coincidence? Or was someone feverishly trying to water me down and prevent my audience from finding my new stuff?

And were certain individuals actually terrified by what I might say in those live broadcasts, including from unique insider briefings I have received?

I mentioned in the livestream that YouTube is a totally alternate universe.

Celebrities can pop up who no one outside of that platform has ever even heard of. And despite the popularity of Ancient Aliens, that is largely where I fit in.



I did a comprehensive study of every celebrity list I could find, and found that there were only perhaps 40 names with more than 5.9 million videos on YouTube, at the most.

They are almost all pop stars, movie stars or celebrity athletes, along with certain major YouTube talents. I have pictures of all the results that I may use in a later published report.

Here is a look at the first two pages of the study, as I grabbed pictures of many different names in a sweeping effort:




Will Smith was way above everyone else, definitely number one in the world, fluctuating between 140 and 254 million unique videos:



Ironically, Will Smith’s success was launched by being one of the only “Happy Rappers” to ever be allowed any publicity by the industry, pre-1991.

My own YouTube channel still only has 31 videos since its inauguration nine years ago — an average of 3.4 videos a year.

The sheer number of videos that had my name in the title was utterly astonishing to me and to my colleagues alike.

I had at least five different top executives from non-Deep State media companies, including people from The Orchard who distributed our film Above Majestic, studying this data for themselves.

This was all happening as we were shopping for new deals — and everyone was very impressed. I showed them what to type in and they did it on their own.

It does look like we should have some favorable announcements to make on the media front fairly soon. We will find a safe and viable platform for all aspects of this content.

I certainly cannot trust YouTube as a platform. At this point I can’t even trust them to take out the garbage.



It was truly remarkable during those few days to type my name in and see it consistently clearing 5.2 million unique videos or more.

Even if most of it was the Teddy Bear legacy, this was still a very physical thing. The number was there. It was real.

It represented an enormous amount of “engagement” surrounding my name, and there were only about 40 others who had moved beyond this level on Earth.

During this same few days, I admittedly got “hung up” on it, and did a massive analysis of how this related to many other metrics.

I typed in names of other UFO and alternative personalities I could think of, and the numbers were dramatically lower in almost every case:



The only other name in our community that had beaten these numbers was the ever-controversial and seemingly far more recognizable Alex Jones.



Even the least popular of the videos with my name in the title would often score at least 100 hits, and many were pulling five or six figures apiece.

This definitely helps to explain why I am recognized just about any time I leave the house to go anywhere these days.

I do try to give everyone a selfie opportunity and a bit of conversation unless I am in an important phone call, a private meeting, or otherwise in a rush.

Just in the last couple of months, three different people I never met before have sobbed in my arms for three to five minutes at a time.

It is not uncommon for me to hear that my work has prevented someone from killing themselves. I take that responsibility seriously.

That being said, there is no ‘cult’ whatsoever. I have very few acquaintances apart from my family, manager and immediate creative team.



I also dug up many other traditional big celebrity names that had far fewer than five million videos on YouTube.

I may present them all in another analysis as time goes on. I did photograph everything.

Here are two noteworthy examples:



This data clearly seems to show that as a result of their marriage, they are now almost always mentioned together.



Then you have certain YouTube talents who have enormous “engagement” well beyond my own, without any mainstream PR at all.

These are the two biggest I could find:



I also did a run-down of various political figures to get a sense of scale:





Again, I knew it was a brazen act of defiance against the Deep State to point out that a “nobody” like me had doubled Hillary on YouTube engagement.

I may have been using the Deep State’s own digital handiwork against them, while they tried to wash out the debut of my livestream. Either way, it was powerful stuff.

I spent a long time thinking about whether I wanted to “go there” or not. In the final analysis I felt it had to be done, as it was noteworthy information to present.

And now for the punch line, in case you didn’t already see this in my videos:

The Deep State’s “problem” of my mega-popularity was quickly “fixed,” within three days after I pointed it out.

[It could have been ‘solved’ even faster than in three days. This was the first time I had checked it since the show.]

The number of videos with my name in the title had suddenly been adjusted down… by a whopping 5.75 million:


February 19th, 2019


I talked to the head of my creator network about this, as he exclusively deals in the conspiracy genre.

He said that he had never seen or heard of anything like this. In fact, until this happened, he would never have believed it was even possible.

This is clearly Deep State-level stuff. It’s just too big, too fast, too wild to even believe, and yet it actually happened.

Videos don’t just disappear this fast. It’s crazy.

Craziest of all, if they can do this, on such short notice, that means they can do anything:

Reduce view counts, eliminate subscribers, turn off Notifications, demonetize, shadow-ban, deepfake, you name it…

And then, just over a month later, the entire platform was converted into a 7-Eleven for mainstream media finger-food and fizzy drinks. My betrayal was just the first shot fired.

EVERYONE uploading to YouTube has now been betrayed in a similar type of fashion as what had happened to me a bit earlier.



Eleven days after this stunning and spontaneous ‘nuclear’ attack against 5.75 million videos with my name in them, we got Round Two.

My channel was hit with a copyright strike that led to the immediate destruction of all live-streaming capability.

This occurred very soon after I promoted what appeared to be an exciting new insider breakthrough for Disclosure.

The person who did this had my number, but never called to warn me or ask me to take the video down, which I would gladly have done.

I do not believe in infighting, harassment, character attacks or otherwise, and always strive for the most peaceful solution to a problem.

For this same reason, I have decided to withhold a large amount of significant and publicly unknown information relevant to this case that could easily sway a jury.

Just as it says in Corey’s Public Statement, we really do need to stop all the infighting. I am choosing to take those steps myself by letting all of this go, despite the reputation damage that was done.



It is important for everyone to know that we did offer a full gamut of five different generous remedies, through trusted mutual intermediaries.

According to my network, this went well beyond anything that might have been awarded had we actually lost a lawsuit, which was extremely unlikely.

All five of those offers were rejected. The channel stayed down for the entire three months. No recourse.

That being said, I still support this person and their contributions to the field, and wish this person no harm.

I was advised that the whole thing was a significant misunderstanding of the actual legal definition of Fair Use.



Again, as I said before, five different legal teams confirmed that what I had done was not a copyright violation.

You must secure written permission to use images on cable or network TV, or in a published book.

However, when it comes to any type of streaming online videos, the legal teams told me that images can be featured under Fair Use.

It is entirely common for people in the UFO community to report upon each others’ work, and to recirculate copywritten images.

Many researchers have used the classic Blue Avian image we developed with Corey Goode, along with many others, in their own reporting.

I encourage this data-sharing of our material, providing that someone isn’t simply re-uploading an entire video I made myself. We are all working together to create Disclosure.

This was a very significant lesson for me, and I will be far more careful from now on in how I report on possibly newsworthy data.



We continued trying various strategies to save the channel throughout the entire three months, which led right up to the big weekend at Contact in the Desert.

During this time, a new wave of highly upsetting public attacks began in early May.

Again, there is a huge story behind all of this that we will not be sharing, in order to reduce infighting and drama, and because it is still a serious issue.

This led to very public and surprisingly sarcastic and malicious threats to our physical safety at Contact in the Desert, which were witnessed by thousands.

We considered completely pulling out of the event, but did not want to betray all of you who had paid to come and see us speak.

Again, we are going to be far more careful in the future with events. We will ensure that we have adequate security in every situation for your safety, just in case.

Anyone making public threats of violence against us will be escorted off of the conference grounds by security or police.



Additional “cleansing” within the cyber-verse has further driven down the number of videos with my name in the title as of today’s date, June 21st. Look at this:


June 21st, 2019


If they keep working hard enough, soon there won’t be any “David Wilcock” videos left at all. Nor anyone else you might want to watch.

Undoubtedly, tens if not hundreds of thousands of videos from real creators reporting on my work have now been sanitized.

The number of losses here obviously cannot all be from “Teddy Bear” re-uploaded videos.

Friends of mine who had vast playlists of incisive videos exposing the Deep State have indicated that every last one of them has now disappeared.



Now as we head into Section Three, we will start to address the big question in more detail:

Why in the world would YouTube destroy its own platform, and enrage its entire user base to the boiling point?

WHAT IF… someone is expecting a massive ‘Data Dump’ of new intel that is so game-changing that every YouTuber in the Known Cyberverse will not only want to, but NEED to report on it?

This, my friends, is the coming DECLAS. Things are getting very interesting now as we head into the Apex Event Sequence.

How could the Deep State prepare for this? How do you stop a spontaneous internet revolution?

Can you use a beach umbrella to shield an avalanche?

What if you rig up the entire YouTube system as a whole to only feature “Trusted” sources… who will push bread and circuses as the entire amazing story unfolds?

Do you see it now?







Let’s get back to the fact that YouTube just pulled a global stunt, equivalent to suddenly killing rock and roll in the height of the 1970s.

Millions of YouTube creators have been suddenly treated like gutter trash — decirculated, demonetized and deplatformed.

It is no longer a fair competition. You cannot “go viral” unless you are already mainstream media, enjoying this unfair advantage.

The same financiers own the mainstream media and social media giants. They finally decided to consolidate their businesses.

This has created a massive All is Lost point for an entire generation… the seeming death of their main artistic and creative inspiration and outlet.



When we get back to the dynamics of storytelling and the Hero’s Journey, sometimes the All is Lost point is immediately preceded by a shocking betrayal.

Every good book, TV series or movie in the spy, thriller or mystery genres relies upon a “Big Twist” in the plot.

The Big Twist is what really makes things exciting and generates the All is Lost point.

It’s all about a seemingly decent character suddenly being unveiled as the embodiment of pure evil.



You, as the viewer, are trying to figure out who the villain is.

You take the clues the movie is giving you, study them carefully, and still hope to be surprised by the Big Twist.

Then you find out…. oh my God, it’s THAT DUDE! 

Or in the case of the super-disappointing and “unearned” Illuminati switcheroo ending for Game of Thrones,

“Really? It’s HER?” 

This was a sickening betrayal to all the men and women who had identified with Danerys, and liked her as a powerful female character with her impressive dragons.


5/13: Top Game of Thrones Character Turns To Genocidal Evil in Series Conclusion

While there were many unexpected moments on the show last night… the episode’s biggest WTF moment came when Daenerys decided to unleash the fiery wrath of Drogon on King’s Landing, killing millions of  people in the process.

[This was] despite the fact that the city’s residents had already surrounded and rung the bells, the namesake of the episode, to signal their capitulation….

Most grievances towards Dany’s actions in “The Bells” is less about the showrunners turning Daenerys into a mad queen and more about how said transformation feels abrupt and unearned….

[USA Today]

It’s one thing to be ruthless, as Daenerys has always been; it’s another to be truly cruel and evil. Daenerys’s actions in “The Bells” were the latter.

She instigated a completely unnecessary mass killing, a vicious act that is entirely outside her established character.



This is typical Deep State / Cabal / Illuminati psy-op nonsense. The actress playing Danerys herself had no idea in advance that her character was going to turn into pure evil at the very end.

Therefore, any of the normal “tells,” nuances and clues that she would have built into her performance, had she known, were simply not there.

Check out this linked video of how awkward the various actors were in the show when asked about the ending:

Three-Minute Supercut of GOT Cast Pretending Not to Be Disappointed By How the Show Ends (Highly Awkward)



The “Big Twist” had no real foreshadowing. The Deep State just once again tried to force-feed a very sick teaching into its audience.

The same message was conveyed once again: Human beings are rotten and despicable creatures, and “Betrayal is the first rule of the Order.”

Considering that these producers who just sucker-punched the world are also serving up the next two Star Wars films, we shouldn’t expect satisfaction.



In screenwriting, there is something called “The Law of Economy of Characters.”

This means that the betrayer in the Big Twist is someone you will have met from the very beginning of the movie or series.

Once you understand this and begin applying it to all works in this genre, it becomes much easier to see the Big Twist coming.

In many of these setups, the villain appears to be helping out the very groups who were working to expose their crimes.

As a planet, we have just hit the Big Twist with what YouTube has done.

The betrayer appears to be YouTube, but is really the Big Four — and behind them is the Deep State / Cabal / Illuminati.

A company we thought we knew and loved has just been unmasked, revealing a frighteningly diabolical character change.



We haven’t seen the third act yet, where the solution presents itself… but the Twist has now occurred.

The newly-unveiled villain has been there with us, side-by-side, since the beginning.

They claimed that they wanted to help us.

They now tell us that certain basic thoughts and statements are “Harmful,” “Dangerous” and “Supremacist.”

Now they have been unmasked. This isn’t about what’s right for us. It’s about raw, naked and absolute power — at all costs.

Though Big Tech is only killing off people’s cyber-identities, this is very much a real war being played out in the cyber-verse.



Now that the Big Twist has been revealed, everyone is going back and looking more deeply at the heads of these companies.

YouTube’s CEO, Susan Wojcicki, has a net worth of 500 million.

Google CEO Sundar Pichai has a net worth of at least 600 million, and now makes 200 million a year.

That’s $833,000 a day just to show up for work. Hell, I’d get out of bed for that — as early as you need me to.

This is enough money for millennia of living in splendor, if you chose not to use it to help save the world.

For 500M, you could live for five thousand years at a hundred grand of living expenses per year.

A hundred grand a year is considered to be “Upper Class” by US tax standards.

Or, if that salary is still not good enough, you could have been living since the time of Christ on a generous quarter-million bucks a year!

And that’s providing that you didn’t invest a single dollar of the principal balance along the way, or make any other good business decisions.



Now wait another year, pass Goo and collect 200 million more.

Then circle the board again, hanging in there for one additional year and a half.

Unless Jesus shows up again and sends you to detention and sensitivity training, or the DOJ does its own terrestrial version of the same,

You will now be covered for another 2000 years at the same rate of 250 grand per annum… until the “Jesus Window” opens up again.

Alas, I digress.

3/28: Abigail Disney: What It’s Like to Grow Up With More Money Than You’ll Ever Spend (It Sucks)



Let’s take the UNICEF guideline of “feed a starving child for 50 cents a day.” That’s $182.50 per kid per year.

That means you could feed two million, seven-hundred-thirty-nine thousand, seven-hundred-twenty-six children for an entire year for 500M.

If Half-Billionaire Guy decided to be cool with stopping at 600 million, and donated just one year of his salary to feeding the hungry, he could feed over a million children for the year.

And there are far more than that who are in need within his own home country.

Does he ever see their faces in his dreams?

[Bear in mind that the Deep State loves to put obvious scapegoats like this out there, while the hidden players are worth vastly, vastly more. It is important not to lose sight of that.]

12/11/18: Google CEO Runs From Alex Jones at Congressional Hearing



Once you start thinking about it in those terms, if you have access to “that kind of money,” there is a clear and undeniable moral and ethical obligation to try to improve life on Earth.

If I was ever put in charge of a fund of that size, I would immediately begin hiring experts to help determine how it could be used for the greatest overall good.

A very important element would be to genuinely treat the root causes of the problems we face… to maximize the quality of life for as many as possible.

Very basic things like clean and free energy, mitigating the garbage crisis and enhancing the availability of drinkable water and quality food would be paramount.



I have already put my hands on a garbage technology that can process 1000 tons of MSW (municipal solid waste) per day.

It costs 3 million US per unit, fits in an 18-wheeler-sized truck body, has zero emissions, and pays for itself within 3 years.

This baby is on the short, short list as a funding priority. No question. We are way past the point of needing this.

Everything becomes recyclable. The only byproducts are usable bio-fuel and distilled water… and the machine generates far more fuel than it takes to run.

If you stop and think for a minute, that excess of generated fuel means it is a de-facto free-energy device.

It can be tooled to process car tires, animal waste, ocean plastic, you name it… everything except for explosives and radioactives [at present.]



This picture is just a small section of the whole machine, and once we are in the right place we will have far more to say on this.

The inventor has a very interesting history. My wife and I have toured the facilities, seen the device, watched the videos and surveyed the printed materials.

Until this is fully funded for mass production, these guys may be at risk. Plus there are the inevitable hecklers who want to aggressively harass any and all of my associates.

The main system it uses is induction technology… the same thing that the coolest modern stoves are using for very fast electric cooking.

I admit that neither Elizabeth nor I were brave enough to drink the glass of distilled water that was made from old car tires, though.

This technology also makes it possible to build completely self-sustaining communities, which is another huge plus… wherever here, there, on-planet or off-planet you want to go.



America produced 262.4 million tons of MSW in 2015. That’s 718,904 tons of garbage a day, or about 4.4 pounds per person.

At maximum efficiency, America could have ZERO net garbage output with only 719 of these units running full time.

What does that mean, exactly?

For as little as 2.15 billion dollars, (probably 3 since full efficiency is impossible,) America’s garbage crisis could be GONE…. in a YEAR.

Best of all, if you style it as an investment, you get all that money back within three years… and then it’s Trash to Cash!

Plant owners would start COMPETING for who gets the trash… because it saves them a fortune in fuel costs once the machines are paid off, and it’s free!

Instead of paying for trash pickup, you’ll have companies fighting over who can pay you the most to take it off your hands.

Perhaps Google founder and Alphabet CEO Larry Page could kick loose, let’s see…. 1/25th of his net worth, and give something back to the country that made him impossibly rich….



You want to clean up the trash?

If you let people exercise freedom of speech on social media, the extra ad revenue should be more than enough to solve the garbage crisis alone.

Here’s another sobering statistic: you could feed every single starving person on Earth for 30 billion dollars a year.

Larry or Sergey could feed everyone on Earth for a year and a half, and still have a staggering five billion dollars left to spare.

Five billion is still enough for twenty thousand years of affluent living at 250 grand per year. That should do it!



You could sit down with Larry or Sergey and there is no glow coming off of their bodies. They are just as real and human as anyone else.

That begs the question:

Why is it always “Someone else will do it!”

Who, exactly? Superheroes?

These problems are solvable. The reason nothing ever gets done is we have a “Deep State” / Cabal with fantastic power, and which actively works towards mass depopulation.

Thankfully, some billionaires are doing genuine philanthropic work to help humanity. Here is an uplifting, if not tear-jerking example:

5/20: Billionaire Pays Off Entire Graduating Class’s Student Loan Debts (Video)



Though it may sound silly at first, once you get the basics of food, water, shelter and sanitation nailed down, a good next step would be to get everyone on earth an affordable smartphone.


You now have the potential for mass literacy and education. You open up incredible new opportunities for billions of people.

They can learn a language, study medicine, engineering or law… you name it. With education comes the opportunity to elevate themselves out of poverty and join the workforce with new skills.

You also greatly reduce the likelihood of corrupt governments engaging in atrocities — since anyone can film and upload events as they happen.

Evil thrives in darkness. In a full-smartphone world, no one will be able to get away with atrocities for any length of time.

I would like to think that most of us would feel compelled to think in similar ways if we got to manage a fund of this size.

You can only have so much “stuff,” and these CEO salaries are vastly beyond that level.

So few people have “this kind of money” that LA has a glut of unsellable mansions at a ‘mere’ 20 million and up.



Let’s face it. “Alphabet” is just a tech company. Granted, you guys have been unusually successful at playing the game, but still.

A tech company is not a government. Its executives and board members are not elected by the public.

You work for us by providing a public service that our elected government is supposed to regulate, to keep everything fair and equitable.

No matter how amazing it may all feel in the boardroom chatter, you guys need to look beyond your own corporate culture.

Never before in history have we seen a company go this far in declaring itself an unelected “government within a government.”

A tech company like this is supposed to be publicly regulated, subject to the oversight of the country it operates from within.

This is definitely not happening.



‘Alphabet’ — you know, like the CIA and other such agencies — just does anything they want.

Few of us are even lucky enough to get a split-second of a real person’s time in response.

When you destroy the meager incomes of millions of people with a cover story so thinly veiled as to fool no one, as we will discuss, there is sure to be a massive backlash.

How will this sudden sucker-punch to the world look in six months? A year? Five years? A hundred years?

It’s quite the historic, “game-changer” event in many ways.

6/20: Senator Calls For YouTube, Twitter to Lose Immunity if Politically Biased



YouTube appears to have been destroyed by its masters for political reasons… in a brazen public attempt to influence the next US election.

It also appears they are desperately hoping to reduce the damage from an anticipated DECLAS data dump of megalithic proportions.

It is as simple as that. The greatest honey-trap in human history. Lure ’em all in, make ’em comfortable, and then….. ha ha ha ha ha haaaa!!!!!

Anyone trying to establish a following in alternative journalism on YouTube is now facing nearly impossible odds. The entire community has now been buried alive.

Fun fact: last August, it was revealed that 96 percent of Google search results for ‘Trump’ are from liberal (mainstream) media sources.

If you hate Trump, you may feel like this is A-OK. Cool. No problem. Get that son-of-a!

However, what YouTube has just done is far, far worse than rigging the search-engine slot machines.



If you do not fall in line with exactly what the mainstream media wants to program us to think, you are now engaging in “hate speech.”

You are furthermore subject to permanent demonetization or actual deletion of your channel for simply having an opinion that the Secret Masters do not consent to.

This just happened in the last two weeks. We will discuss the specifics in a minute. The event was called Vox Adpocalypse.

This was far worse than the initial mainstreaming of YouTube into PooTube in late March / early April.

Now instead of just being ‘shadowbanned’ and getting lower viewer counts and revenue, you are literally on death row in the cyber-verse for talking politics.



Let me put it this way:

I absolutely HATED the fact that George W. Bush was president. I knew all about his oily, Deep State family lineage and learned of new outrages on a daily basis from alternative media.

However, if a small group of private corporations had made it completely IMPOSSIBLE for anyone to speak kindly of the man running our country, for better or for worse….

I would have been VERY DEEPLY CONCERNED. And I would have publicly defended their freedom to high-five each other about ‘Dubya.’

I did feel that the Bush cartel had fooled millions of people through playing on hot-button political issues.

Either way, I never felt threatened by pro-Bush media. Let ’em have their echo chamber!

Sound off. Have fun. Go Bush! Life goes on. Whatever.



Okay. We made it this far. You’re still here. You see where this may be going. Before we go on any further, I would ask you to please:


Take a breath

Open your mind

Do your best to step away from the constant media-saturated “outrage machine” for just a moment, and:

Be willing to consider additional information that may be unfamiliar and/or initially unpalatable to you.

Think about other times in your life where you thought you knew exactly what was going on, only to be completely blown away by new information.

That appears to be an incoming experience that will be arriving, like it or not, over the next few months — for the entire world.

“THE PLAN” will move forward, regardless of the titanic attempts now being made to censor information.



There is an incredible, world-changing story going on here that you are simply never going to hear from the “Approved” sources.

If you have a programmed emotional response as soon as you encounter this story, you may be blinded from seeing a vast amount of hidden and exciting truth.

You may find yourself grasping at straws to try to disprove the story if your emotions are too bruised to study it objectively.



When this story was presented to an audience of 1200 people at Contact in the Desert, there was almost unilateral support.

Only one man raised his hand when asked if anyone was feeling uncomfortable.

Shortly afterwards, one woman began heckling and then quickly left the room.

Other than those two people, this huge audience was roaring with enthusiasm and support for the “Forbidden Story.”

Nonetheless, the entire mainstream and social media apparatus is doing everything it possibly can to try to prevent you from hearing the Story, or even being aware that it exists.

If you have lived your life through the eyes of these old-school “opinion makers,” the reaction of that huge conference audience would have totally shocked you.



Before we get into the Story, let’s talk a bit more about how you are being prevented from hearing it by the Powers that Were.

Our YouTube videos are on an ad network with 60 different content creators who engage in alternative journalism.

On the very day that the #VoxAdpocalypse articles hit the media on June 5th, eight out of 60 of the channels on this network were permanently demonetized. Just like that.

That means they still have their channels, but can never again make any money from them through any means, including Super-Chat donations.

This is a wildly unacceptable escalation within the war. Up until now, individual videos might get demonetized, but rarely, if ever an entire channel.

From a mind-control perspective, note that YouTube’s own word ‘demonetized’ is very close to the word ‘demonized.’

This is similar to how poor people were called ‘villeins’ in the Middle Ages, beginning in the 14th century.



Anyone who was ekeing out a living as an independent reporter on YouTube is now one ‘mistake’ away from Uber driving.

They are additionally being “shadowbanned,” so none of their audience will ever find them unless they manually type in the name.

1/25: YouTube Will “Shadow Ban” Conspiracy Videos


Even if you hit Subscribe and click the Notifications bell, many viewers are complaining that they still see nothing when new content arises.



Below are some catch-up articles if you are unfamiliar with #VoxAdpocalypse.

I do not support infighting or attacking anyone regardless of race, color, creed, sexual orientation and the like. That’s the “hot button” on this issue.

Either way, this whole thing absolutely looks like a setup, executed with the speed and precision of a master con artist playing the “shell game.”

Sell it to people as combating “hate” and “supremacy,” but then in the process, just mow down any and all, ahem, “Harmful” discussions that scare you and your buddies.

If you read these next articles, it will become very clear that Big Tech is doing whatever it can to sway the next election:


6/5: YT To Ban “Hateful” and “Supremacist” Videos [Translation: Anyone Questioning the Deep State]

6/5: YT To Delete THOUSANDS More Conspiracy Channels

YouTube will delete thousands of accounts after banning “supremacists”, conspiracy theorists and other harmful accounts, it has claimed.

The decision was made after an in-depth review of its rules on hateful content, YouTube said.

While it has always banned hate content in general, the site has allowed some specific kinds of harmful videos – such as those promoting Nazi ideology or claiming 9/11 did not happen – to continue being hosted on the site.

Those videos, as well as other kinds of “supremacist” content, will now be officially banned.


6/24: Hidden Cam Footage Reveals Google Exec’s Plan to Prevent “Trump Situation” in 2020

Project Veritas has released a new report on Google which includes undercover video of a Senior Google Executive, leaked documents, and testimony from a Google insider.

The report appears to show Google’s plans to affect the outcome of the 2020 elections and “prevent” the next “Trump situation.”…

When I returned home I found it had been removed from YouTube…

Fortunately, I was able to isolate a direct link to download an MP4 version of the video (69MB, 25 minutes), should any wish to do so (remember that it is the property of Project Veritas and should be treated as such) (alternate download link).


UPDATE: 6/25: Execs Go Into Hiding After Election Tampering Hidden Cam Scandal



No further channels on my particular network were demonetized after the initial eight were finished off on the very first day of #VoxAdpocalypse.

Up until now.

This very much suggests that a premeditated effort was made, and the intended targets had already been mapped out well in advance.

Kill ’em all.

Next step. Next step. Next step. Next step. Keep pruning it back as fast as you can. Eliminate all dissenting thoughts.

The apparent causes of #VoxAdpocalypse were just a politically useful moment that allowed a pre-planned agenda to move forward.




Now, anyone who dares to talk about the current administration is engaging in “hate speech,” “white supremacy” and yes, even “homophobia”….

Unless, of course, you are engaging in hate speech against the administration.

In that case, you are attacking the “Approved” target, and will feel like you have the full support of the Machine behind you.

Turn on the TV, crest the wave and feel like all is right in the world. Let ’em keep you in a comforting state of constant outrage.

If you do truly hate the “Approved” target, you may initially feel perfectly fine about everything that you see happening right now.

I get it. The president has a big mouth. He routinely pisses people off. Certain policy decisions are indeed an outrage. I will gladly admit that.

Either way, this hyper-coordinated attack is an insult to democracy, free speech, and the values, morals and ethics that we have been taught to live by.



Within the Forbidden Story is a very interesting perspective that should have everyone excited, even if they can’t stand the President.

Nothing is black or white in this world.

Therefore it is ridiculous to accept the spoon-fed mass-media nonsense that we are in a 100-percent negative situation right now.

There is a far more interesting story going on, but you will only hear about it by participating online. Never on television.

The Rockefeller-Versus-Rothschild Illuminati War has been going on for well over a century now, and possibly for millennia based on certain new briefings.




These two factions are happy to duke it out, fight to the death, and have what they think of as a “Sexy” battle for who gets to dominate the Earth.

However, there is one rule above all others in this battle: NEVER, EVER, EVER LET THE PUBLIC KNOW WHAT IS REALLY GOING ON.

The factions may hate each other and routinely murder each other, but everyone knows it’s Game Over if the public finds out who they really are… and what they really are doing.

If the Alliance is real — and it most definitely is — once they spill the beans in DECLAS, that’s it. Game over.

This can never happen again.

Top perpetrators would gladly accept prison to avoid the torches and pitchforks of angry masses. It really could get that bad.



CNN proved themselves to be unbelievably sore losers in this Shadow World War III when they made an astonishingly direct, public death threat against the President of the United States.

YES. This is not a joke, nor a misinterpretation.

It was thinly-veiled enough to potentially invoke “Plausible Deniability,” as in “Oh no, we didn’t REALLY MEAN TO IMPLY….”

And yet that’s exactly what they did. Take a look and see for yourself.

And as you look at this, remember that much of YouTube has now been converted to force-feed you content from these same MSM networks.



It began when CNN described a ride inside the current Air Force One as “Like Being Held Captive.”

In the accompanying article, they used a picture of JFK coming out of his plane… less than an hour before he was assassinated.

Certainly you recognize Jackie’s pink outfit, right?

This is an incredibly brazen move, which again shows a state of complete desperation:


5/24: CNN Uses JFK Pic from Day of Assassination to Describe Trump’s AF1


And did you see “News and Buzz?” Trump’s Latest Twitter Tirade and Calls for Impeachment.

Here’s another angle from a second or two later in time. Notice the positions of their hands on the railing, and where they are on the staircase:



CNN, CIA or whoever you are, this is not f-ing funny. Every single viewer’s subconscious mind has that fuzzy pink outfit forever burned into their neural circuitry.

Techniques like this can be deployed in an attempt to signal vulnerable or otherwise mind-controlled individuals, such as through MKULTRA, to carry out attacks.

Individuals with certain diagnoses could feel like they saw a “Message from God” that no one else noticed, and then imbue it with profound significance that leads to action.

In this case, the headline “It’s Like Being Held Captive” could lead vulnerable individuals to feel as if the country itself is being held captive.

The iconic JFK image then implies the “solution” — if the vulnerable individual decides he needs to be the “hero” in this story and short-circuit the ‘impeachment’ process.



Here’s another one, which is thankfully less serious than an actual implied death threat and incitement of vulnerable individuals.

On May 2nd, 2019, we found out that unprecedented steps were being taken to literally erase all discussion of Alex Jones from the internet’s collective memory.

I get it. A lot of people can’t stand him. You might be one of them. That’s fine. He’s buried up to his eyeballs in lawsuits and they will go on ruining his life for years.

6/19: Two Legal Wins For Sandy Hook Vs. Conspiracy Theorists

A judge ruled that Jones is now prohibited from filing motions to dismiss the defamation lawsuits filed against him, the AP said.


But whoa-whoa-whoa… is Alex’s big mouth so offensive that you must never suffer the slightest possibility of hearing it ever again?

Are you going to cheer on unelected tech giants who literally want to delete all mention of his existence from the cyber-verse?

4/5: Alex Jones’ Lawyer: If You Want Infowars Silenced, You’re Scarier Than He Is



IS IT POSSIBLE…. that Alex maybe-just-maybe is saying stuff that they don’t want you to hear? AND IF SO…..

What if you actually try to attack Alex but OOPS, the AI algorithm thinks you like him — and dutifully kills off your cyber-identity?

Aren’t you cool enough to make up your own mind, laugh a little if you stumble over that barking face, and click on to something else?

How in the hell can they be so public about this? Are we really that numbed out?


5/2: Link-Banning is FB’s Terrifying New Censorship Tool

Not only has Alex Jones’ personal account now been banned from Facebook, in addition to PrisonPlanet editor-in-chief and YouTube star Paul Joseph Watson, but all links to Infowars sites are now banned across the platform.

Share Infowars too often, and you’ll be banned too.


Via The Atlantic:

Infowars is subject to the strictest ban. Facebook and Instagram will remove any content containing Infowars videos, radio segments, or articles (unless the post is explicitly condemning the content),

and Facebook will also remove any groups set up to share Infowars content and events promoting any of the banned extremist figures, according to a company spokesperson. (Twitter, YouTube, and Apple have also banned Jones and Infowars.)

This takes censorship on social media to altogether new levels. If you post Infowars content on Facebook or Facebook-owned Instagram, your post will be removed.

If you post it repeatedly, you will be banned.


Note the wording, too — you’ll be banned unless you’re condemning Infowars. 

Facebook is now brazenly using its power to reward certain political positions and punish others.

This isn’t censorship of an individual or a group over a violation of terms of service.

It’s the wholesale ban of an independent media site, which for all the criticism levied against it, has had a major impact on the politics of the United States.



The second part of the likely “one-two punch” was to utterly destroy Jones’ life and reputation with falsely-planted evidence, as this next link from June 14th, 2019 reveals:

6/14: FBI Investigates Child Porn Planted on Alex Jones’ Server


This is disturbingly similar to what happened to me with countless numbers of Teddy Bear videos, as we discussed in Section One.

Links to child exploitation sites were hard-burned into stolen videos of mine and re-uploaded, while my own channel suffered a prolonged takedown.

Talk about projection! Who on earth has more consistently spoken out against elite child exploitation than Alex? Seriously.

If you ever watched his shows, then you know he was covering ALL aspects of alternative news on an industrial scale.

And the MSM is treating this fake story as if it must be true.



Had this “planted evidence” plan succeeded, it would have been far more difficult for anyone to stand up in Jones’s defense as his life was destroyed.

If you now try to speak up and help him out on Facebook or Instagram in any way, KABOOM — it’s an instant kill. Who will be next?

Although Alex Jones can be extremely annoying, no one deserves to be framed through such diabolical means.

Lord knows what kind of depraved crap any of us will find if we actually dare to open our Spam folder and take a look in it.

Thankfully, the FBI has his back, and never once considered him to be a suspect in this bizarre case.

Most suspiciously, the people suing him knew exactly where to look for the depraved material that they then “discovered.”

Despite the protests of his attorney, Alex is offering 100K for an arrest and a million more for a conviction if you can crack the case with evidence he will be releasing.



Even if you hate the current administration with a passion, and identify with the mass media’s anger and projections, this unprecedented Orwellian mass censorship is still not cool.

Trump may win again. This is a democracy. We need to be OK with that even if we don’t like him.

The values, ethics and morals of American citizens do not comport with lying, cheating and stealing in order to rig an election, as we saw with Watergate.

Only the most diehard Nixon loyalists continued to support him after it was discovered that his team had bugged the opposition’s offices to gather incriminating data that could sway the election.

If an election doesn’t work out the way you want it to, you get involved and work for the outcome you want in the next one.

You might feel that you got stuck with a crappy president for a while, but life goes on — and the system is designed with checks and balances to limit potential damage, within reason.

The system flips back and forth, and no one can expect to be consistently happy with the results, just like no team always wins their games. This is nothing new. It’s always been that way.



Big Tech is absolutely and unquestionably attempting to rig the 2020 election against the current sitting US president.

This is called treason. Highly illegal. If you need to cheat to win a race, you don’t deserve the victory.

Once Lance Armstrong was found to be using performance-enhancing drugs, he was no longer seen as the heroic winner of seven different Tour de France bike races.



The entire spectrum of social media and YouTube video streaming platforms have now been juiced up with performance-enhancing drugs in an attempt to keep the Deep State corpse in the race.



Nope. Won’t work. Nice try, guys.



“Hate Trump, check. Hate Alex Jones, check. C’mon, David, this is a Nothingburger.

“I’m about to click off and drop a nice steaming pile of hate in the comments before I go.”

Hold on. Just wait! The suppression goes far beyond just the political arena. You haven’t seen any of the most powerful stuff yet.

Any and all discussion of the potential hazards of vaccines ……..

Has been completely banned!

Can you be absolutely, positively 100 percent sure that there is nothing to worry about if you or your kids get a vaccine?

Are you so sure of this ‘fact’ that you will allow unelected tech giants to make it impossible for you to make up your own mind?

You don’t need to think. Leave that to the big boys. Sleep… sleep…. sleeeeeeeeeeeee



Just like the term “Alex Jones,” if you even dare to say a single word that questions the awesomeness of v@ccines…..

Your cyber-life as you know it may soon be extinguished in the cyber-verse!

Take a look:

5/7: Instagram Will Use AI to Filter Anti-V@x Content

Instagram will roll out new ways to prevent the spread of misinformation about vaccines, including a pop-up warning that appears when you search certain anti-v@x terms.

The feature is still in development, and Instagram’s safety team was not able to share a launch date….

[Facebook owns Instagram, in case you didn’t know.]


A flurry of measles outbreaks across the country has raised concerns about v@ccine misinformation, particularly online.

This February, YouTube cracked down and demonetized anti-v@x videos. Shortly after, Amazon removed anti-v@x documentaries from its Prime Video streaming app.

Last month, Facebook said it would bar anti-v@x groups and pages from advertising and ad-targeting topics like “vaccine controversy.”

The changes at Facebook extended to Instagram, which is currently blocking certain hashtags associated with misinformation, like #v@ccinescauseaids.

Instagram doesn’t plan to ban accounts or erase posts that discuss vaccines or anti-v@x ideas [yet].

The plan is to limit the intentional spread of misinformation while highlighting accurate [ahem] v@ccine information.


Nonetheless, a whopping 45 percent of Americans doubt their safety:

6/25: Surprising Survey Shows 45% of Americans Doubt the Safety of V@ccines



This is the last step before “anti-v@x” becomes “Dangerous and Harmful Content,” and you will no longer be allowed to see or share any of it…

You know, for your safety and whatnot.

Think of it like a v@ccine… similar to the dosages being administered against the infectious thoughts of Alex Jones.

Soon you will be fully immune!



“He gazed up at the enormous face. Forty years it had taken him to learn what kind of smile was hidden beneath the dark moustache.

O cruel, needless misunderstanding! O stubborn, self-willed exile from the loving breast!

Two gin-scented tears trickled down the sides of his nose. But it was all right, everything was all right, the struggle was finished.

He had won the victory over himself. He loved Big Tech.” — George Orwell, 1984 (with one word updated)



Additionally, as we first reported on October 27th, 2018, huge numbers of groups dedicated to healthy eating and organic food are being deplatformed as well.

The list of “purged” social media pages, from July 2018, is 84 long. (This was before a new purge of a staggering 559 additional pages.)

In many cases, these pages had gigantic followings.

We will again just list the first 35, as I did last October, to give you a sense of who the Deep State was targeting.

Most of these pages are about as far left as you could ever want… so this is everyone’s problem:


7/3: Facebook Purges Over 80 Accounts in Sweeping Attack on Alternative Media

Here’s a list of all the pages I know of which have been deleted or unpublished indefinitely:

1.Collectively Conscious (915K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

2.Natural Cures Not Medicine (2.3M followers) – Deleted on June 11th, 2018. 

3.I Want to Be 100% Organic (700K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

4.Viral Alternative News (500K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

5.Organic Health (230K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

6.Natural Cures From Food (120K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

7.Heart Centered Rebalancing (3.9M followers) – Deleted a few years ago. 

8.Awareness Act (1.1M followers) – Deleted in mid-2017. 

9.Conscious Life News (1.1M followers) – Deleted on June 5th, 2018. 

10.Wake The F— Up (550K followers) – Deleted about a year ago. 

11.Living Traditionally (570K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

12.Organic Wellness (600K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

13.Chocolate Socrates (608K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

14.Earth We Are One (1.7M followers) – Deleted on June 5th, 2018. 

15.Meditation Masters (2.3M followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

16.People’s Awakening (3.6M followers) – Deleted on June 5th, 2018. 

17.Nikola Tesla (1.7M followers) – Deleted on June 5th, 2018. 

18.Interesting Stories (1.5M followers) – Deleted on June 5th, 2018. 

19.The Warrior (1.7M followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

20.Natural Health Warriors (140K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

21.Tech Explorers (270K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

22.Universe Explorers (1.5M followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

23.Area 51 (1.5M followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

24.The Global Meditation (70K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

25.Video Explorers (780K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

26.Spiritualer. Com (80K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

27.Flower of Life (670K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

28.EWAO (30K followers) – Unpublished on June 5th, 2018. 

29.Global Freedom Movement (27K followers) – Deleted on June 19th, 2018. 

30.Health & Alternative Medicine (550K followers) – Deleted on June 13th, 2018. 

31.Pure Nature (1.7M followers) – Deleted on June 3rd, 2018. 

32.Nature Gallery (654K followers) – Deleted on June 3rd, 2018. 

33.Mesmerizing Nature (912K followers) – Deleted on June 3rd, 2018. 

34.Nature’s Touch (150K followers) – Deleted on June 3rd, 2018. 

35.We Really Like Animals (544K) – Deleted on June 20th, 2018.



“Well, David, I can’t stand Alex, can’t stand ‘The Don,’ but wow! Organic food? That’s my thing! And vaccines creep me out. What in the f-? WHY in the f-!”

Those are great questions.

And your mission, should you choose to accept it, is to sit back, eat something organic and watch a movie.

The movie is called Secret Ingredients. Their website is It is VERY HIGHLY recommended.

I couldn’t possibly out-do this movie except to throw in some wild global conspiracy s–t at the end to really freak you out even more — and get banned.

Jeffrey Hart and Amy Smith make an incredibly compelling case that it is quite literally LETHAL not to eat organic in this day and age.



The filmmakers themselves should have been the epitome of health. They were running marathons, were in tremendous athletic shape and were “eating healthy,” including plenty of veggies.

Then they, like many others profiled in the movie, all started dying. Even the dog.

There was no answer. No hope. Mainstream medicine wrote them off. In desperation, they opened up to alternative concepts.



They changed their diets… in one simple way. No other changes were made except that they went strictly, 100-percent organic.

And guess what…. ALL of their health problems “mysteriously” disappeared!

You see person after person telling the same story, crying with relief that they were healed… and shocked about how this could have happened.

The culprit is glyphosate — odorless, colorless, tasteless, absolutely toxic and saturated throughout all conventional foods.

Like all other films in this genre, they walk right up to the line where you could argue that the elite designed it to be this way…. but they never quite say it.

I will tell you this: After seeing the people crying in this movie, you will never want to eat conventional produce again.

Not even once. Not ever.

Then why is Big Tech literally trying to make it impossible for you to survey the evidence about going organic?

Could it be… that they want YOU to die as well? And your wife, your husband, your kids… yes, even your cats and dogs?



The Cabal’s directive is “Humans are Bad For The Environment,” and “We Are Saving The Earth By Reducing Its Population.”

I’ve heard this from certain “Illuminati” insiders who did their best to try to sway me to their way of thinking over the years.

I have rejected multiple offers of millions of dollars in bribes, and never accepted any meetings or entanglements whatsoever.

This has angered them greatly.

Excessive and ongoing efforts have been made towards reputation destruction — efforts that have notably worsened lately, requiring action.

The Cabal depopulation “manifesto” has been presented in a variety of their films, such as “The Matrix” and “Batman Begins,” among many others.

Yet, with the forbidden technology they are holding back from us, this planet could comfortably sustain far more people than we have now.



Again, the highest-level insiders called this covert poisoning of our food supply the “Weapons System.”

They had utterly perfected it with cigarettes, but then everyone stopped smoking and they had to change lanes.

The goal of these Weapons Systems is NOT an instant kill, contrary to some beliefs.

This is a long-term plan. It is as follows:

Preserve life until 55 years of age as a Productive Worker, and then require pharmaceutical care for as long as possible.

Guess who owns Big Pharma?

The same financiers who control the mainstream media, the music industry, the prison complex, and Big Agriculture.

This is not a ‘conspiracy theory,’ but a provable fact. Just look at the top shareholders.



Through what they call “Vertical Integration,” the same entities generate money from a variety of industries.

Vertical Integration is also the logical explanation for why YouTube and its apparent mainstream-media competitors have suddenly merged.

It’s the same old thing of “play both sides against the middle,” as the Deep State apparently owned and financed both sides of WWI and WWII.

You feed value into the system as a worker, and get some money in return.

Then you slowly die off once you stop working — and return all the money you earned to the system. Dying is very expensive.

The Weapons System also is designed to create a malaise in the public that leads to them being passive in the face of tyranny.

As an example, the Weapons System is custom-designed to greatly reduce testosterone counts in men for this same reason.



If you want to fully avoid the Weapons System, here are the main NEVERs… and I do very much live by this list as much as possible:

Cigarettes: NEVER

Factory-farmed, non-organic meat: NEVER

Processed / pre-packaged conventional foods: NEVER

Citric Acid as a preservative: NEVER

MSG / Autolyzed / Hydrolyzed / “Natural Flavor” / “Spices”: NEVER

Fluoridated water: NEVER

Conventional sugar / High Fructose Corn Syrup: NEVER

Conventional dairy: NEVER

Wheat, corn and soy: NEVER

Conventional vegetables: NEVER


Look, I get it. This is really tough. The world is lined up against you and the organic food is more expensive.

You can never be 100 percent perfect with this diet and it would drive you insane to try. The idea is just to do as much as you can.

And yes, you should check with a good doctor before making any lifestyle changes, for various reasons.

I would argue that the health bills you will pay from being sick may be far more expensive than the extra cost of going organic.

Secret Ingredients should be seen and heard far more than it has been, in my opinion.

“Fed Up” is equally powerful regarding sugar. And Dr. William Davis’ classic book Wheat Belly will scare you away from conventional grains forever.



None of these amazing movies have pointed out, yet, how the Tech Giants are literally destroying any and all discussion about going organic.

Nor is anyone looking at the sudden revealing of “Vertical Integration” between Big Tech and the Big Five of mainstream media giants and their mutual financiers.

The CEOs are being paid enough to be rich for millennia, and you have to wonder how much they know about all of this.

In the next section you may be quite surprised by the answer that is suggested.

They do not want it to even be possible for you to encounter information that could get you off of the Weapons System.

Katie Couric got betrayed by the System, sent off to the showers soon after she took over as a network anchor for CBS News.



I believe “Fed Up” is just too good for Couric not to have had some sort of inside knowledge, where she then wanted to get revenge against the System that betrayed her.

It is unbelievable to watch Fed Up and see how sugar is really the worst out of all of the Weapons Systems.

10/13/16: Some Foods May Be As Addictive as Heroin or Cocaine

The similarities between food and drug addictions are striking.

High-fat, high-calorie foods overload the pleasure centers in the brain, much like cocaine and heroin.

The more we eat these types of foods, the more we crave them to trigger these pleasure centers….


Again, they walk right up to the line by showing how conventional fast-food like McDonald’s is systematically infiltrating schools across the country.

Children are becoming morbidly obese and developing Type 2 diabetes at an alarming rate… and conventional sugar is as addictive as heroin or cocaine.

Scientists are hired to continually make these foods even more addictive, and then killed off so they can never reveal what they did.

There are plenty of choices that are far less damaging in health food stores, but again you have to spend more to enjoy them.

With all of this in mind, it should again be very creepy to note that the social-media giants are trying to prevent you from having any access to this information.

Coincidence? Or is it something more?



We are seeing a techno-corporate fascism… an unelected and unwanted group of elite censors who have turned public utilities into dictatorships under their complete control.

Unlike the old days, where you rig both sides of an election and get a stuffed shirt in there, these companies have nothing whatsoever to do with government.

They have attempted to shape the nation’s discourse by completely banning our access to entire categories and topics of information.

This now includes the complete blockage of any of the supporters of the political party that opposes them from even being allowed to speak.



If you have a particular political alignment, and your party attempts to assume complete control over all significant media sources, that should be extremely troubling to you.

If the Democrats had somehow done this to Bush during his administration, successfully, I would have been extremely concerned about that, as I said.

The Secret Powers clearly do not want the population-reducing systems of weaponized corporate food and toxin-tainted vaccines to be exposed for the dangers they present.

They are far too interested in meeting their ‘depopulation’ goals, which they worship just like any other religion.



So why are they also completely carpet-bombing any “Anti-V@x” discussion whatsoever, to get back to that for a minute?

Real vaccines confer immunity just fine. That’s not the issue. It’s all the other crap they’re putting in there that has people so worried.

The Guardian very bravely published a story on January 27th, 2019, with new intel confirming what our insider leaks have said for years… namely implying that AIDS was spread through v@ccines in Africa:


1/27: AIDS Deliberately Spread to Depopulate Africa

A South Africa-based mercenary group has been accused by one of its former members of trying to intentionally spread Aids in southern Africa in the 1980s and 1990s.

The claims are made by Alexander Jones in a documentary that premieres this weekend at the Sundance film festival.

He says he spent years as an intelligence officer with the South African Institute for Maritime Research (SAIMR), three decades ago, when it was masterminding coups and other violence across Africa.

The film also explores the unexplained murder of a young SAIMR recruit in 1990, whose family believe was killed because of her work on an Aids-related project run by the group in South Africa and Mozambique.

And it also claims the group’s then leader had a racist, apocalyptic obsession with HIV/Aids.


Keith Maxwell wrote about a plague he hoped would decimate black populations, cement white rule, and bring back conservative religious mores, according to papers collected by the film-makers.

Maxwell had no medical qualifications but ran clinics in poor, mostly black areas around Johannesburg while claiming to be a doctor.

That gave him the opportunity for sinister experimentation, Jones says in the film, Cold Case Hammarskjöld….



Documents collected by the film-makers appear to show that Maxwell’s private views were very different from his public persona. The papers suggest a ghoulish delight in the advent of an epidemic.

In one he writes: “[South Africa] may well have one man, one vote with a white majority by the year 2000. Religion in its conservative, traditional form will return.

Abortion on demand, abuse of drugs, and the other excesses of the 1960s, 70s and 80s will have no place in the post-Aids world.”

The papers read like the fever dream of a man who aspired to be South Africa’s Josef Mengele. There are detailed, if sometimes garbled, accounts of how he thought the HIV virus could be isolated, propagated and used to target black Africans.

What is less clear is whether he had the expertise or funds to implement his nightmarish visions.

Jones, the former SAIMR member, claims he did. “We were involved in Mozambique, spreading the Aids virus through medical conditions,” he says.



An IndieWire movie review from January 29th is even more direct in stating the “big reveal” of the film:

For Brügger [the filmmaker], that crisis is further complicated by the sense that it’s largely of his own making.

[He came to feel] that his funny, persona-driven approach may have been too glib for a story that touches on grave and ghoulish matters like genocide, institutionalized white supremacy, and a “doctor” who deliberately infected black South Africans with AIDS under the guise of offering them cheap v@ccines.


In The Film Stage’s review, they point out that the revelations in this documentary are of massive, world-changing significance:

Without revealing the specifics of the jaw-dropping revelations in this thoroughly engrossing documentary, if there’s any justice, what is brought to light will cause global attention and a demand for some kind of retribution.



I looked for this movie, Cold Case Hammar-Whatever, on Apple, Amazon and Netflix alike. You can probably guess what I found.

Absolutely nothing… except for unrelated TV episodes also called Cold Case.

Not surprisingly, some of the pages for the real Cold Case say they are “Still Looking for Distribution.” We know how THAT goes.

Insiders for many years have said the “medical conditions” referred to in the above AIDS-spreading quote included the World Health Organization’s smallpox v@ccine of 1976.

Trailer #2 for this movie is an absolute must-see, so I am embedding it here. At present it only has 1779 views:



Despite this trailer coming out four months ago now, the film does not appear to be available anywhere, including on their own site.

On IMDB, it says Cold Case Hammarskjöld will be released on August 16th, 2019. Let’s hope they actually found a distributor and that this film will become available.

It looks and sounds like it will be an utterly world-changing piece of cinema history.

Corey Goode once worked for a pharma company that made v@ccines, as he has said in some of our interviews.

In talking to a v@ccine specialist there, the man told him there is “no way in God’s creation” that he would ever let his kids take them.



So yes… given what we know about the Deep State and their agenda, it is again very suspicious that they want to strictly ban all mention of “Anti-V@x.”

Celebrity hero Robert DeNiro’s groundbreaking film “V@xxed” makes it very clear that there is a linkage between vaccines and autism.

Another hero who stepped up, possibly to avenge Deep State murders in his family, is Robert F. Kennedy, Jr.



This article came out a week ago on his site, as of June 13th, and we will highlight just one highly relevant section:


6/13: RFK Jr. on Mental Health Problems and Vaccines

In fact, some researchers v@ccinate healthy animals or people on purpose just to study this phenomenon. For example:

A study intentionally injected mice with the v@ccine used against tuberculosis (BCG vaccine) to induce “depression-like behavior,” finding that the v@ccine-induced depression was resistant to treatment with standard antidepressants.

Another study in mice found that both the antigens and the aluminum adjuvant in the Gardasil HPV v@ccine produced significantly more behavioral abnormalities, including depression, in the exposed mice compared to unexposed mice.

University of California researchers followed healthy undergraduates for one week before and one week after influenza v@ccination; in the absence of any physical symptoms, they detected increased post-v@ccinationinflammation that was associated with more mood disturbances—especially “depressed mood and cognitive symptoms.”

Another study of influenza v@ccination compared vaccine recipients who had preexisting depression and anxiety to “mentally healthy” recipients, finding that both groups had “decreased positive affect” following v@ccination; however, the v@ccine’s impact on mood was “more pronounced for those with anxiety or depression.”

Neuroscientists at Oxford injected healthy young adults with typhoid v@ccine to explore “the link between inflammation, sleep and depression,” finding that the v@ccine “produced significant impairment in several measures of sleep continuity” in the v@ccine group compared to placebo; the researchers noted in their conclusions that impaired sleep is both a “hallmark” and “predictor” of major depression.

Another group of UK researchers who likewise injected healthy young adult males with the typhoid v@ccine found that, within hours, the v@ccine had produced measurable social-cognitive deficits.


You want to talk about how RFK’s son is avenging his father’s death by exposing the Deep State v@ccine agenda? Good luck!

Soon, if you even bring it up, your entire identity could be murdered out of the cyber-verse. Thanks, Big Tech!



Another very obvious item on the “Forbidden List” is any discussion of pedo arrests.

Of course, the implication is that trying to expose child predators is “Harmful,” “Dangerous,” and “Hate Speech,” using their own terms.

The Powers that Were have done their very best to make it impossible to find the original, authentic An Open Secret film, as an example.

The filmmakers’ biggest mistake was in thinking they could make money on this film and get it into conventional distribution.

I had a video get demonetized in February simply for mentioning the cases of Cardinal George Pell, the second-highest guy at the Vatican, and “John of God” in Brazil.

Poland, thankfully, used crowdfunding to make a film that we now know would never be allowed to make a dime in today’s world. Take a look:



5/25: Revolution in Poland As Nation Confronts Priestly Abuse

WARSAW, Poland (AP) — One victim spoke out, and then another, and another.

A statue of a pedophile priest was toppled in Gdansk, put back by his supporters, and finally dismantled for good. A feature film about clerical abuse was a box office hit.

Poland thought it had started confronting the problem of clerical abuse and its cover-up by church authorities.

Then a bombshell came: A documentary with victim testimony so harrowing it has forced an unprecedented reckoning with pedophile priests in one of Europe’s most deeply Catholic societies.


Poland’s bishops acknowledged this week they face a crisis and made a rare admission that they have failed to protect the young.

It’s also a crisis for the country’s conservative government, which is closely aligned with the Catholic Church, putting the ruling Law and Justice party on the defensive before Sunday’s European Parliament vote in Poland….


Crowdfunded and free on YouTube, “Tell No One” has gotten more than 21 million views so far and has prompted a new wave of survivors to come forward.

About 150 people have contacted a foundation helping victims of clerical abuse, “Have No Fear.” One was an 86-year-old man who was molested when he was 6 and had never told anyone until now.

“He finally understood that he is not alone,” said Anna Frankowska, a lawyer for the organization who took his call.

“A huge tsunami has come, and there is no way this issue can be swept under the rug now,” she said. “It has to be addressed.”


Click here to watch Tell No One with English subtitles while you still can, and download it before it goes into the memory hole.

And don’t worry, you won’t have to sit through any ads. There aren’t any. Of course. This is crazy, crazy stuff.



The story of “John of God” is one of the craziest of them all.

He was working as a faith healer, loved by millions, but apparently had a dark side of unimaginable proportions.

The entire case against him was driven by a woman named Sabrina Bittencourt.



Once you start researching this story, it gets extremely crazy and disturbing:

1/31: Sabrina Bittencourt At Center of John of God Arrest

Brazilian activist Sabrina Bittencourt has now sensationally claimed the celebrity medium ran a baby trafficking operation, in which children were “farmed” in Brazil before being sold to childless couples around the world.

Bittencourt’s previous investigations led to the spiritual leader’s arrest in December.

She claimed young girls were held captive in remote farms, where they were forced to produce babies.

She added that the women were murdered after 10 years of giving birth….


Among the hundreds of allegations against Faria, his own daughter, Dalva Teixeira, came forward with a shocking statement that she was a victim of her father’s crimes.

In an exclusive interview with Brazilian magazine Veja, she said that under the pretence of mystical treatments he abused and raped her between the ages of ten and 14.


Some suspect that the children from these ‘farms’ were not just being sold to childless couples, but were sent into trafficking operations.

It is also of note that the “spirit cooker” herself got a private meeting with Teixeira in her lesser-known Brazil movie.




Sabrina also had witnesses ready to come forward and identify thirteen other high-level perpetrators.

Not long after “John of God” was arrested, Sabrina mysteriously “committed suicide,” after saying in videos that she never would.

Unfortunately, the single most elaborate article about this story, on Tiffany Fitzhenry’s site, has disappeared off of the internet entirely.

[UPDATE: A commenter did find an archived copy of it after all:]

The next article below has similar information, however:


2/4: Sabrina Bittencourt Mysteriously Kills Herself

AN ACTIVIST whose claims led to the “rape” arrest of a celebrity healer called John of God has taken her own life at her hideaway in Spain….


Bill Clinton and supermodel Naomi Campbell are rumoured to be among the high-profile celebrities to have visited the 77-year-old.

Mrs Bittencourt, 38, who was “living under the protection” after receiving death threats, claimed Teixeira de Faria ran a “sex slave farm.”

The mum-of-three claimed young girls were held captive to produce babies to be sold on the black market before being murdered.

She was quoted as saying: “Hundreds of girls were enslaved over years, lived on farms in Goias, served as wombs to get pregnant, for their babies to be sold.”

Mrs Bittencourt said she had received reports of the newborns being sold for up to £40,000 in Europe, USA and Australia.

She added: “These girls were murdered after 10 years of giving birth. We have got a number of testimonies.”


Announcing her death Vitimas Unidas said: “(The) group announces with regret the death of Sabrina Bittencourt, which occurred around 9pm on Saturday in Barcelona.

“The activist committed suicide and left a farewell note explaining the reasons why she took her own life.

“We ask you all not to try to contact her relatives. Two of her three children are still not aware of what happened and their father, Rafael Velasco, is trying to protect them.”



Once her children found out, they were not at all convinced it was a suicide:

2/4: Sabrina Bittencourt’s Son Declares She Was Murdered

Ms Bittencourt left Brazil and was forced to live under protection after receiving death threats.

Her eldest son Gabriel Baum confirmed her death, writing on Facebook: ‘She took the last step so that we could live. They killed my mother.’



In this translated Brazilian article from December 23, 2018, we find out that Sabrina had uncovered 13 other perpetrators:

12/23: Sabrina Bittencourt Preparing to Expose 13 Other Gurus

The activist [Sabrina] overthrew the medium and guru Prem Baba. And she has in her target 13 other spiritual leaders who sexually abuse the faithful….

From a Mormon family, Sabrina had been abused since the age of 4 by church members attended by her parents and grandparents.

At 16, she became pregnant with one of the rapists. Aborted.

Today, at age 37, she is involved in a cause both universal and private: she struggles to organize and prepare complaints against abusive religious leaders….

For his part, he prefers “psychopath” and “sexual predator”, among others less flattering.

Bittencourt is the woman behind hundreds of allegations of abuse against John of God and Prem Baba. Secretly, she is preparing material to unmask 13 other Brazilian spiritual gurus….

Bittencourt is one of the creators of the Coame “movement”, an acronym for Combating Abuse in the Spiritual Medium, a platform that concentrates reports of sexual violations committed by priests, pastors, gurus and their counterparts….

She changes her house every 10 or 12 days, she changes her country without registering the border….


“It is endemic — this absurd amount of leaders of various religions who abuse children, young people and, especially, women.

Since the age of four, I have been abused several times by the church Mormons we attended, against whom no action was taken.

My path was drawn from the pain of the other and from my pain. I had known all along that I had privileges that others had not.

So, to be able to heal myself of these pains, I did social work intensely for 20 years. “…

“The things I do are very organized. The denunciations against Prem Baba and João de Deus worked out because I saw the variables of each of the groups.

What matters to the victims? Speak. To the cops?…


So I get the information from people from vulnerable groups, I organize. Set the pace, tone and ethical code of how to treat the victims of that spiritual leader.”…

“I never imagined that from Prem Baba’s bid, I would be able to receive 103 reports from 13 different spiritual leaders from a single Facebook post.”


2/4: Bittencourt Dies While “Living Under Protection” in Spain (DELETED, NO ARCHIVE.ORG)

[UPDATE: link found by a dedicated researcher in the comments. Here it is:]



Again, by simply reporting on these two stories that were covered in mainstream media overseas, my video got demonetized.

As so many independent journalists have discovered, nothing gets you banned faster than reporting on human trafficking.

So again, you might be on the “Dump Trump” train, but isn’t it weird that Big Tech is also destroying and all conspiracy analysis, organic food, vaccine debates and expose’s of crimes against children?

And now, literally ALL YouTube independent creators have fallen victim to this unprecedented mass censorship campaign.

In case you haven’t been following this, again: It’s BAD.



Many YouTube creators spent five years, if not longer, building up a following and revenue stream, only to have it ripped away in a single, devastating event this month.

Very few people were paranoid or adventurous enough to foresee the entire platform being converted into a mainstream-media fear-porn Pez dispenser.




Last October, there was a major purge that featured combined activity between Facebook and Twitter, two seemingly separate corporations:

10/13/18: Project Launched to Save Alternative Media from Purges

The day before yesterday, Facebook and Twitter deleted hundreds of accounts with tens of millions of combined followers, in the most intense wave of censorship we’ve ever seen.

Websites critical of police brutality, government corruption and war, mostly of a Libertarian or Anarchist persuasion were struck, while the mainstream media reported that it was some kind of purge against spammers.

That couldn’t be further from the truth.


10/15/18: Succumb to FB and Twitter’s Demands or Get Banned

A recent purge by Facebook and Twitter of a host of independent media sites has pushed thousands of people out of work and has killed one of the most effective forms of expressing political dissent.

On Thursday last week, Facebook purged more than 800 pages and accounts, accusing them of engaging in “inauthentic behavior” and violating Facebook’s anti-spam policies.


10/13/18: Internet Censorship Took Leap Forward, Hardly Anyone Noticed

After a massive purge of hundreds of politically oriented pages and personal accounts for “inauthentic behavior”, Facebook rightly received a fair amount of criticism for the nebulous and hotly disputed basis for that action.

What received relatively little attention was the far more ominous step which was taken next:

Within hours of being purged from Facebook, multiple anti-establishment alternative media sites had their accounts completely removed from Twitter as well.


As of this writing, I am aware of three large alternative media outlets which were expelled from both platforms at almost the same time:

Anti-Media, the Free Thought Project, and Police the Police, all of whom had millions of followers on Facebook.

Both the Editor-in-Chief of Anti-Media and its Chief Creative Officer were also banned by Twitter, and are being kept from having any new accounts on that site as well….


The Deep State is so terrified of the coming mass awakening that they have used the “nuclear option,” and are burying ALL channels they cannot directly control… regardless of their content.

They clearly appear to be making last-minute preparations to try to stop an avalanche of newly-declassified information from reaching the public once it arrives, as anticipated this summer or early fall.

A top YouTube talent, Keemstar, has now banded together with 100 other top YouTube talents to strike back at the mainstream and social media giants for this outrageous stunt.



What the Deep State hasn’t accounted for is that the more censorship they do, the more people they inspire to jump in and join the battle.

People with full-time jobs have enough hours left in the day to make their own videos and speak out while they still have a chance.

And they are not threatened by being demonetized or even banned, because they are just getting started with taking a stand in bold defiance against tyranny.

As a recent example, within hours of Isaac Kappy’s highly suspicious “suicide,” there were literally thousands of intelligent videos appearing on YouTube exposing the entire story.

Vigilant Citizen wrote an article that explored several of the themes in these videos, which you can read by clicking here.

Many of the videos went on for an hour or more, exploring a variety of details relevant to the story.

Most, if not almost all of them got knocked down by “The Algorithm,” but this is just the beginning of an unstoppable change.



In case you don’t know what Kappy was up to, here’s an article from Collective Evolution from soon after his debut:

8/16/18: Isaac Kappy Calls Out Hollywood Pedophiles


As Q Anon has repeatedly said, “These people are sick.” That is a very mild statement that just helps you get started in the awakening process.

Now as we head into the next section, get ready for an incredible new bombshell.

An insider from the dawn of Facebook — one of the four founding members — has come forward with a story that you have got to see to believe.

The story is so rich with specific and intriguing details that it seems very unlikely to be any type of falsification.






The Deep State has obviously reached a point where they no longer care. They are “Freaking Out” through this mass censorship and other means discussed in the preceding sections.

If you talk about organic food, natural remedies, potential problems with vaccines, child predators, Alex Jones or the President of the United States, you’re a goner.

The Deep State very likely know their time is up, and therefore are just trying to reduce the speed and severity of their defeat once DECLAS happens.

They are desperate to stop you from learning about the Weapons Systems they have actively deployed for mass depopulation and Big Pharma money-making.

Discuss the president of the United States other than with hate? Nope. Discuss Alex Jones? Gone. Organic food? Gone. Question vaccines? Gone. Child predators? You’re outta here.



This political meddling by Facebook is not limited to the US alone. The same thing was done in Italy… and on throughout all of Europe:

5/13: FB Shuts Down Pro-Populist Italian Pages Before EU Elections

In its report, which was presented to Facebook on May 3, Avaaz said it had identified 14 Italian networks on Facebook comprising 104 pages and six groups, with a total reach of 18.2 million followers.

This week, Facebook took punitive action against 23 pages in these networks, with a total of 2.46 million followers and 2.44 million interactions over the last three months.

Facebook has also reportedly “weakened” pages that spread content with allegedly false news, presumably making them less visible to Facebook users….


The most active page in support of the Lega party was among those closed, just as polls are showing that the Lega is currently the party with the most support among Italians for the upcoming elections.

Facebook’s efforts in Italy to influence the European elections are just the tip of the iceberg, Italian media noted.

According to the Italian daily La Repubblica, on May 2 Facebook opened a “war room” in Dublin devoted full time to the European electoral campaign, with 40 teams of engineers, scientists, researchers, threat specialists, and experts for each country.

There are 500 people working on the elections, with the assistance of 21 supposed “fact-checkers,” operating in 14 different languages.



Chris Hughes is one of the original founders of Facebook. This will become very significant in a moment.

As you can see here from, Hughes was one of the original three besides Mark Zuckerberg. And notice the date: When Was Facebook Founded?

Facebook was initially launched on February 4, 2004. It was founded by Mark Zuckerberg, Dustin Moskovitz, Chris Hughes and Eduardo Saverin.


As many have now pointed out, the Pentagon announced the cancellation of its LifeLog project on the exact same dayFacebook was founded, February 4th, 2004:

2/4/04: Pentagon Kills Lifelog Project

The Pentagon canceled its so-called LifeLog project, an ambitious effort to build a database tracking a person’s entire existence.

Run by Darpa, the Defense Department’s research arm, LifeLog aimed to gather in a single place just about everything an individual says, sees or does: the phone calls made, the TV shows watched, the magazines read, the plane tickets bought, the e-mail sent and received….


Civil libertarians immediately pounced on the project when it debuted last spring, arguing that LifeLog could become the ultimate tool for profiling potential enemies of the state.

Researchers close to the project say they’re not sure why it was dropped late last month. Darpa hasn’t provided an explanation for LifeLog’s quiet cancellation.

“A change in priorities” is the only rationale agency spokeswoman Jan Walker gave to Wired News….

David Karger, Shrobe’s colleague at MIT, thinks such efforts will still go on at Darpa, too.

“I am sure that such research will continue to be funded under some other title,” wrote Karger in an e-mail. “I can’t imagine Darpa ‘dropping out’ of such a key research area.”



As you just saw, there are only three other founding members besides Mark Zuckerberg.

Chris Hughes decided to go public on May 9th, 2019 about the evils of Facebook.

This was big news at the time, and prominently linked on Drudge Report.

The original MSN link has since disappeared:

It was only thanks to the magic of that this very important document was recovered:


5/9: It’s Time to Break Up Facebook (Archived Link: Chris Hughes)

It’s been 15 years since I co-founded Facebook at Harvard, and I haven’t worked at the company in a decade. But I feel a sense of anger and responsibility.

Mark is still the same person I watched hug his parents as they left our dorm’s common room at the beginning of our sophomore year….

In other words, he’s human. But it’s his very humanity that makes his unchecked power so problematic….

Mark’s influence is staggering, far beyond that of anyone else in the private sector or in government.

Mark is a good, kind person. But I’m angry that his focus on growth led him to sacrifice security and civility for clicks.

I’m disappointed in myself and the early Facebook team for not thinking more about how the News Feed algorithm could change our culture, influence elections and empower nationalist leaders.

And I’m worried that Mark has surrounded himself with a team that reinforces his beliefs instead of challenging them….



In this next quote, Chris Hughes made it clear that Mark and his potential handlers wanted to use Facebook to “dominate the world:”

5/9: It’s Time to Break Up Facebook (Archived Link: Chris Hughes)

We are a nation with a tradition of reining in monopolies, no matter how well intentioned the leaders of these companies may be. Mark’s power is unprecedented and un-American.

It is time to break up Facebook….

From our earliest days, Mark used the word “domination” to describe our ambitions, with no hint of irony or humility….

Facebook’s dominance is not an accident of history. The company’s strategy was to beat every competitor in plain view, and regulators and the government tacitly — and at times explicitly — approved….

Investors realize that if a company gets traction, Facebook will copy its innovations, shut it down or acquire it for a relatively modest sum.

So despite an extended economic expansion, increasing interest in high-tech start-ups, an explosion of venture capital and growing public distaste for Facebook, no major social networking company has been founded since the fall of 2011….

I was on the original News Feed team (my name is on the patent), and that product now gets billions of hours of attention and pulls in unknowable amounts of data each year….



Next, Hughes describes how Facebook has superseded elected governments and is controlling free speech worldwide.

5/9: It’s Time to Break Up Facebook (Archived Link: Chris Hughes)

The most problematic aspect of Facebook’s power is Mark’s unilateral control over speech. There is no precedent for his ability to monitor, organize and even censor the conversations of two billion people….

The most extreme example of Facebook manipulating speech happened in Myanmar in late 2017.

Mark said in a Vox interview that he personally made the decision to delete the private messages of Facebook users who were encouraging genocide there.

“I remember, one Saturday morning, I got a phone call,” he said, “and we detected that people were trying to spread sensational messages through — it was Facebook Messenger in this case — to each side of the conflict,

[They were] basically telling the Muslims, ‘Hey, there’s about to be an uprising of the Buddhists, so make sure that you are armed and go to this place.’ And then the same thing on the other side.”

Mark made a call: “We stop those messages from going through.”

Most people would agree with his decision, but it’s deeply troubling that he made it with no accountability to any independent authority or government.

Facebook could, in theory, delete en masse the messages of Americans, too, if its leadership decided it didn’t like them….



Lastly, Chris calls for a new government agency to properly regulate Big Tech and prevent this from happening:

5/9: It’s Time to Break Up Facebook (Archived Link: Chris Hughes)

Just breaking up Facebook is not enough. We need a new agency, empowered by Congress to regulate tech companies. Its first mandate should be to protect privacy….

I take responsibility for not sounding the alarm earlier.

Don Graham, a former Facebook board member, has accused those who criticize the company now as having “all the courage of the last man leaping on the pile at a football game.”

The financial rewards I reaped from working at Facebook radically changed the trajectory of my life, and even after I cashed out, I watched in awe as the company grew.



This public statement by Chris Hughes was incredibly brave and brazen. It is no surprise that his article “mysteriously vanished” after being published on May 9th.

Just one month later, one of the original three founding members of Facebook (other than Mark) hand-delivered a MOAB letter to The Anonymous Patriot’s Conclave.

In full context, it may well have been written by Chris Hughes, who may have structured his confessional in two parts — first a quickly-censored public version and then a semi-anonymous version that was far more intense.



This letter was published on the American Intelligence Media website as of June 13th, and is being referred to as the “Zuckerberg Dossier.”

At this time, prior to our publication, it is still fairly obscure, with only 11 Likes and 16 comments. That will change:




With that being said, if there is any one article that you absolutely must read after working through this Ebook, this is the one.

There is so much in it that is so powerful and mind-blowing that it is difficult to avoid wanting to just quote the entire thing.

However, we will leave it up to you to read the full statement.

Let me put it this way. The dossier is so long, intricately worded, passionate and filled with specifics that it most definitely is not a LARP.

As a researcher who has spotted dozens of genuine insiders over the years, there are hundreds of undeniable markers that indicate this person is indeed who he claims to be.

This person is clearly risking his life to come forward and is also fully prepared to testify before Congress to everything he has written in the dossier.

With that said, these are only allegations. Anyone accused of such things by an anonymous insider is innocent until proven guilty in a court of law.



If you have long-term familiarity with the research on this website and others like it, many things will jump out at you.

In short, the dossier says Mark was a pawn for Deep State players who used him as a ‘patsy’ to make Facebook look like it came from the youth.

Mark apparently did not do any of the work himself, and therefore still cannot describe how he accomplished the initial tasks.

Sadly, he was allegedly subject to extreme mind-control torture since childhood, and broke down in tears more than once describing it to his friend.

In the run-up to the 2016 election, Mark was apparently ordered to completely sacrifice ‘his’ company, if necessary, in a brazen attempt to steer the outcome — just like we now appear to be seeing with YouTube.

Part of what is so interesting about this dossier is the ‘teasers’ that are put in there, indicative of much more information than has been revealed.

Other areas are extremely generous with information and detail. You really do need to read the whole thing to see what I mean!



Here are certain ‘teaser’ quotes that particularly caught my attention in the dossier:

“Mark had been told to win the country for Hillary, or kill the company trying. He was making astounding mistakes that showed the truth of the evil foundations of Facebook.”

“I believe that Mark is doing everything in his power to get President Donald Trump deposed, just as he did everything he could to try to help get Hillary elected. If Trump continues, the globalists lose.”

“This current decision to destroy Facebook from the inside out is nothing more than Mark’s handlers using Mark in their last hours of power. Trump will win 2020 and Facebook will die.”

“Mark wants to be like Eric [Schmidt, of Google,] and control the world from a digital Ivory Tower and oversee the depopulation of the earth.

These maniacs believe they are “above the human race” and are actually higher beings sent to the earth to control the masses.

From my experience, these attitudes are extremely prevalent with Silicon Valley tech giants — and they make me sick….”



If this was indeed a LARP — and again it seems vastly too detailed, quirky and specific to be — these areas would very likely have been far more developed.

One thing I have consistently noticed with real insiders is they toss out diamonds without even realizing it.

Just the idea of the Deep State tech giants thinking they are “higher beings sent to the earth to control the masses” is a one-off that could be VASTLY more explained.

If this author was a LARPer, he would very likely use that section of the Dossier to sound off with all of his favorite theories and info.

Furthermore, the author does not go into any further detail about why he thinks the current US president will defeat the globalists.

The depopulation agenda is mentioned, really without any further commentary — whereas a LARPer would likely go into great detail on these points.



Now, without further ado, we will review just a few of the many must-see quotes contained within the Dossier. Let’s begin:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Admittedly, this Zuckerberg “Dossier” has enough information in it to put Mark Zuckerberg behind bars, and therefore would not be touched by the Main Stream Media – according to the person who hand-delivered this letter to a member of the Anonymous Patriot’s Conclave a few days ago….

American Intelligence Media does not claim that the Zuckerberg Dossier is 100% correct, but we can state with absolute confidence that the source is real.

We also believe that there may be other installments of what we are calling the Zuckerberg Dossier, and will probably not be the last time we hear from this source, as the trouble that Mark is having in the news keeps mounting….



To Every Facebook User,

Mark Zuckerberg, and all of us who were there from the beginning, are lying to you and using your personal life as a government-controlled experiment in brain-washing and mind-control – basically a weaponized system of the military (CIA especially) that got out of control.

At this point, Mark Zuckerberg has lost control of a company that he never really owned or operated.

Truly, anyone who has ever worked with Mark knows that his mind is a blank, and that he is nothing more than a parrot for the government handlers who created him.

Mark is incapable of running a McDonald’s, let alone one of the most powerful companies in the world.

Not even his name is real, and his identity has always been covered up. Mark was chosen as child for a CIA training program because his relatives were some of the people creating the program….


…The other three teams that were working at Harvard, under Harvard president Larry Summers, [worked] to create what DARPA and In-Q-Tel wanted the most – a cyber-weapon that could control the minds of anyone that could be lured into it.

Facebook was always a military weapon – just like Eric Schmidt’s Google, which was incubated in the same fashion that Facebook was.

Mark was a patsy, but a ruthless, heartless, cold-blooded non-human patsy.

He became this way through the brain-washing he received in his High School years by a DARPA program called TIA [Terrorist Information Awareness], which needed a “boy-genius” to be the front man.

This scam would make Mark into a global model of the young, cool, irreverent computer geniuses that “rule the world” and lead everyone to a cyber-god of artificial intelligence.

Mark was just an unwitting puppet at first – I felt sorry for him.



In this next quote, we find out that the relationship between Mark and the insider was allegedly not platonic.

If this was Chris Hughes, it may explain the title of the MSN article from the month before.

I did actually have a dream in which I saw this title with a comma in it: “It’s Time to Break Up, Facebook.”

The title may therefore indicate that its author was “breaking up” with Mark in more ways than one. Let’s continue:


6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

I remember when I first became room-mates with Mark in our sophomore year at Harvard. We were in Kirkland House, on JFK Street and had to endure Dustin and Andrew.

[Again, the other three founders are Dustin Moskovitz, Chris Hughes and Eduardo Saverin. Perhaps Eduardo may have gone by ‘Andrew,’ or Andrew may not be seen as one of the three other founders.]

Mark hated them because they prevented us from sleeping together, even though we were in the same room.

It was frustrating and kept our relationship secret.

Little did I know that the thing that drew me to Mark, a certain openness for listening to anyone, also made him extremely promiscuous with both sexes.



Now as the Dossier continues, we begin hearing about the mind-control practices that had apparently occurred.

This is where it really starts to feel like a spy thriller movie… and if this proves to be true, that movie will definitely be made someday:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Mark had no morals, conscience, or shame. He also chased women on Craig’s List and would sometimes just disappear to rendezvous with them.

He was like a blank slate that simply echoes whatever was happening in his environment.

I loved and hated this aspect of his personality but later found out that he, and his brother and cousin, were all the same way due to the brain-washing programs they were subjected to during high school.

If certain people spoke to Mark in person or on the phone, he would drop everything and do whatever they told him to do.

Certain people had more power and effect over him.

I eventually found out, from Mark breaking down and crying, that the brain-washing was permanent and was all part of the “position” these people had promised to create for Mark.

He didn’t even know what this “position” was or entailed….



Before we go on, I would like to point out that Mark Zuckerberg was played by Jesse Eisenberg in the movie The Social Network, which promoted the ‘approved’ storyline.



The Deep State will often communicate subliminal messages through movies, including by linking different topics together through the same actor playing different roles.

This can help ensure they are ‘authorized’ to get away with what they are doing… by spiritual laws they call “The Rules.”

Therefore, I find it very interesting that Jesse Eisenberg also played a mind-controlled slave assassin in “American Ultra,” which very openly applauds MKULTRA.



The movie portrays a victim of MKULTRA programming as a Bourne-Identity-type of superhero, while also honestly acknowledging the horrific problems it causes.

Additionally, Eisenberg played Lex Luthor in Batman Vs. Superman, which is one of the most Luciferian films ever made.

Both Batman and Superman are portrayed as “fallen angels,” whereas Eisenberg is a Demiurge-style take on Jesus as being a malevolent, demonic being.

The scenery around Eisenberg’s character in the movie is astonishingly blatant and worthy of detailed analysis.




As we go on, you may find yourself feeling sympathy for Mark Zuckerberg if this all turns out to be true. This type of torture is very sad under any and all circumstances.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Mark always had panic attacks and would break down frequently due to the brain-washing – according to Mark.

He would cry about his mother and the “torture” she let “them” do to him.

At those times, Mark’s mouth ran on open and he would tell his bed-partners about all the pain and horrible plans these “evil people” did to him.

Early on, his doubts and fears almost consumed him at night, and he could hardly sleep due to nightmares.

Once Mark became filthy rich, he simply used drugs to mask these fears.



[As a side note, it is a noteworthy gesture to give away 99 percent of the earnings. At present he would be left with 710 million.]



As the dossier continues, we find out that Mark apparently cannot explain how he supposedly created Facebook.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

But if you get him upset by asking about the creation of Facebook, Mark will freak out and have a panic attack because he always messes up the story and looks like an idiot.

He can’t stand questions about “how he made Facebook” – because he didn’t.

I had to laugh as one of his stupid answers: “I saw that Harvard didn’t have a Facebook, so I made one”, or something close to that.

The journalist let him get away with that lie, like they always have.

Mark Greenberg (Zuckerberg) did not write one single line of programming source code for Facebook. Those are lies and propaganda generated by his government, military handlers….



As the dossier continues, we find out that the President of Harvard was apparently directly involved, along with other high-level operatives.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Mark simply had others adjust the code into what was a government-sponsored military weaponization of a cyber-warfare project directed by the President of Harvard, Larry Summers.

Even Summers himself had his own budding student and staff directory being developed by the Harvard computer staff called “Facebook.”

Mark didn’t even create the name!…



In this next excerpt, we find that Google founder Eric Schmidt was apparently part of the same initiative.

The author gets very detailed about who, exactly, was involved in financing and organizing all of this.

Again, the specifics here are interesting enough to suggest that this is not a LARP:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Eric Schmidt was the poster child for the Silicon Valley geniuses who ran corporations that are basically exempt from prosecution.

[They are] the facade for military-weaponized companies that are always funded by the same evil bankers—

Fidelity Investment, Vanguard, T. Rowe Price, BlackRock, JPMorgan, HSBC, Accel Partners, Kleiner Perkins and the rest of the Silicon Valley venture capitalists, who always make a killing from companies who get no-bid government contracts.

These companies, like Facebook, are just an excuse for black-ops experiments to control the enemy – and Mark doesn’t know who the enemy is.

Mark’s lack of a moral compass made him the perfect patsy for the new “military experiments on U. S. citizens.”…



This next excerpt details how the hidden players have used companies like Facebook and YouTube to manipulate elections:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

I believe now, since Mark was well-aware of the evil intentions of the government, that he has committed crimes of many types with the clear, pre-meditated intention of harming every user of Facebook.

That is why Mark let Facebook be used to manipulate elections. He has no moral core.

personally saw the “template” that Hillary ordered that uses Facebook to manipulate voters to win elections for her.

Given the amount of election interference by Big-Tech in 2016, I became a reluctant believer in miracles.

I have seen the truth concerning the supposed “Russian Interference,” and can tell you that it was all made up and, in fact, was the exact opposite of what the media reported.

I have seen so many illegal actions of Facebook that I am indeed complicit with the crimes. That is one of the reasons I must remain anonymous.

But I assure you, if I testified, Mark and I would be locked up along with the other members of the Fellowship as well as many, many other Facebook employees….



In this next quote, we find out that everyone within this core team apparently knew exactly what they were really doing.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Though I will not tell you who the members of Mark Zuckerberg’s “Fellowship” group were,

I can point out that all of the original members of Facebook knew from the beginning that it was a military project for cyber warfare mind-control.

Everything done from the beginning was an experiment to see just how far a social media platform could go to “conquer the enemy” —

through behavioral manipulation with electronic warfare.


The idea that Mark wanted to connect all college students in America was a novel idea that was far from the true intention: the mind-control of every user in the world.

Free platforms like Google, Gmail, Facebook, and the rest were confidence tricks to get users to experiment on.

My old buddy, Sean Parker, an early member of Facebook has “confessed all” to the media, and specifically told the truth that Facebook was meant as a cyber-drug to create and control addicts – digital addicts.

As Sean said, we knew from the beginning it was harming every user.

That is why we never let our friends or our children use these systems – it harms them tremendously, and was the original intent of the media.

Mark and I were told by representatives of DARPA that that was the intent of Facebook from its inception.


[DW: Now maybe you understand why I don’t even open Facebook unless I need to announce something.]



Things get even more sinister as we go on from here. This is indeed how the Deep State sees us, based upon my own extensive research:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

The U. S. Patriot Act allows the military to consider every American a possible terrorist or enemy warfighter until proven otherwise.

Every person on the Internet, which was also created by DARPA, is considered a cyber-terrorist.

The military sees it as their job to create systems to surveil, target, disarm, and aggressively remote-control the user.

I hated the idea from the first time I heard of it.

Personally, I have never used Facebook, and don’t let anyone I love use it….



In this next excerpt, we get additional witness testimony of the apparent mind control that was being used on Mark to keep him on track:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

We would sometimes convince him that the project was “dead wrong”, but all it took was one phone call from “above” and Mark went back to his scheming.

It was truly pathetic to see that Mark had no freedom, but was told what to do.

He was also so poorly organized and such a muddled thinker that he couldn’t get anything done: homework, schoolwork, project work, nothing….



This next short excerpt again shows that this insider was exposed to elitist concepts that are commonplace within the Deep State:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Mark has become, over the years, no friend of America.

In fact, he hates America, and rants on about how proud he is to avoid U. S. taxes and to cheat the American people – whom he considers to be animals.

Mark believes he is a higher being – above human beings….



This next excerpt reveals one of the high-ranking military personnel who apparently steered the project:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

One day, Mark was called to Summers’ office in Massachusetts Hall to meet a most unusual man.

His name was Andrew Marshall, and he was the head of the Naval Intelligence Net Assessment Office.

Mark was terrified of Marshall from the beginning.

Marshall had Mark sign a government secrecy agreement, and other security agreements before he told Mark the ultimate military nature of what the Harvard Facebook project entailed.

Mark, and Harvard, were simply being used as incubation think-tanks as a cover for a military project that needed a corporate face….



This next excerpt requires you to go back to the article to get the full detail. It is included here to simply point out that the LifeLog data was directly ported over to Facebook.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Chandler told Mark that IBM Eclipse was preparing Michael’s program, as they spoke, to give to Mark for the Facebook launch at EclipseCON ’04 in San Fancisco — right after the Harvard January Reading Period.

He said the plan was to transfer all of the NSA’s LifeLog data as soon as possible to the Facebook platform as well….



In this next quote, the insider goes into more detail about the massive scope of government surveillance that Facebook and Google are being used for:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

We have not spoken up before now, but I personally cannot hold my silence any longer.

I must speak out openly about the criminal surveillance Mark does through Facebook, because it gets worse every day.

Mark’s handlers tell him to allow more surveillance, even though security breaches, selling customer data, allowing for spying by CIA, NSA, DIA, GCHQ, MI6, Five Eyes,

Lying to Congress, meddling in elections, allowing everyone access to Facebook data, censoring conservatives, being a platform for the Democrat party,

And many other charges [that] have been brought against Facebook in other countries and America.

Mark will not listen to me or anyone else about stopping the insanity.

I believe he is unstable and not fit to run Facebook….



Here is a longer version of one of the ‘teaser’ quotes that I pointed out as we started this section… regarding election interference.

Apparently, Facebook was seen as completely expendable if it meant that Hillary would win the 2016 election.

This is exactly what appears to be happening now with YouTube for whoever runs in 2020, as we have discussed throughout this update.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Mark had been told to win the country for Hillary, or kill the company trying.

He was making astounding mistakes that showed the truth of the evil foundations of Facebook.

Our secrets were gushing out like blood from a slaughtered pig.

I kept talking to Mark, trying to change his mind, but he became more insane and impossible to talk to….



Another ‘reveal’ that isn’t particularly surprising is that Mark was apparently told not to worry about anything if he did actually destroy Facebook.

Instead of being wiped out, he would apparently become seven times richer:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

Then, one day I realized what Mark was doing with the obvious crash-landing of Facebook.

He was being told that he would get a “deal” with the government charges against the company, and would not have to pay billions in fines.

The deal would be like the government’s deal with Standard Oil when they were charged with anti-trust, monopoly issues.

They were made to break up into seven different companies – all of which became as big or bigger than Standard Oil itself.

Splitting up the monopoly made the owners seven times richer….



In this next passage, we see another example I shared in the ‘teaser’ section.

If this insider was strongly pro-Trump, and this was all a LARP, we would expect far more detail in this section than we actually get.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

I don’t want to go to my grave knowing that I didn’t do something to atone for my sins in perpetuating these lies….

I believe that Mark is doing everything in his power to get President Donald Trump deposed, just as he did everything he could to try to help get Hillary elected.

If Trump continues, the globalists lose.

Mark is a true globalist; he is not an American anymore.

Mark essentially does not have a plan for Facebook. He simply does what he is told, and always has.

Mark has made no decisions on his own – not one.

This current decision to destroy Facebook from the inside out is nothing more than Mark’s handlers using Mark in their last hours of power.

Trump will win 2020 and Facebook will die.

The only question left is whether Trump will charge Mark Fakerberg with the crimes he committed….



Next, our insider reveals that everyone on the Board of Directors and in the investment teams apparently understands what this company is really up to.

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

As a Facebook insider, I demand Mark be fired, and all assets taken from him due to his non-stop lying to stockholders and Facebook users.

The Board of Directors, underwriters and institutional investors all know about the secret government contracts that have been propping up the company since the beginning, but most average shareholders do not.

It is a government-owned and operated military psy-ops weapon that has gotten out of control.

[It has] been used for treasonous purposes, and for seditious actions against the American people….



This next quote contains the type of insider info that would be very well known to someone who was working on the inside back in 2004.

You can still buy Katherine’s book and read it for yourself at this time:



6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

After she got sick of the lies, Mark’s former speech writer Katherine Losse described in her 2004 book The Boy Kingsthat:

Facebook has stolen personal data and sold it,

Created a “dark” profile on every user and sold it to everyone who would pay the price,

Created secret files of compromising photos,

Allowed all government agencies to access all user data,

Breached every user agreement,

Lied continuously to all users,

Built in back-doors and zero-day programs for the military,

And many other unethical, immoral and illegal activities.

Did Mark Zuckerberg (Greenberg) willing and with intent allow these criminal activities to go on unchecked on Facebook? –

You bet he did. And he is still doing it, and getting worse every day….



This is the last substantive excerpt we will review from this stunning dossier.

It shows that the globalists’ plan continues on to a communist-style “social credit” system, where your ability to live or die, eat or starve will depend upon how obedient you are.


6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

I have stood against Mark’s immoral and evil actions since our freshman year at Harvard.

Nothing has changed, except that Mark has gotten worse, and his handlers have become so demanding that they are condemning Facebook to the trash heap — and creating the circumstances for Mark to become even richer and more insane.

His next projects include a system much like what Eric Schmidt has created for China — a social credit system that controls the freedom of every American.

When Facebook is broken up, the new companies will have the Eric Schmidt “Dragonfly” social credit system built in.

Mark wants to be like Eric and control the world from a digital Ivory Tower and oversee the depopulation of the earth.

These maniacs believe they are “above the human race,” and are actually higher beings sent to the earth to control the masses.

From my experience, these attitudes are extremely prevalent with Silicon Valley tech giants — and they make me sick….



Lastly, our insider assures us that he will go forward and participate directly in the coming tribunals, which is very exciting if true:

6/13: Facebook Insider Confesses All

I personally am willing to testify without immunity and suffer whatever consequences I deserve for knowing these things and never bringing them forth until now.

I know that the corruption is so great in Washington D. C. that I would not stand a chance of bringing forth this information without being squelched, killed, or silenced, like I have seen done to others.

I suggest that the new Attorney General simply read this letter, investigate and then ask Mark Greensberg to program a single line of coherent code.

When he cannot, lock him up.



With all of the above in mind, it is not at all surprising to find out that Zuckerberg apparently has a secret ‘panic chute’ he can try to escape through if it all comes crashing down:

3/8: Mark Zuckerberg’s Conference Room Has a Secret “Panic Chute”

Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg has been accused of a lot of things, but a new report details just how far he is willing to take his privacy and safety: he reportedly has a “panic chute” in one of the tech giant’s conference rooms.

An in-depth investigation from Business Insider looked at the company’s security practices, Zuckerberg is said to have a number of different measures to protect himself, including a “Praetorian Guard” (implemented in case an employee tries to rush him when he’s at a company all-hands meeting), as well as the aforementioned “panic chute.”

“He also has access to a large glass-walled conference room in the middle of the space near his desk that features bullet-resistant windows and a panic button,” the news outlet wrote in its story.

“There’s a persistent rumor among Facebook employees that he has a secret ‘panic chute’ his team can evacuate him down to get him out of the office in a hurry.

“The truth of this matter remains murky: One source said they had been briefed about the existence of a secret exit route through the floor of the conference room into the parking garage, but others said they had no knowledge of it.”



The following video does not include all the revelations from this insider letter, but nonetheless gets surprisingly close.

It also has a non-stop feast of motion-graphics eye candy, and is therefore quite a significant effort.

You may need to watch this one more than once, since it moves very quickly as she is obviously reading from a written document:



All of this adds up to a very compelling narrative.

The same type of sinister intentions revealed in the alleged 1991 meeting about the future of hip-hop music are seen again in the Facebook Dossier.

You may struggle with the idea that this could all be true, and I understand that. It is a very difficult new reality to adjust to.

I do consider the facing of reality to be a very important spiritual discipline to adopt.



You may be wondering why the people who designed this weaponized social media system consider it a tool for depopulation.

The answer is simple: they have created a completely lawless cyber-verse where anyone can do whatever they want, with virtually no repercussions.

In our normal society, we have established, codified laws for how to interact at home, on the streets, in parks, businesses and the workplace.

These laws go back at least to the time of the Roman Empire, if not Sumer itself — and there are standard guidelines.

In the weaponized world of social media, there are no laws. Psychopaths, narcissists, bullies and the like can do as they please.

There are countless cases of people committing suicide or being driven to domestic violence and murder from these situations.

Each death caused by weaponized social media contributes to the elite “goal” of depopulation.



Furthermore, once you find yourself in a position of influence that threatens the elite, you will be targeted by paid operatives.

This was revealed in the Snowden documents, and I will now quote from Corey Goode’s recent Public Statement responding to these unrelenting cyber-attacks:


The almost total anonymity of the Internet makes it very easy for individuals to present themselves as something other than what they really are. This activity can then create enormous confusion and anger in the people who feel targeted by these attacks.

Although in the past, my team has pointed this out, again I ask you to please carefully review Glenn Greenwald’s classic article that appeared during the Snowden revelations, on February 24th, 2014. At least read the following quote from the article, as seen below.

In this article, you will see multiple screen captures of actual intel training documents from the Joint Threat Research Intelligence Group, or JTRIG, that should be far more publicized than they have been, up until now. Almost every single strategy revealed in this ‘data dump’ has been used against me, my supporters and my detractors alike in an almost endless cycle of repetition:

How Covert Agents Infiltrate the Internet to Manipulate, Deceive, and Destroy Reputations

“I want to focus and elaborate on the overarching point revealed by all of these documents: namely, that these agencies are attempting to control, infiltrate, manipulate, and warp online discourse, and in doing so, are compromising the integrity of the internet itself.”

“Among the core self-identified purposes of JTRIG are two tactics: (1) to inject all sorts of false material onto the internet in order to destroy the reputation of its targets; and (2) to use social sciences and other techniques to manipulate online discourse and activism to generate outcomes it considers desirable.

“To see how extremist these programs are, just consider the tactics they boast of using to achieve those ends: “false flag operations” (posting material to the internet and falsely attributing it to someone else), fake victim blog posts (pretending to be a victim of the individual whose reputation they want to destroy), and posting “negative information” on various forums.”


[Notice in red at the bottom that this document was circulated amongst agencies in the “Five Eyes” countries, namely USA, Australia, Canada, Great Britain and New Zealand.]


YouTube video discussing this article:

How The Government Can Destroy Your Reputation (Report):



By sincerely asking you, my audience, to stand down and not attack anyone, it is my hope that together we can greatly decrease these problems. The invisible assets who are actually being paid to do this will then become far more obvious. They almost never step forward with a face and a name. The vast majority of all of this work is done under total anonymity. Their greatest delight is if they can convince real people to pick up their arguments and further publicize them.

Even if you do believe you have identified a paid operative, I must again please request that you not harass, threaten, intimidate or otherwise bother this person in any way. We all need to be aware that these attacks never draw in more than about one percent of the overall audience, and they largely have not had much of an effect on the message getting out.




I have been speaking about UFOs and the Deep State online since the very beginning in 1996, with a website since 1999.

I am a Veteran of Forum Wars and learned a long time ago that you truly must not “feed the trolls.”

All I ever saw was people changing the subject to new attacks or otherwise ignoring you when you debunk their nonsense.

On any given day, if I chose to pay attention to it, there are thousands and thousands of wildly defamatory statements being made about me.

It is possible to toughen up and learn not to take any of this personally. That is a skill that takes practice, and sadly many do not have the tools to do it.

As we now head into the next section, we will discuss the Forbidden Story of the international alliance working to bring all of this elite madness to an end.

This is a story that I have been tracking since 2007 and receiving insider briefings on since 2009, and I am very happy with the progress we are now seeing.






Even if certain aspects of this investigation prove to have been distorted or fabricated, which seems unlikely, the overall problem still clearly exists.

People are being tortured and abused, and the world is indeed being run by a handful of corporations with seemingly negative intent.

For many years on this site, we have discussed and revealed the plans of the Alliance, which may well be the hope of the world. This is a key element of the “Forbidden Story” we will discuss in this section.

I would never write about any of this horrible stuff if I didn’t genuinely believe we were on the verge of a major revolution for the positive.

I have been covering the Alliance and its many different moves on this site since at least 2009 — well before the current US president got directly involved.

What the Alliance calls “THE PLAN” is ultimately not political. It could have happened through either party or none at all, depending upon the circumstances.



The evidence of what is coming is completely obvious for those who have been following the Forbidden Story.

The Facebook Insider Dossier hints at it in a few different noteworthy places, as we pointed out in the Teasers in the last section.

If the Deep State is really this close to a full defeat, they only really have a few cards left they can play.

The most familiar Old Standard is the one we all know so well: Start a War!

War drums are now being beaten. This is obviously intended to keep everyone very tense and in a constant state of fear and outrage.

With Iran still acting as a proxy for the Deep State, some degree of conflict may need to occur before the indictments unseal, according to the latest insider briefings.






The attacks are an old-school Deep State strategy. If all else fails, start a war. Iran is apparently the last, best proxy state left for the Deep State to use to try to do this.

Nothing short of the Biblical War of Armageddon in the Middle East can save them now… but this also will be stopped.

According to insider briefings we received, advanced technology may apparently be used to bring any Deep State-sponsored hostilities to a very rapid conclusion.

This may also provide a means through which the initial stages of disclosure occur — depending upon what technology is used.

We may see the decloaking of flying black triangles in this defensive counterattack, as one example.

At the last minute, the president withdrew from an attack plan in order to spare 150 Iranian lives, which seems very honorable and wise:



6/21: Trump Scrapped Iran Strikes Because They “Weren’t Proportionate”

(Bloomberg) — President Donald Trump said he called off retaliatory strikes on three Iranian sites following the downing of a U.S. Navy drone because the action would not have been “proportionate.”

“We were cocked & loaded to retaliate last night on 3 different sights when I asked, how many will die. 150 people, sir, was the answer from a General,” Trump tweeted Friday.

“10 minutes before the strike I stopped it.”



Now, finally, I will present a super-condensed version of the Forbidden Story as we see it.

The Facebook Insider Dossier we just reviewed in the previous section hints at this greater truth:

“The current US administration is part of a secret, international Alliance that is in a fight to the death with the Deep State, which controls mainstream and social media alike.

The Alliance’s plan goes back for decades. They have been fighting for global freedom since at least the mid-1950s. John F. Kennedy lost his life fighting for the Alliance, among countless others.

The Deep State is far, far worse at the highest levels than most people could ever comprehend… a genocidal Satanic pedo cult that historically ran the world.

The Alliance is revealing the truth to the public through a series of anonymous posts collectively called Q Anon, which repeatedly prove they are connected to the current US administration.

The Deep State’s greatest secret is a vast “breakaway civilization” in space, with technology beyond our wildest dreams… technology paid for by systematically bankrupting this entire planet.

The Alliance’s plan includes the full exposure and defeat of the Deep State, followed by the release of the forbidden knowledge and technology that has been so jealously hidden from us.

Our society will then have the greatest quantum leap in recorded history. This is a significant aspect of what various ancient prophecies referred to as ‘Ascension.’”


There is much more that could be expanded upon within this description, but it at least suffices as a starting point.

Our film Above Majestic, released late last October, should be considered “Required Viewing” to comprehend the full scope of the Forbidden Story.



And yes, our ability to advertise the film was banned during its launch, but we still managed to drive it to number one, thanks to you.

Various people understand portions of the Forbidden Story, but it is less common for people to understand the “Big Picture” and see how all the pieces fit together.

This requires the ability to study and contemplate a huge volume of contentious material. It also requires a very significantly open mind to properly appreciate the data.

The degree of violation that people feel, due to the scope of the lie, can make it very difficult to process and integrate the truth.



A very unique, dynamic and fascinating story can be assembled from various insiders, including those who publicly came forward.

This includes Col. Philip Corso, Sgt. Clifford Stone, Master Sgt. Daniel M. Salter, Major Bob Dean, Karl Wolfe, David Adair, Henry Deacon, Pete Peterson, Corey Goode, William Tompkins and Emery Smith.

Other super-insiders such as “Jacob,” “Bruce,” “Daniel”, “Uncle,” “Stan,” “Mega Anon” and the like have provided incredible information to my wife and me alike, and have yet to step forward — but that may change.

It is quite fascinating to find genuine insiders and to compare and contrast their information with others from this same world.

No two stories are ever alike, but whenever you find real insiders, there are multiple, astonishing, unexpected correlations.

In certain cases these insiders know of each other and do not like each other, but that doesn’t change the underlying continuity of their reports.

In all honesty, if we haven’t created secret bases at least on the Moon and Mars, some 72 years after Roswell, then we suck.



The world has never been the same since the 2016 elections.

A wealth of disgusting and depressing information hit mass consciousness with the October 2016 Wikileaks emails.

This appears to be the work of the Alliance — an international confederation of factions working to defeat the Deep State.

This includes governmental officials, militaries and intelligence agencies that have managed to break away from the System.

The truths contained in those emails are so horrifying that many people have refused to believe that they could be real.

Almost all of the videos exploring this have been sanitized, but we preserved the best — and worst — of all this knowledge in the ENDGAME series.

In the aftermath of these leaks, millions of people became awakened to a far greater reality — one that I have been directly aware of since the 1990s.

Now imagine that DECLAS is coming… a treasure-trove of data far larger, and more fascinating and disturbing, than anything we have seen up until now.



We now find ourselves in an immensely interesting situation.

The current US administration appears to be involved in a “shadow World War III” that is yet to be fully acknowledged by any mainstream media whatsoever.

Many civilians are voluntarily enlisting to be soldiers in this war.

However, unlike previous wars, being defeated in this battle does not lead to your physical death in the vast majority of cases.

A battlefield defeat can now be as simple as losing your video channel, social media page, or being “demonetized” and “shadowbanned” into temporary obscurity.

There will always be ways for us to communicate. Please sign up with your email address on this site if you haven’t already done so.

I also expect game-changing developments that will remove our obstacles to free speech soon enough.




The “Artificial Intelligence Initiative” wants us to so directly identify with our cyber-selves that a digital banning feels like a literal death… but it is not.

This is a very important key of how we navigate this All is Lost point. We have to break the addiction.

Losing the ability to post on Facebook, Twitter or YouTube does not mean that YOU cease to exist.

I want you to really think about this. I have spent a great deal of time meditating on all of this myself.

You may want to redefine who and what you think of as “friends” and “social interaction.”

You may want to look at a digital dry-out as the modern equivalent of seeking a path of sobriety and clean living.

That includes breaking any financial dependency you may have upon Big Tech, which can admittedly seem impossible.

You may break a very intense addiction, which forces you to go through a recovery process… but I do believe sunny days are ahead.



Despite the popularity I described in earlier sections, I will go days, if not weeks at a time without ever considering my cyber-identity.

In order to survive doing this, I rarely ever pay any attention to the negative opinions that proliferate about me. If you do, you can easily have a stress meltdown.

I do my best to be a person of honor, integrity and compassion. I know who I am. I do not engage the cyber-attacks or infighting, nor respond with self-defense.

You can let the buildings burn, because it’s all just a light show within the cyber-verse… ultimately speaking.

The only reason I mentioned it at all in this update is that certain individuals have dramatically escalated the battle, including attempts to generate physical threats at my events.

Once you free yourself from the perpetual “reward mechanism” of the DARPA addiction, you can appreciate the good things in life once again.

You take a walk without looking at your phone. Meet real friends in real places. Get out in nature. Have real-world experiences. Divorce your digital story… and marry the truth.



As I have said many times, I had two college sociology classes that exposed the Deep State and parts of its agenda in 1992.

The two key books that then sent me deeper into this path were The Character, Claims and Practical Workings of Freemasonryby Rev. C.G. Finney, and New World Order: The Ancient Plan of Secret Societies by William T. Still.

The fruits of all of this tireless research can be found in Financial Tyranny, a full-length free book on this site that has had well over 2.6 million unique views.

Furthermore, most of the articles we have written since Q Anon started have cracked the four-million mark in views, and are of key importance.

It used to be quite mystifying to watch movies absolutely loaded with Cabal symbols — the Arch of Ba’al, the All-Seeing Eye, et cetera — and to feel like I was the only one seeing what was happening.

Now all of that has changed. The knowledge has become widespread.



Very strange stories keep popping up, like this one. There are thousands of these if you begin looking for them.

What we are likely seeing in this case is a ritual site that was actively used, with some removable sod placed over the top of it:


6/22: Satanic Plaque and Altar Unearthed in the Queen’s Park in Holyrood, Scotland

In a secluded area of The Queen’s Holyrood Park in Edinburgh, Scotland, archaeologists have unearthed two mysterious objects.

[This includes] a metal plaque depicting an upside-down pentagram with a horned beast in the center – most likely the demonic entity Baphomet.

[It also includes] an altar with undisclosed “display objects” around the plinth.



While news outlets are calling the objects pagan, the symbology appears more associated with satanism and devil worship….

Holyrood…was eventually expanded into a substantial palace which served as the principal residence of the Kings and Queens of Scots since the 16 th century.

So just what are a couple of satanic objects doing in The Queen’s Park?


Mysterious Find in Queen’s Park

Edinburgh Evening News reports that the metal plaque and altar were found embedded in the ground within a section of turf cut into a triangle shape.

A concrete altar was found buried beneath the topsoil and apparently was surrounded by “display objects”, though what these objects were have not been specified.

A number of rune stones were found embedded in the concrete triangle around the metal plaque, along with the depiction of a number of different figures.

The objects were found in May last year and Historic Environment Scotland, which manages the park, brought in archaeologists to investigate the site.  But the mystery deepens. The Scotland reports:

“But, even more curiously, according to a new report compiled by Musselburgh-based firm CFA Archaeology and seen by The Scotsman, both had been removed “by persons unknown” at some point before they investigated the site in April this year, leaving just the concrete plinth and holes in the turf behind.”



By now, if you are unaware of what is happening with Q Anon, you are really missing out on an amazing story.

We will have more to say on this in future updates, and there is a wealth of information in past articles on this site since it all started in October 2017.

To read them, you can either go to or, which is more smartphone-friendly and adds context.

The most shocking aspect is the enormous number of “Q Proofs” that absolutely demonstrate, beyond any shadow of doubt, that these posts MUST originate from the US administration directly.

I will present a new summary of that evidence later on. You will not find it on mainstream media, and the tech giants are definitely trying to bury the Forbidden Story.

The Facebook Insider Dossier never mentions it, but does acknowledge that this administration is working to expose and arrest the Deep State.

At some point, this obviously WILL go public. It is only a question of when… and how. Then everyone will be going back and looking at the Q posts.

The Forbidden Story is incredibly exciting, and as I said, an audience of 1200 people at Contact in the Desert were extremely supportive of it.



The Q Anon quotes of September 19th, 2018 are likely the single most significant in understanding the secret space program aspects of the Forbidden Story, as I wrote in this mega-article.

However, I also feel that Quote Number 2700, from February 12th, 2019, is arguably the second most important Q quote to date.

Prior to this time, we were getting briefings that the Deep State tribunals would be held in secret, over a period of one or two years.

We were also told that very little, if any of the information would reach the public.

Quote 2700 shattered that myth / belief / perception / understanding forever… for those millions who follow it.



Take a look:

Q !!mG7VJxZNCI ID: 539e80 No.5140929
Feb 12 2019 11:34:13 (EST)

POTUS: “This can never be allowed to happen again (in our Country or to another President).”

How do you deter & prevent this from happening again?

Simply by terminating employment of those responsible?
Simply by conducting a few ‘non-threatening’ investigations?

Or by:
Prosecuting those responsible to the fullest extent of the law?
Setting up new checks & balances and oversight designed to increase transparency?
Provide OIG office(s) w/ funding inc (size) ++ authority?
Provide select committees w/ access and in-house viewing of non NAT SEC CLAS material?
Provide a check on Directors/Dep Directors/Asst Directors of all such ABC agencies?
Establish ‘financial checks/reviews’ of those in senior (critical) positions (audits) + direct family (close proximity)?

Transparency and Prosecution is the only way forward to save our Republic and safeguard such criminal and treasonous acts from occurring again.

While some want to quietly remove those responsible and go about our business (save face on the World Stage), those in control understand this band-aid will simply not work.

Nobody should be above the law (no matter how massive the spider-web is (entangled)).

This will never happen again.




If you haven’t been following our articles, you may very well want to review the last two years in particular.

We were the only media source to get world-exclusive interviews with Mega Anon, who precisely predicted the contents of Q Anon months in advance.

Both my wife and I had extensive conversations with her. Like any real insider, at times she went far over our heads in technical detail.

Very soon after Q Anon appeared, Mega Anon stopped talking, and the story since opened up to a vastly greater audience.



We had a variety of briefings indicating that secret tribunals had begun as of January 1st, 2019.

This included the Q Anon post number 2645, from January 5th, 2019, which included the words “EO (Executive Order) active.”



This was an obvious reference to Executive Order 13825, “2018 Amendments to the Manual for Courts-Martial, United States,” signed March 1st, 2018.

EO 13825 was cleverly worded to allow for treasonous Deep State actors to be prosecuted via military tribunals as of January 1st, 2019.

Here is a bit of the legalese explaining that, taken directly from the official US National Archives Federal Register website:

Sec. 3. (a) Pursuant to section 5542 of the Military Justice Act of 2016 (MJA), division E of the National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2017, Public Law 114-328, 130 Stat. 2000, 2967 (2016), except as otherwise provided by the MJA or this order, the MJA shall take effect on January 1, 2019.


This and other very relevant and interconnected executive orders were covered by Intellihub on September 26th, 2018.



If “EO Active” wasn’t sufficient, in post number 2672, from January 13th, 2019, it said, “GJ [Grand Jury] testimony underway in several states.” Take a look:

Q !!mG7VJxZNCI ID: 9c745a No.4739743
Jan 13 2019 14:08:58 (EST)

D House focus on POTUS = ‘insurance’ extension from MUELLER to House.
GJ testimony underway in several states.

Attempts to BLOCK/PROTECT themselves will FAIL.
Far beyond political corruption/sedition.

Law governing removal of a sitting Congress(m/w)/Senator?
Lights on.


In a briefing I had received from Pete Peterson this past October, he said that “Almost all members of Congress are listed in the sealed indictments.”

This appears to be why Q said this goes “far beyond political corruption” and discusses laws “governing removal of a sitting [member of] Congress” or the Senate.

The information leaks about these tribunals were very consistent through January and the first week of February.

Then, just as surprisingly, everything we were hearing about “secret tribunals” just disappeared. For everyone getting briefings.

From what little we’ve heard through certain sources, they were paused due to a key judge being ill, or for otherwise unknown reasons.

Quote 2700 gives a far greater insight into what has actually happened compared to any other alleged insider sources to date.

When Q said “some want to quietly remove those responsible… and save face on the world stage,” those “some” were obviously Alliance members.

This may very well explain why Big Tech has completely ruined free speech in the cyber-verse. They are truly desperate.



Quote 2700 is very relevant because we had already heard and communicated briefings saying that certain Alliance factions were pushing for everything to remain secret.

I conveyed this information, while also making it clear, very consistently, that I would vastly prefer that these trials be made public.

Since I am not in control of what is going on, nor being asked for my opinion, I simply reported what I was hearing.

We as human beings have been through many great struggles and crises, and have bounced back from seemingly unimaginable societal traumas.

By comparison to various traumatic events in our own recent history, getting confirmation that a Satanic cult was ruling the world and is finally being arrested is not really that upsetting.

There will be a profound sense of relief in many people. They knew such a thing existed and now, finally, this group is being brought to justice.



Again, Quote 2700 acknowledges that some Alliance factions wanted to keep this secret: “Some want to quietly remove those responsible and go about our business (save face on the World Stage.)”

Then, we are clearly told that this “secret tribunals” strategy has since been abandoned:

“Those in control understand this (secret tribunal) band-aid will simply not work….

Transparency and Prosecution is the only way forward to save our Republic and safeguard such criminal and treasonous acts from occurring again.”

This again was written on February 12th, 2019, and represented a very significant and little-noticed POLICY CHANGE within the Alliance.

Therefore, I propose that the reason why we’re not hearing about secret tribunals anymore is that they have been canceled, and the events that will soon follow will NOT be secret.

“Transparency” will be a key part of what happens. And when it does happen, it will be the most stunning Big Twist in modern world history.



Again, this is such a vast subject that to create one single, all-encompassing proof document is nearly impossible.

For that same reason, I highly recommend working through the articles we wrote since just before it started, one by one.

It will take you some time, but it will be highly rewarding. Again, all but the last two have now had about four million views.

Now I want to direct your attention to a series of critical quotes that emerged after the all-important Quote 2700.

Since the Q Anon posts have again taken a precipitous pause for almost an entire month, now is the time for us to go back and review the wealth of intel that we already have.

And please understand that this is ultimately not a political discussion. Nor do I want to try to convert you to any ideology.

This is an unbiased investigation of what may be “the biggest covert intelligence operation in recorded history,” and something that will soon be common knowledge.


QUOTES 2786 AND 2787

Apparently, the first wave of DECLAS will involve the revealing of a gigantic coup attempt against the president during and after the election.

The Facebook Insider Dossier confirmed this when he discussed Russia-gate and said “it was all made up and, in fact, was the exact opposite of what the media reported.

This coup attempt was done with the use of multiple foreign spy agencies to circumvent US surveillance laws.

Again, even if you don’t like the current president at all, we are still a nation of laws, and this constitutes high treason.

When you hear about FISA memos, that’s the Foreign Intelligence Services Act.

There are many, many signs available in the news that FISA-Gate is the first MOAB that will drop in DECLAS. Take a look:


2786, 2/18:

The President of the United States, the Commander in Chief, AGREED that an illegal coup was attempted against him.
Stop and understand the GRAVITY of acknowledgement.

Do you believe nothing will happen?
Do you believe no one will be prosecuted?

POTUS making statements for no reason?
How do you introduce the TRUTH to those still asleep?
DECLAS coming?
The message must be direct (bypass the non reporting of the TRUTH (facts) by FAKE ‘spin the narrative’ NEWS).




On February 18th, 2019, Q Anon predicted the mass betrayal of creators that we have now seen on YouTube.

Specifically, they intercepted ‘chatter’ within Big Tech on “how to effectively prevent cross-talk” that goes counter to their established ‘narrative.’

Big Tech is also apparently looking at countermeasures to stop people from talking on ‘Zero Day’, which is when the DECLAS data dumps arrive.

One of Big Tech’s ideas is to stage a fake take-down of “select platforms,” and Q assures us that “countermeasures are in place” for this:


2793, 2/18: “Chatter uptick re: how to effectively prevent cross-talk re: anti-narrative across all social media/online platforms.

Ability to prevent cross-talk narrows comms only to FAKE NEWS, which provides for more control over what is released to inform the public.

A series of scenarios is currently being conducted [‘game the sys’] to test response, risk, and calc results.

‘Censorship’ — [added] layers of inserted code ‘through keyword targeting’ in bio, history, and comments + indiv platform mods — has failed to curtail the problem.

‘China-Russia-Iran’ ‘fake’ take-down hacks of select platforms (for maintenance) is one scenario being game-played.

Countermeasures in place.
Think Emergency Alert System.
Think WH-controlled *new* RT ‘news’ website
Think WH-controlled *new* video stream platform
Think Here.

Should this occur, immediate steps will be taken to classify each as ‘Public Utility’ (essential public services) to gain appropriate gov regulation (control).

Why do we make things public?


Indeed, Q has already telegraphed that when they need to make the Big Announcement, they will use the Emergency Alert System on our phones.

This system was tested nationwide last September with a Presidential Alert. I was very excited as it came in on my phone, but it wasn’t the Big One.



The Alliance may also debut their own version of YouTube, as we see here — a “new video stream platform.”

And 8Chan, which is what they obviously seem to mean by ‘here,’ may also be used.



Quote 2803 makes it clear that worldwide coverage will be FORCED to occur by a series of interconnecting factors:

2803, 2/18: “Look for ‘Placeholder’ updates @ /PatriotsFight

Indictments, arrests, and DECLAS will force WW coverage.

Leaks, bribery, collusion re: media will force resignations w/ follow up criminal prosecution.


Also notice in this quote that the “leaks, bribery and media collusion” that we are now seeing, such as with YouTube, will indeed force resignations and criminal prosecution.

There is a “hard deadline” of this coming to pass by mid-September, likely due to the importance of it not affecting the elections any further.

This is the time. Ready or not, here it comes.

2806, 2/19: Image, “Now that Russia collusion is a proven lie, when do the trials for treason begin?”




We used to be able to get a wide variety of briefings through various insider sources.

Now, we are all waiting in anticipation, with very little intel other than Q itself to go by.

There really are no exceptions to this, and anyone who thinks otherwise is unaware of what is really happening.

Q also made it clear that the information they did release already was necessary to prepare us for what is coming:


2814, 2/19: “Discretion must be applied when dealing w/ matters of NAT SEC / sensitive ongoing investigations.

Info released to date was necessary in order to refute the FAKE NEWS narrative and provide the public w/ a taste of the TRUTH (i.e. future events).

Conf sources (House) that you gain critical info from is simply one of many vehicles used (by design).

NO LEAKS for this reason.



This next passage addressed the ongoing complaints of people wanting immediate action, and being greatly upset by all the waiting.

I am quite certain that a magnificent, impossible-to-obstruct case is being put together, and once it all unfolds it will be quite spectacular:


2816, 2/19: “The DECLASSIFICATION of all requested documents (+ more) will occur.

This is not a game.
Do not let personal (emotional) desires (“do it now””now””what is taking so long””NOW!”) take over.

Logical thinking and strategy should always be applied.


NEW THREATS (investigations by [SDNY], [AS], [MW] in an effort to delay/prevent release (‘insurance extension’) WILL FAIL.

TRANSPARENCY is the only way forward.”



In post 2819, we get a screen-capture of a request for DECLAS from 9/17/18, although you have to read it in the reverse order:




In post 2843, Q responded to a comment on 8Chan, and said that once the Mueller investigation wraps up, “the fun begins directly after,” as in very soon from right now:

2843, 2/20: “Anonymous   adf50c (9)  No.5294864>>5294883 >>5294930 >>5294942>>5294949 >>5294980


John Solomon on Hannity”

But, you knew that already.
Hence why [AS][SDNY][MW] are attempting to keep the ‘insurance’ scheme ongoing post Mueller.

The fun begins directly after.
Will make the Super Bowl look like a puppy show.



In case you don’t think DECLAS will include evidence of high-level child trafficking crimes, quote 2894 proves otherwise:

2894, 2/25:

Many more to come?
Dark to LIGHT.



Multiple briefings have confirmed that US Attorney John Huber, out of Utah, is the main attorney directing the mass sealed indictments.

Q gave a link to an ABC News article, but did not quote some of the most important elements of what it said.

If you read the article, it says, “Cristina Ortega is an Assistant U.S. Attorney here in Utah. “My primary focus in the violent crimes team is child porn. Child porn cases.””

Elsewhere in the article, it says, “There are now 56 prosecutors in the U.S. Attorneys Utah office.”

With that as our starting point, notice what Q Anon then asked us to look at:

2939, 3/3:

Sometimes reading between the lines provides…

“Huber says every one of the prosecutors is already handling about twenty cases.”

“They range from domestic terrorism to court-authorized wiretaps of criminal organizations to child pedophiles and those who would exploit our children.

Criminal aliens. Big fraud schemes.”



56 prosecutors working 20 cases each is a whopping 1,120 different cases, and each sealed indictment can have dozens of names in it.

“Domestic terrorism…. Criminal organizations… big fraud schemes.”

Other Q drops indicated that this is only one aspect of a much larger, unified team working on a significantly greater number of cases.

Also remember that as each case turns into a sealed indictment, they are likely moving on immediately to new cases.



In 2940, from March 3rd, Q again directed our attention to the ongoing increase of sealed indictments on the record.

They also pointed out that these indictments are international as well… not just domestic within the USA:

2940, 3/3: “February 2019 Update to #SealedCases

5,832 new 82,324 entered 10/30/17 thru 2/28/19

Avg: 5,145 per month

Thank you, Anon.
Note: Not all are USA v. [ ]
Nothing to see here.



A series of posts, beginning with number 2988 on March 6th, discussed the LifeLog / Facebook connection.

In hindsight, this seems oddly prophetic of the Facebook Insider Dossier that then followed in June:

2988, 3/6:

Define ‘Lifelog’ [DARPA].

“an ontology-based (sub)system that captures, stores, and makes accessible the flow of one person’s experience in and interactions with the world in order to support a broad spectrum of associates/assistants and other system capabilities”.

The objective of the LifeLog concept was “to be able to trace the ‘threads’ of an individual’s life in terms of events, states, and relationships”, and it has the ability to “take in all of a subject’s experience, from phone numbers dialed and e-mail messages viewed to every breath taken, step made and place gone”.

Define ‘FB’.

The Facebook service can be accessed from devices with Internet connectivity, such as personal computers, tablets and smartphones. After registering, users can create a customized profile revealing information about themselves.

Users can post text, photos and multimedia of their own devising and share it with other users as “friends”. Users can use various embedded apps, and receive notifications of their friends’ activities. Users may join common-interest groups.


Compare & Contrast.
DARPA senior employees > FB?



This thread continued on with post 2989 and beyond, as follows:

2989, 3/6: “Logical thinking.

Did DARPA complete build/code (tax-payer funded) ‘LifeLog’ program?

After completion, was there fear the public wouldn’t accept the adoption if known it was DoD/C_A backed?

Do you believe people would join a platform knowing it was under the control of the C_A and FED GOV?

How do you lure the masses into entering all their personal info and private messages (i.e. their LIFE LOG) onto a new platform?
Do you make it cool?

How did FB ‘supposedly’ start and launch?
Ivy league only?
Develop a trend and/or following?


How do you keep the project running w/o ‘public’ taxpayer funds? [DoD reported LifeLog was TERMINATED to Congress/Senate OS]

Define ‘Black Budget’.
Did HWOOD push?
Do people follow the ‘stars’?

Competitors systematically attacked (myspace) to prevent comp?


The More You Know.



There is a common insider sentiment online that Mark Zuckerberg is actually the grandson of David Rockefeller.

This Q post speculates on the family tree of Priscilla Chan, Mark’s wife, and I honestly have not encountered anything unusual about her.

It appears that her parents were Hoa Chinese refugees who fled to the US on boats from Vietnam. Here is the post:

2990, 3/7: “Expand your thinking.
If covertly operated [data accessible to project designators] would they attempt to prevent any type of GOV regulations from being imposed?
Expand your thinking further.

Why was MZ chosen as CEO (public figure) tasked to expand growth?
Family tree of MZ?
Who is the wife of MZ?
Family tree of wife?

Why won’t CHINA allow FB?
Situational awareness?
Do they know it’s an individual collection asset program being covertly operated by the C_A?
Do they know it’s been expanded to tap into the microphone of any device for listening and bulk data collection?
Do they know it’s been expanded to tap into the GPS router of the device for RT tracking?
Do they know it’s been expanded to tap into the camera function of the device in order to view/record all target designators?



In this next post, number 2992, we hear that ‘major steps’ are being taken to offset the enormous problem we have with Big Tech.

Given the world that the Alliance is working within, those “Major Steps” may well be far beyond our ability to imagine at this time:

2992, 3/7:
Re-review past drops.
Major steps underway to challenge these control pockets.



As we move on to post number 3006, things get even more interesting about the intel connections to Big Tech.

Again, all of these suggestions are logical extrapolations if what we saw in the Facebook Insider Dossier is true.

Social media is being indicated as a key weapon in the mass surveillance of elected officials:


3006, 3/9: “What happens when the C_A targets [spy + tech insertion] of GOOG, FB [LifeLog], Twitter, etc etc?

What happens when people wake up to the fact that FB is a cover for LifeLog [DARPA]?
What happens when people discover all RT data [inputs + listening/camera/GPS meta] is being harvested and made accessible to Langley?

Charter of the NSA? DOMESTIC + FOREIGN?

Why is the C_A conducting an active umbrella collection campaign [stringer tangents to 9] against all US citizens through LifeLog [FB] absorb/tan targeting?

Bypass data encryption on phone/tablet etc?
Primary focus on elected officials?
Primary focus on elected officials in key sub committees?



These next two posts are very exciting reminders that all this talk of sealed indictments will indeed lead to unsealing and mass arrests, all through legal means:

3011, 3/9: “Sealed > Unsealed.
Indictments coming.

3041, 3/12: “The unsealing of the first several indictments will bring about ‘unity’ and ‘change’ – ‘change’ that ‘we’ can believe in.

Returning ‘POWER’ to the PEOPLE.
Returning ‘THE RULE OF LAW’ to OUR LAND.




In this next category of posts, we did receive insider briefings that pre-dated the arrival of this intel on Q.

What we have heard is that both Facebook and Google got hacked by the Alliance, and treasure-troves of documents were pulled out.

Those documents will very likely vindicate what is in the Facebook Insider Dossier, along with much, much more.

The Facebook outage of March 13th was quite intense, and lasted for the better part of an entire day.

I was personally affected by this when I tried to upload my one and only Facebook Live video that same day. Here is what I saw:



The great Google outage came later on in June.

Based on these Q posts, it appears that a hacking technique involving the use of a “garbage file” allowed the Alliance “cleaning crew” access:


3/13: FB, Instagram Go Down Across US in Apparent Outage

3048: “How much more obvious can any of this be?
Think LifeLog dump.”

3051 & 52, 3/13:

LifeLog problems?
Garbage File?

Kids say they can’t log into Instagram or post on facebook

The ‘cleaning crew’ is active.
Size = time+ to complete.



Let’s say that this is absolutely true. Imagine that Big Tech was completely aware that this was not a normal outage, but a massive Alliance hack.

Let’s say Big Tech was then able to see what files were taken, and how incriminating they would be… akin to the Facebook Dossier but perhaps even far, far worse.

This epic hack took place on March 13th. It was only a matter of days before the massive, full-scale conversion of YouTube to PooTube then occurred.

The widespread public outrage from betrayed YouTube creators was already well underway in early April, as you saw in the original video in this Ebook.

Again, you do need to have an open mind to be able to comprehend an operation of this size. Once all is said and done, this will all become historical fact, not a speculation.

It was also an amusing ‘synchronicity’ that as my browser auto-saved while I was writing this paragraph about precision computer events, I got an 11:11 in the clock, down to the second:




Q Anon has been completely silent ever since May 26th, 2019… nearly a month at the time of this writing.

However, we did get briefings confirming that the epic Google outage of June 2nd, 2019 served the same apparent purpose as the Facebook outage:

6/2: Internet Stops Working Properly Due to Google Outage

Large parts of the internet appear to have broken, seemingly because of an issue at Google.

Websites and services including YouTube and Snapchat stopped working properly, with tens of thousands of users complaining about the problems.

Google’s own services such as Gmail, Google Drive, its Nest smart home service and just about every product in its Gsuite set of apps were broken by the problems with the company’s own cloud services.

But it also hit sites that are not owned by Google but rely on its technology, including Uber, Vimeo, and chat app Discord.

Users complained it was difficult or impossible to log in to the sites, which rely on Google’s cloud services to power their central functions.

Together, the sites represent a significant proportion of the internet as people use it. On YouTube alone, people watch more than a billion hours of video each day.


The issues lasted for more than an hour before Google claimed to have located the issue and said it had been fixed.

“We are experiencing high levels of network congestion in the eastern USA, affecting multiple services in Google Cloud, G Suite and YouTube,” a note on Google’s page reads.

“Users may see slow performance or intermittent errors. We believe we have identified the root cause of the congestion and expect to return to normal service shortly.”

Corey Goode, [06.03.19 07:11] I am told the Internet outages with these different companies was related to the alliance grabbing information to use against them in court.



When we go ahead to March 15th, in post 3082 we have the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff admitting that Google is “directly or indirectly aiding the Chinese military” and is not providing support to the US:


Embedded video

Josh Hawley


Must watch video: Joint Chiefs Chairman says Google refuses to work with US military but provides “direct benefit” to China’s military

23.3K people are talking about this




In this next instance from March 15th, the US military indicated its direct support of the Q Anon initiative in coded call signs from flights on March 14th:

3087, 3/15:



Q: “Powerful statement of UNITY.”


This is one of a small number of publicly-visible signs that there is widespread military cooperation with this planet-saving initiative.



Post 3100, from March 17th, reveals that the infamous “14 Fish” design was written onto the New Zealand mass shooter’s gun.

By linking to this image, Q Anon has suggested an accurate deciphering of the mysterious code.

As it turns out, it is a Luciferian myth of Osiris, who was allegedly chopped into 14 pieces.

All but the 14th piece, his phallus, was recovered. The phallus was replaced with an artificial one made of gold, symbolized by the obelisk.

This is considered the “male aspect of Lucifer” in the secret religion, whereas Isis is the female aspect.

Insiders have told me that this bodily replacement represents the AI (Artificial Intelligence) initiative, to integrate our flesh-and-blood bodies with machines that are far easier to control.



When you survey this image and read the accompanying Q post, there is an implication that Podesta himself was involved in organizing this event through the use of MKULTRA:

3100, 3/17:

What does a dog do when he/she has a bone?
Did he have a therapist?
Who paid for his travel to the Middle East?



On March 18th, Q posted photos of James Clapper, Sally Yates, Susan Rice, Loretta Lynch, John Brennan, James Comey and Andrew McCabe.

This could very well suggest that these will be the first names to appear in unsealed indictments as part of FISAgate.

This initial ‘reveal’ was further explained as being only the ‘lead-in’ to far greater DECLAS events in a post on March 20th:

3125 Q !!mG7VJxZNCI ID: 0ad5ef No.5791828
Mar 20 2019 13:11:41 (EST)
The attempted ‘COUP’ [TREASON] opens the ‘public’ door to more serious……
The PILL must be easy to swallow.
The ‘LEAD-IN’.
The PUBLIC must be prepared for what is about to come.
“THE CLINTON FOUNDATION” +++++++++++++++++++++++++



Also on March 20th, Q again pointed out the ongoing, awesome attack campaign against them being waged by the MSM.

They ask a very simple question… why would the MSM be bothering to attack them so regularly if they were not the greatest threat of all?

3127 Q !!mG7VJxZNCI ID: b16726 No.5792657
Mar 20 2019 13:45:07 (EST)

Ask yourself a very simple Q.
Would the FAKE NEWS media (& other controlled assets) expend this amount of time and resource attacking [attempt to discredit – cast as conspiracy – LARP] this movement IF IT DID NOT POSE A SIGNIFICANT THREAT [DANGER]?

Logical thinking.



Q went after a particular female in posts 3134 through 3159, complete with a variety of pictures.

For legal reasons I am not going to name names, other than to say that in post 3156, Q said this person is like “Allison Mack x100.”

This one case apparently can bring down the entire Deep State by itself. The pictures include images with top elites.

Given what I have heard from the original Svali disclosures, it is entirely possible for someone to be trapped, terrified and unable to escape a very bad situation.

Click here to begin reading the full archive, but be aware that this material can get very disturbing, very quickly.

Svali once said that there would be a “mass exodus” out of the Cabal if its members felt they could escape and live.

For this reason I am loath to jump in on ‘outing’ someone who really is not an elite public figure at this point.

I do pray for the health and safety of everyone who has been affected by this horrific, international conspiracy.



The long-awaited Mueller Report finally dropped on March 23rd, with no actual criminal charges filed against the president.

This was greatly upsetting to some, if not many people, and I do understand that.

In light of what we are exploring here, there is far more to the story than we are getting from mainstream media.

The criminal activity being fought against is vastly worse than the accusations being circulated by the MSM.

The day before the release, in post 3161, Q said, “BLOCKADE REMOVED,” then “DECLAS is a comin’!” in 3164.

Here is what Q had to say about it in the immediate aftermath, on March 23rd, post 3169 on

3169 Q !!mG7VJxZNCI ID: 511cf8 No.5842693
Mar 23 2019 04:29:30 (EST)

You are witnessing the collapse of the largest pre-planned and coordinated propaganda event in modern day history.
‘Projection’ 101



In post 3173 from the same day, March 23rd, Q promised that the long-awaited ‘Storm’ will follow now that the “blockade (threat) is dismantled & removed:”

3173, 3/23: >>5853176

All of us have been antsy for the hammer to drop… but we will remember this time… the time before we knew the next BIG scene… this is historic.

The calm before the storm?
What happens when a blockade (threat) is dismantled & removed?
“You’ll find out.”
Children used as shields (manufactured crimes of perjury)?



We did receive briefings that Sean Hannity has been getting high-level Alliance briefings for some time now.

Again, this might really upset some readers. Fox obviously used to be completely compromised, such as in the Bush years, to my understanding.

However, for whatever reason, with the fall of Roger Ailes and other internal changes, this all appears to have shifted.

These two posts, 3179 and 3223, indicate that certain Alliance briefings, such as on the coming FISAgate indictments, are being released through Hannity:


3223, 3/27: “Watch Hannity tonight.”

The MSM response to this situation appears to have come partly in the form of a lurid Showtime feature on the Ailes years:

6/21: Fox News / Roger Ailes Expose’ Long on Bluster and BJs, Short on Insight



At this point we are jumping ahead to April 11th, post 3312, after the “blockade” was removed.

Among other noteworthy statements here, at the end it says, “We have the source.”

This very clearly appeared to be a statement about the arrest of Julian Assange as having a deeper, yet-unseen purpose.

This was the only Q post that day, and it was the exact same day that Assange was dragged out of the Ecuadorean embassy in London.

Assange could then give his direct testimony that it was Seth Rich that gave him the October 2016 Wikileaks emails, not ‘Russia:’


3312, 4/11:

If we are merely a LARP asking questions on the Chans, why are we being attacked daily by some of the world’s biggest media co’s, social media co’s deliberately applying censorship/banning, shills paid/inserted to disrupt (media matters), blue checkmark coordinated attacks, etc.?

All for a ‘conspiracy’ on the Chans?
All for a ‘LARP’?
Why is there a constant flow of disinformation being pushed re: Q?
Disinformation push re: Mueller is a white hat.
FAKE & FALSE narrative.

When you can’t attack the information directly, you attack the source, if that fails, you ‘create false misleading information’ to discredit knowing ‘select’ ‘unaware’ followers would not take the time to self-corroborate the claims (same vehicle/tactics used by FAKE NEWS media).

Logical thinking always wins.
Nothing can stop what is coming.
As the target(s) turn to the other side, the attacks will intensify.

We have the source.



As we move ahead to April 18th, Q laments about “fake investigations by committee members,” who tried to pick up where Mueller left off:


3314, 4/18:

Fake investigations by committee members will not delay what is about to be unleashed.



As we move now to post 3316, Q suggests that Mueller knew there was “no collusion” 18 months ago, and dragged it out to create delays for the indictments, arrests and data dumps:

3316, 4/19:

[Pg 11] Previously CLAS ‘scope’ > [RR] to [MUELLER]
The scope memo [highlighted w/in Mueller report] confirms the ‘dossier’ was the ‘tool’ used by [RR] to justify SC and was the primary ‘vehicle’ to which [RR] tasked MUELLER.

If the dossier was known to be unverified and fake, how then was an investigation started to begin with?
At what point did MUELLER determine there was no collusion?
[18-months ago?]

Was the investigation kept ongoing as a ‘talking point’ to rig the midterm elections?
Was the investigation kept ongoing to retain the ‘BLOCKADE,’ to essentially restrict POTUS from unmasking and informing the public as to the TRUTH about what really happened?




On March 28th, Q posted 48 different Twitter shout-outs to US patriots, in posts 3255 through 3302.

This may very well have been intended to speed up the arrival of the numerically-significant post 3333, which arrived on May 12th.

Q had already recommended that we watch the Twitter account of Rep. Doug Collins in the past.

In this link, we get a link to a pinned Twitter post with a gigantic amount of data on Collins’ site that would take great efforts to fully explore:

3333, 5/12:

Q !!mG7VJxZNCI ID: c616d2 No.6482617
May 12 2019 19:13:07 (EST)
Eyes on.

Transparency Documents of Doug Collins




The pinned post that came to my attention on Rep. Collins’ Twitter page was as follows:


Embedded video

Rep. Doug Collins


The transcript of Nellie Ohr’s interview before the Judiciary Committee is now available to all Americans. To read the full transcript, visit .

10K people are talking about this



When I dug into the Nellie Ohr transcript, this was what jumped out at me the most:

Mr. Jordan. Walk me through the clients you did contract work for. Was this U.S. Government?

Ms. Ohr. U.S. Government.

Mr. Jordan. Various agencies in the United States Government.

Ms. Ohr. Yes.

Mr. Jordan. Tell me the agencies?

Mr. Berman. I’m not sure how to address this. I’m not sure what the U.S. Government agencies’ positions are, given various agreements she signed as parts of her independent contracting relationships.

So she’s willing to answer questions, I just don’t know — don’t want to put her at risk of violating employment agreements she had at the time, especially with U.S. Government agencies.

Mr. Jordan. Is it fair to say you worked with some of the intelligence-based agencies in the United States Government.

Ms. Ohr. Yes.

Mr. Jordan. Did you work for the C_A?

Mr. Berman. Again, I would raise the same concerns, sir, if we’re going to get into specifics.



Just three days after Q pointed us towards the data dump of documents illustrating this battle betwen the DOJ and the C_A, the conflict actually did appear as mainstream-media news.

When I went back and clicked on this link, once again it had disappeared:

5/25: Potential Clash Over Secrets Looms Between DOJ and C_A (DELETED)



Again, thanks to the magic of, we were able to bring it back. Here it is:

5/25: Potential Clash Over Secrets Looms Between DOJ and C_A

WASHINGTON — President Trump’s order allowing Attorney General William P. Barr to declassify any intelligence that led to the Russia investigation sets up a potential confrontation with the C.I.A.

It effectively strips the agency of its most critical power: choosing which secrets it shares and which ones remain hidden.

Mr. Trump said on Friday that he wanted Mr. Barr to “get to the bottom” of what the intelligence agencies knew about the investigation into his campaign.

He promised, “We’re exposing everything….”

Mr. Trump has long held that he was a target of the “deep state,” at various points accusing Mr. Obama without evidence of tapping his phones, the F.B.I. of secretly trying to undermine his candidacy and past intelligence chiefs of bending their findings to prove Russian involvement in his election victory.



Now, our last Q post will be number 3320, from April 24th… again reiterating that Q feels this plan is foolproof:

3320, 4/24:
You attack those you fear the most.
Nothing can stop what is coming.

Once again I had an interesting ‘synchronicity’ right at this point in the writing process that seems to provide an underline:




Now, as we head into the final section of this Ebook, we will wrap it up with two final lines of investigation.

First of all, we will explore the reputable evidence that a DECLAS event is actually on its way, as Q is saying.

Then, we will discuss the cluster of UFO-related information that is coming out through MSM sources at the same time.

These are the connections that really impact our work in the UFO community directly, so stay tuned!







There is a stunning interconnection between the data points we have explored in the preceding sections of this Ebook.

Big Tech has betrayed an entire generation, turning YouTube into a mainstream-media echo chamber and arousing massive anger in the process.

Popular music may well have been deliberately ‘weaponized’ to discourage romantic love and encourage violence and drug addiction.

We saw the Facebook Insider Dossier, and if true it has stunning implications for everything we thought we knew.

Mark Zuckerberg may be an MKULTRA stooge for the Deep State to create a highly addictive weapons system against the public… namely Facebook.

Google and YouTube appear to have been orchestrated to achieve similar goals. This, of course, is incredibly evil stuff.



In the previous section, we explored the latest Q Anon posts, suggesting that indictments will soon be unsealed, and massive new treasure-troves of information will be declassified.

No matter what we think we know, or what we can expect, it is very likely that we will all be truly surprised by DECLAS.

The large-scale blockage of YouTube creators may be intended to greatly reduce discussion of this game-changing new information once it arrives.

Any disclosure of this magnitude will turn any and all independent YouTubers into Disclosure journalists virtually overnight.

Big Tech, and the shadowy financiers and plotters behind them, are well aware of this and are arming up for Zero Day.

In this final section, we will explore the bizarre UFO connection to all of this, with the sudden uptick in stories of this nature in the mainstream media.



Before we delve into the UFO subject, we will follow up on the leads provided by Q Anon in the last section.

Is there any tangible evidence of high-level insiders, such as Congressional representatives, anticipating DECLAS?

Yes there are.

First of all, there is absolutely no question that child trafficking rings are being busted at an unprecedented rate right now:

12/31/18: National Slavery and Human Trafficking Prevention Month

In February of 2017, I signed an Executive Order to dismantle transnational criminal organizations that traffic and exploit people….

At my direction, Federal departments and agencies are ensuring full enforcement of our laws so that those who seek to exploit our people and break our laws receive the full measure of justice they deserve.

In 2017 alone, the Department of Justice secured convictions against more than 500 defendants in human trafficking cases

and the Federal Bureau of Investigation dismantled more than 42 criminal enterprises engaged in child sex trafficking.

The Department of Homeland Security initiated more than 800 human trafficking cases, resulting in at least 1,500 arrests and 530 convictions. 


When I was speaking with the insider Mega Anon, she told me how excited they were on the inside about the scope of these pending announcements.

And yet, hardly anyone has ever heard about it, since the mainstream media has utterly ignored any and all positive news of this nature.



Next, in a series of videos I did with Edge of Wonder earlier this year, I called attention to some amazing tweets from Kim Dotcom back in January.

Kim was very closely involved with Wikileaks, and is probably the single best person to leak intel in this area besides Assange or Snowden.

Check out these two Tweets from January 5th — predicting that DECLAS would happen some time this year:


Kim Dotcom


I smile every day watching the aftermath of preventing Hillary.

Deep State exposed.
Fake news exposed.
DOJ & FBI exposed.

I’m happy you are more informed than ever. 2019 will reveal so much more. Get ready for the next round of leaks. Monumental stuff 😎

5,421 people are talking about this


Kim Dotcom


This year the criminals who run the Deep State will be exposed. The shareholders profiting from war and chaos. The billionaires who turn democracy into an illusion. They own politicians, judges and all your data. They are the biggest pirates in history. Want to know who they are?

9,397 people are talking about this


Additionally, this Tweet from 2018 is of particular interest in context, as it says Seth Rich was the leaker, not ‘Russia’:


Kim Dotcom


Let me assure you, the DNC hack wasn’t even a hack. It was an insider with a memory stick. I know this because I know who did it and why. Special Counsel Mueller is not interested in my evidence. My lawyers wrote to him twice. He never replied. 360 pounds! 

Donald J. Trump


I never said Russia did not meddle in the election, I said “it may be Russia, or China or another country or group, or it may be a 400 pound genius sitting in bed and playing with his computer.” The Russian “hoax” was that the Trump campaign colluded with Russia – it never did!

10.9K people are talking about this


These Tweets were featured in the following article on Zero Hedge:


1/6: Kim Dotcom Teases Next Round of Leaks



On May 21st of this year, Florida congressman Rep. Matt Gaetz anticipated that we are “days, if not weeks away” from the first wave of DECLAS.

This information has already been starting to leak, and will undoubtedly go much farther:

5/21: Gaetz Says “Most Compelling” Evidence in Trump-Russia Probe Days Away

“I believe we are days, if not weeks away from the most compelling evidence in the biggest political scandal in American history,” Gaetz said on “Hannity” Monday.

“There was western intelligence sent to spy on Papadopoulos and there’s a recording and transcript of the conversation.

And there, Papadopoulos denies any illegal conspiracy between the Trump campaign and Russia.

So, they had evidence presumably that was against Papadopoulos and for him.

What they won’t be able to defend is that they never presented that evidence to the FISA court.”



Rep. Gaetz also published this information and a link to this video in a Tweet from May 21st:


Rep. Matt Gaetz


I believe we are just days away from receiving the most compelling evidence in the biggest political scandal ever seen in American history. 

Gaetz says ‘most compelling’ evidence in the Trump-Russia probe could be days away

Florida congressman Matt Gaetz revealed Monday night that “most compelling” evidence in the Trump-Russia collusion investigation is days, if not weeks away. According to Rep. Gaetz, R-Fla., secret…

12.3K people are talking about this

This Tweet from May 14th is also of note:

Embedded video

Rep. Matt Gaetz


Dan Coats has over 50 transcripts from Clapper, Comey, Brennan, and McCabe that have been voted out of the House Intel Committee to be declassified. We need to get to the bottom of where these lies existed and how this terrible investigation started.

5,614 people are talking about this



On May 20th, Rep. Mark Meadows further set up the coming DECLAS, though he only discussed the first phase of it, which is FISAgate:

5/20: Mark Meadows: Declassification is Right Around the Corner

Republican Congressman and House Oversight Committee Member Mark Meadows [says] there will be more information showing that President Trump was set up by senior officials with the FBI and DOJ.

He made the comments Monday on “Fox & Friends,” adding that the declassification of documents will reveal it.

Meadows cited instances where members of the Trump campaign were taped and recorded.

He specifically referred to former Trump Campaign Advisor George Papadopoulos. Papadopoulos has been vocal about being set up by the FBI.


Moreover, the North Carolina Congressman explained that ‘the American people will be astonished’ when Trump declassifies more information.

For example, the classified FISA interviews, Bruce Ohr 302 FBI interviews and the so called “Gang of Eight” binder.

Former House Oversight Committee Chairman Trey Gowdy said Sunday, the new information could reveal “game-changer” evidence further disproving the collusion narrative.

Meadows said he is confident the President will act soon.

“I think declassification is right around the corner and hopefully the American people will be able to judge for themselves,” said Meadows.



These are two of many episodes of the X22 Report that go into this story, and include a wealth of links for you to follow up and study the case for yourself.

It’s kind of amazing that they are still able to be viewed at all with the current level of censorship, quite honestly:

5/20: Declass Right Around the Corner

5/21: Buildup Phase, Trap Has Been Set



Additionally, Greg Hunter of USA Watchdog has done noteworthy work on the coming DECLAS, such as the following:

5/19: Massive Crimes Will Soon Be Revealed and Prosecuted

The FISA abuse report compiled by Inspector General Michael Horowitz is finished and will be released soon,according to Dr. Dave Janda from the Operation Freedom radio show.

The fraudulent FISA applications, using a phony dossier, made spying on the Trump Administration possible.

Not long after the release of the IG FISA report, President Trump will declassify the documents surrounding the so-called “hoax” that he has repeatedly called “treason.”

Janda also says there are massive crimes that are going to be revealed that involve data collection by President Obama’s top intelligence chiefs.

This data collection was ordered by Obama and involves 600 million pages of information on judges, business people and politicians, including the head of the FISA Court and Chief Justice John Roberts.

The illegal data stash is information used for leverage and blackmail on possibly millions of unsuspecting Americans.

Join Greg Hunter as he lays out upcoming extraordinary events that will probably be happening in the next month….


The timetable has obviously been delayed a bit longer, since we are slightly after a month since this was published.

However, it certainly appears that we are about to see major action take place.

Once Q starts posting again, we will probably be in the midst of quite the roller-coaster ride.



The formerly untouchable status of Big Tech took a serious hit on May 13th, as the Supreme Court opened up against Apple:

5/13: SC Deals Apple Major Setback in Apple Store Antitrust Case

The Supreme Court on Monday ruled 5-4 against Apple, saying iPhone users can pursue their antitrust lawsuit involving the tech giant’s signature electronic marketplace, the App Store.

Justice Brett Kavanaugh wrote the majority opinion, which was joined by the court’s liberal justices.

The iPhone users argued that Apple’s 30% commission on sales through the App Store is an unfair use of monopoly power that results in inflated prices passed on to consumers.

Apple argued that only app developers, and not users, should be able to bring such a lawsuit. But the Supreme Court, in an opinion authored by Kavanaugh, rejected that claim.

“Apple’s line-drawing does not make a lot of sense, other than as a way to gerrymander Apple out of this and similar lawsuits,” Kavanaugh wrote.


Apple has participated in surveillance and the banning of voices for various agendas, including political manipulation.



Just two weeks later, we found out that the DOJ is pursuing anti-trust legislation against Google:

5/31: DOJ Prepares Google Antitrust Probe

(Reuters) – The U.S. Justice Department is preparing an investigation of Alphabet Inc’s Google to determine whether the tech giant broke antitrust law in operating its sprawling online businesses, two sources familiar with the matter said.

Officials from the Justice Department’s Antitrust Division and Federal Trade Commission, which both enforce antitrust law, met in recent weeks to give Justice jurisdiction over Google, said the sources, who sought anonymity because they were not authorized to speak on the record.

The potential investigation represents the latest attack on a tech company by the administration of U.S. President Donald Trump, who has accused social media companies and Google of suppressing conservative voices on their platforms online.

One source said the potential investigation, first reported by the Wall Street Journal, focused on accusations that Google gave preference to its own businesses in searches.


6/1: Google Should Be Afraid. Very Afraid.

(Bloomberg Opinion) — This is the moment the U.S. technology superpowers surely knew was coming:

The U.S. government is preparing to crawl all over Google to figure out whether it is an abusive monopolist.

Google parent company Alphabet Inc. and the other tech giants should be quaking in their fleece vests.

Bloomberg News and other news organizations reported late Friday that the U.S. Department of Justice is preparing to open an investigation into Google’s compliance with antitrust laws.

If it goes forward, an investigation will no doubt be broad, lengthy, messy, and impossible for Google and its investors to predict.

That should terrify Google and every other big technology company — because there’s no guarantee that the antitrust Klieg light will turn on one company alone.



Facebook’s woes have been far more long-standing and public, and therefore need not all be reviewed here.

1/8: Inside Facebook’s “Cult-Like” Atmosphere

6/19: FB Moderators Break NDA, Reveal Horrible Situation


We also saw in the preceding section that major outages occurred for Facebook and Google alike. Q indicated that actionable information was gathered in these events, through hacking.

With all of this in mind, we do have every reason to suspect that major public disclosures are forthcoming soon, exactly as Q Anon has predicted.

Furthermore, our own insider briefings have told us to anticipate that this info will have been released by no later than mid-September… so we don’t have long to wait.

This is obviously a hyper-complex body of data to explore, but there are many undeniable clues to its validity if you study it carefully.

Now, we will explore the final area of this investigation… the very bizarre uptick in UFO disclosure-related news from the mainstream media itself.



One of my main areas of focus all these years has been the UFO subject.

As we saw in previous sections, this led to an enormous number of titles on YouTube with my name in the title, peaking at 5.98 million on February 15th.

We have very significant engagement, with videos and articles having millions of views, and regular appearances in Ancient Aliens.

I have worked with many different insiders over the years, and have been fortunate enough to get a wide variety of high-level briefings.

I attended the original Disclosure Project event in May, 2001, and met almost all of the 39 insiders who gathered there.

Additionally, I worked with Project Camelot from 2007 through 2011, and met several top insiders through them as well.

In addition to these contacts, I was approached privately by various insiders over the years who gave me exclusives on intel of various sorts.

I was a principal interviewer of Corey Goode, Emery Smith and William Tompkins, who I spoke to in a variety of phone calls in that case.



This work has been very thoroughly explored on this site and in the UFO community as a whole, and I do not intend to re-iterate all of it here.

Suffice it to say that the subject is extremely massive in size and scope. Enormous secrets are being kept from us if any of this is true.

We have already seen compelling evidence that there is a Deep State actively working a mass depopulation agenda, and telling spectacular lies to achieve its ends.

Hip-hop music may have been deliberately intended to promote criminal behavior in order to reduce population and boost prison profits.

We also end up confronting the notion that many mysterious UFO sightings are actually of craft flown by our own people in classified programs.

Multiple insiders have confirmed to me, and others, that we have an elaborate Secret Space Program that goes far beyond most people’s imagination.

There is an enormous wealth of UFO-related information and insiders to explore… more than anyone could hope to know and discuss.



The Tom DeLonge / AATIP information is attempting to reduce the entire investigation to the 2004 sightings around the USS Nimitz.

This one cluster of sightings is being presented as if it the only significant case ever worth talking about.

Before this Tom DeLonge initiative ever started, insiders were warning us of a coming “Partial Disclosure” initiative.

The idea was that the Deep State is aware of the Alliance, and knows that sooner or later they will have run out of time.

Arrests are coming, and along with them mass public awareness of the extraordinary crimes that were committed.

The one final “Get out of Jail Free Card” for the Deep State would be to offer a “Limited Hangout” of UFO information.

This would serve multiple purposes. It would appear to show their willingness to “come clean” and finally tell us the truth.

Suppressed technology is revealed, or at least is potentially offered with a clear timeline for a future roll-out.

As this agenda continued forth, we published intel telling us to expect a very specific sequence of disclosures.



Ultimately, we apparently will be told that Antarctica was the actual location of Atlantis, and has very real ships and ruins under the ice.

This includes pyramids with designs reminiscent of Aztec-occupied areas in Mesoamerica.

We will see hi-res footage of entire ruined cities of this nature in undersea areas between Antarctica and South America, and again between Antarctica and Australia.

We find out about all sorts of interesting things… hidden rooms in pyramids, cool technologies planted for us to discover, and lost underground cities in the Grand Canyon.

We may get introduced to one or more ET races, such as the “Tall Whites,” though there are different beings with this classification.

A military-industrial complex SSP may be revealed, with near-Earth orbital platforms and ships that can cruise around our solar system, but apparently cannot leave it.



Once the MIC SSP is revealed, and we find out that these ships have already been traveling around our solar system for years, things get very interesting.

At this point we will have already seen motherships and ruins in Antarctica, and explored the inscriptions they contain.

Once the MIC SSP data is disclosed, we find out that there are similar ruins with similar inscriptions on the Moon and Mars.

This seems amazing, and it undoubtedly will be if it ever happens.

It obviously tells us that those who crashed in Antarctica were the survivors of a much older and grander civilization.

However, our briefings have also revealed that there is a hidden agenda to all of this.



If you watch Above Majestic, you will see how all of this fits together as we head into the Big Reveal.

The Deep State have referred to themselves as the ‘Illuminati.’ They believe they are “Gods among insects” and we are here to serve them.

Even though they are biologically just like us, they believe they are the descendants of the ETs who crashed in Antarctica.

They have elaborate ruins and artifacts that can prove this, including many books in the Vatican dating back 500,000 years.

They believe they are the descendants of a lost civilization that was on the Moon, Mars and a planet that exploded to become the Asteroid Belt.

I covered this story and all of the supporting data for it in great detail in the second half of The Ascension Mysteries, and consider it required reading for this discussion.

Other free YouTube videos I have produced have gone into great detail on all of this as well.

The first insider to begin disclosing the Antarctic Atlantis intel to me was ‘Daniel,’ all the way back in 2004.



The latest intel suggests that there were two dynastic, super-powerful family lines that both crash-landed here 55,000 years ago, coming from the Moon.

The Moon apparently took a very hard hit from a “solar flash” that nearly wiped out its entire population.

These people barely survived their crash-landing to Earth.

The two family lines had slightly different genetics and physiologies. This is visible in their skulls — whether they have more of a bump or a smooth slope on the top.

They decided to divide and conquer the Earth, with Antarctica / Atlantis as the origin point.

One family line spread into South America and on through Southeast Asia and even into India, plus up into what is now Siberia.

The other family line colonized Africa, Sumer, Egypt and Europe.

Both lines had elongated skulls. These skeletons have been found all over the world.

They also bred themselves to have giant bodies in certain cases as a form of defense, and there is much suppressed evidence of this lineage as well.



A series of regularly-occurring catastrophes wiped them out. The first was roughly 50,000 years ago. Another occurred 25,000 years ago.

The most recent took place 12,500 years ago, on the halfway point of this same 25,000-year repeating cycle.

This last event was what shifted the earth on its axis, submerged Atlantis and caused it to freeze over and become Antarctica.

They had ships capable of flying around the Earth and levitating blocks to make pyramids up until then. These ships were lost in the cataclysm.

They were effectively beaten back to the Stone Age despite their advanced intelligence and physiology.

They blamed what we think of as positive, angelic ETs known as the ‘Elohim’ for having allowed this to happen to them.

They formed the Egyptian priesthood, where you see many images of them with their unique skulls, and hid their secrets in the Library of Alexandria.

When Egypt fell to Rome, the Library was apparently burned. This was a “false flag” event and the records were transferred to the Vatican Library.



The elongated mitre hats worn by priests in the Vatican apparently were made to conceal their elongated skulls.

Most of these people stay hidden and do not walk around among us, though they certainly could with these hats.

A majority of their descendants lost the elongated skull physiology due to various factors, such as interbreeding.

They still keep a very precise watch over the ‘bloodlines,’ and this is the secret of the royal lineages we see throughout the world.

They consolidated their wealth and power over many centuries, while also maintaining very strong and disturbing religious beliefs.

They amassed incredible wealth and power and formed the interlocking directorates we call the Cabal, Illuminati or Deep State today.

They also have been seeking a “New World Order” where they greatly reduce Earth’s population and then rule over those who remain… with an iron fist.



The Big Secret of what these people have done with all of the money they amassed is the Secret Space Program.

This is far more elaborate in scope, depth and awesome profundity than what the Partial Disclosure agenda intends to tell us.

If this technology was released, we become the Jetsons. There is no need for a money system.

We have advanced 3D printers that can instantly make any objects or foods we want, with perfect quality.

We can travel anywhere in the US in 90 seconds, and anywhere on Earth within nine minutes with a hovercar in the garage.

Space travel becomes easy and fast, even without the use of warp-drive systems.

We gain access to bases on the Moon, Mars and throughout our solar system that were built with our money and people, all in secret.



Pete Peterson has additionally revealed that he is aware of some 38 different outposts that we already have throughout the galaxy, where American soldiers are stationed.

And this is just what he is aware of within the compartmentalized programs he has access to.

There are a wide variety of different ET races out there who we already interact with.

All are human or at least hominid in appearance. Many are similar-looking to us. Human beings are a Galactic design.

This all seems very hard to believe, since we have been lied to on such an epic scale.

Nonetheless, when you find real insiders with access to this compartmentalized information, there are invariable and undeniable cross-overs with all of this information.

The Deep State folks very much do not want us to enter into this world until the population has been greatly reduced.

At that time, we would be under their complete and total control, such as through paralyzing microchips embedded in our bodies.

This may all sound like sci-fi to you, but there are many insiders I know who take this very, very seriously, and risk their lives to release this information.



Tom DeLonge rose to prominence as one of the very last rock stars the Deep State music labels allowed to come forth.

He is the guitarist and lead singer of Blink-182, one of the biggest bands of the 1990s, with many recognizable radio tunes.

Less known is that DeLonge routinely displays Masonic symbols on his guitar, and on his amplifier, and has been photographed in Masonic regalia:



There is nothing intrinsically wrong with being a Freemason.

I recently met a high-level insider who had made it all the way up to 33rd degree and swore that he encountered nothing that upset his Christian beliefs along the way.

With that being said, Freemasons do end up taking oaths to maintain secrecy, or suffer lethal consequences.

Therefore, we can fully expect that they will lie or at least evade under direct questioning, if necessary, to maintain their obligations.

This evasiveness is exactly what happened repeatedly when DeLonge got on the Joe Rogan Experience podcast, as we will see.

The Deep State has used this and other societies in order to cultivate the necessary secrecy to recruit people into deeper levels.



The logos for DeLonge’s subsequent solo act after Blink-182, Angels and Airwaves, contain Masonic symbols as well as two key phrases in Latin:


Translation: “Through the Light of the World, Out of the Lead”

[Notice the All-Seeing Eye on the right of the banner after the word “Lumen” or “Light]


Translation: “And Leads the World in the Dawn”


Notice the “Papal Cross” As Seen In The “AVA” Logos Above


This Is Also Seen in the Exxon Logo


Lucifer is considered the “light of the world” within the Deep State’s religion, and is the “morning star” — the light that rises at dawn.

If you’ve ever watched Jordan Maxwell’s videos, he talks about how “Dawn of a New Day” is an important Cabal saying for this reason.

Luciferians also co-opt alchemical symbology and believe that with their form of enlightenment, you are transforming the “lead” of a normal person’s consciousness into gold.

These two phrases together are therefore of potential interest:

“Through the Light of the World, out of the Lead, and Leads the World in the Dawn.”

Is this a possible suggestion that DeLonge was hoping to “lead the world” himself through this Disclosure initiative?



Let’s also go back to his guitar strap, which very prominently says “Macbeth.” Many theater performers consider this to be a “cursed” play.



Here is what Wikipedia has to say about this play, also known as the Tragedy of Macbeth:

It dramatises the damaging physical and psychological effects of political ambition on those who seek power for its own sake….

A brave Scottish general named Macbeth receives a prophecy from a trio of witches that one day he will become King of Scotland.

Consumed by ambition and spurred to action by his wife, Macbeth murders King Duncan and takes the Scottish throne for himself. He is then wracked with guilt and paranoia.

Forced to commit more and more murders to protect himself from enmity and suspicion, he soon becomes a tyrannical ruler.

The bloodbath and consequent civil war swiftly take Macbeth and Lady Macbeth into the realms of madness and death.




DeLonge has been presented as just a cool rock star who figured out the UFO subject on his own and was then approached by C!A insiders to help with Disclosure.

His Masonic connections and the translation of “Angels and Airwaves” logos are never mentioned, probably for obvious reasons.

On December 16th, 2017, his initiative rose to public prominence with the New York Times article Glowing Auras and ‘Black Money.’

This was soon followed by a public fundraising campaign to raise money for a variety of things: books, films, TV shows and an apparent project to develop a working UFO.

The storyline was that shadowy defense contractors would never release this technology on their own, and therefore it needed to come from the private sector.

DeLonge’s group was seeking to raise up to 200 million dollars towards financing these initiatives.

They filmed a closed press conference, with no live audience, to make these announcements and raise potential funds.



On February 9th, 2018, we wrote Tom DeLonge Stunningly Debunked, where a key element of ‘proof’ from the fundraiser was debunked.

A photo was shown that was purported to be of the “Tic Tac” UFO they keep talking about from the 2004 USS Nimitz incident.

The actual image was of a mylar number-1 balloon taken by Steve Mera in 2005:



The entire video since appears to have been taken down from the To The Stars Academy of Arts and Science website.

If you are aware of a copy of this presentation that still exists somewhere, please let us know in the comments section.

The bottom line is that this was a key piece of proof for the alleged reality of the Tic-Tac, but was easily debunked.

This suggests the possibility that disinformation was built in from the beginning of the project.

That way, if it ever needed to be terminated for whatever reason, they just bring out the disinfo and discredit the whole thing.

If so, this did not happen on their terms. It arose organically on the internet thanks to things like Reverse Image Search.



DeLonge’s team discovered something that any UFO researcher on the block could tell you: it is very difficult for anyone to “make money” from this field. No offense! It’s just a fact.

As of October 15th, 2018, it was revealed in a mandatory SEC filing that they had spent 37.4 million dollars and had only raised a million and 26 thousand dollars from 2547 investors, despite enormous MSM publicity.

Most of the money had been spent by then, and the company only had 129,000 dollars left over:

10/15/18: Tom DeLonge’s UFO Organization Has a 37.4 Million Deficit

To the Stars Academy of Arts and Sciences, an organization co-founded by former Blink-182 frontman Tom DeLonge to study UFOs and other “mysteries of the universe,” may be on the verge of collapse.

According to a biannual financial report filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) last month, the company has accumulated a $37.4 million deficit and “these factors raise doubt about the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.”

The financial document was first reported by Ars Technica….

In September 2017, the company began selling $50 million worth of stock to fund its operations, and its website claims to have a total of 2,547 investors.

According to the SEC filing, however, To the Stars has only sold a little over $1 million worth of stock to date….


The company has managed to rack up a $37.4 million deficit, much of which was accumulated in 2017.

According to the SEC filing, as of last June, To the Stars only had $129,000 in cash, but plans to continue operations for at least another year by selling more stock….

The company also said that it has to pay DeLonge and several other companies and entities a minimum of $100,000 each in royalties per year, regardless of whether it has sold anything or not….

Correction: The original story mis-characterized To the Stars’ deficit as debt. Unlike debt, which involves borrowing money, deficit is spending more money than you bring in with revenue. In this case, To the Stars spent $37.4 million more than they brought in with revenue. Motherboard regrets the error.



If you go to the website, the criteria for becoming an investor, even at a couple hundred bucks, would likely have spooked away most people. This is no PayPal situation:

To make an investment, click the ‘Invest Now’ button and have the following information readily available:

• Personal information such as your current address and phone number
• Net worth and income information
• Social Security Number or government-issued identification
• Your credit card or ABA bank routing number and checking account number if you want to pay via ACH (typically found on a personal check or bank statement)

NOTE: Our partner PrimeTrust verifies investor details and conducts background checks as required by US law.

You may be asked to provide documentation supporting your investor details. If this is the case, we will notify you via email.



It is of potential significance to mention the movie Mirage Men at this point.

The film is a confessional from an intelligence agent, Richard Doty, about how he deliberately planted disinformation into the UFO community for many years.

He did this by posing as an insider, gaining trust, and doing a “limited hangout,” where some true information was mixed with deliberate fiction.

In some cases, the resulting reputation destruction and psychological damage to his targets led to madness and death by suicide.



Doty also makes it very clear in the film that the intelligence community wanted to identify and profile everyone who was interested in UFOs.

They wanted to obtain exactly the type of information this fundraiser called for…. name, social security number, net worth, et cetera, to do covert background checks.



The UFO genre has historically taken a great deal of abuse, and the same occurred with DeLonge’s initiative. Here are some links:

10/13/17: I’m a Huge DeLonge Fan, But Don’t Invest In His Latest Venture

10/15/18: DeLonge Denies TTS Academy is 37 Million in Debt

10/15/18: DeLonge Calls 37M Deficit a “Blatant Lie”

10/16/18: Man Overboard: DeLonge’s Company Remains Stuck on the Ground

DeLonge Fights Back After Article Claiming 37 Million Debt

Former Blink-182 singer, Tom DeLonge once received a “Researcher Of The Year” award from the International UFO Congress after Wikileaks revealed hacked emails that suggested he was in contact with top people in the US government, including Hillary Clinton campaign manager John Podesta.



It is relevant to mention here that certain researchers believe that Hillary would have been the Disclosure President and not the opposite:

4/29/18: Podesta Stars in “Documentary” Claiming Clinton Lost Because of ETs

What is unusual about the latest Ancient Aliens episode (“The UFO Conspiracy”) is Podesta’s decision to sit down for an on-camera interview, participating directly in the program….

“The CIA, the Pentagon, they were worried about Hillary Clinton…winning the presidency and going to the Pentagon and basically saying, ‘you’re going to get me the information I need to disclose the extraterrestrial presence, or I’m going to fire every single one of you,’” [Stephen] Bassett says.

He’s followed by Linda Moulton Howe, whose previous work includes “Neil Armstrong’s Secret: UFO’s on the Moon?”

“As this year of 2016 went forward, we all expected that this headline that we’ve been waiting for that is going to break,” she said.

“John Podesta was trying to get ready to open up [the fact] that we’re not alone in the universe.”

“All of that crashed when a different person became president of the United States,” Howe said.



Getting on the Joe Rogan Experience is the modern-day equivalent of being on with Johnny Carson. I will gladly jump in if I am asked, and face whatever shade might get thrown.

Rogan has often featured conspiracy content on his show, and clearly did not seem impressed with DeLonge’s admitted C!A and Podesta connections.

DeLonge was constantly fidgeting during his appearance, and was routinely evasive when Rogan asked him specific questions.

This quote from Daily Grail expressed what many others thought:

10/16/18: Man Overboard: DeLonge’s Company Remains Stuck on the Ground

DeLonge gave an atrocious interview on the Joe Rogan Experience podcast –how atrocious?

Enough for him to be replaced by Luis Elizondo, who then became the new face for To the Stars, and the one who started to do the conference and radio show circuit expected of a new ‘celebrity’ in the UFO subculture, while Tom was sent to the showers (unofficially, of course).


Here is another quote from Vice that is not very kind, but echoes many other things you can find online:

5/25: The Tom DeLonge Wikileaks Conspiracy Goes Deeper Than We Thought

Post-Blink 182, he’s reduced to Drunk Uncle status in the global balance of pop-punk. Mouthy, smart, degraded, much reduced in stature….

Amazing scenario for DeLonge—instead of actually having to be in Blink, he gets to use his punk credentials to leverage institutional influence.

He butters the Deep State up. Hell, to hear many tell of it, he has kompromat on them. He was their soundtrack in 2003 when they had bleach-blonde spiky hair.



Right at the beginning, DeLonge began introducing bias into the equation.

There is an abundance of evidence for benevolent UFOs, including crop circles and how they are preventing ALL sides of our planet from having a nuclear war.

That was the conclusion of Edgar Mitchell, one of our top hero astronauts, and many others at the Robert Hastings event at the National Press Club in 2010.



Hastings has personally interviewed 160 different insiders on UFOs powering down nuclear missile installations.

No one is “playing favorites” here. This prevention of nuclear war applies equally to Russia, China, the US, you name it.

Hastings’ 48-minute documentary has visually rich re-enactments of many of these events and is truly a must-see.



If so little information is being presented by DeLonge’s team at this point, why then attempt to brand all UFOs as threats, only 33 seconds in?


Joe Rogan: 0:33 So you’re obsessed with UFOs, right? Is that safe to say?

Tom De Longe: It’s safe to say, but it’s not so much just the UFO itself. I don’t call them that anymore. We call these advanced aerial threats. They’re different.

Joe Rogan: Threats?

Tom De Longe: You honed in a word that we weren’t supposed to really get into here in the first part of the show.

Joe Rogan: Did you have a plan?

Tom De Longe: I have a very long plan. Detailed plan.

We’re going to start with my body. We’re just going to talk about my body for a lot.

Joe Rogan: Okay, what do you want to talk about in terms of your body?

Tom De Longe: Well, my body is interesting. It’s unique and it changes shape. What I’ve noticed is it’s just changing.

Joe Rogan: It’s getting larger, depending upon what you put in it.



DeLonge made a variety of interesting statements on the show, but one in particular really jumped out at me in light of what our insiders have disclosed.

This quote appears at 1:02:42 in the video, and here is the transcript:

Tom De Longe: I do know that there’s connections to, you won’t even f__ing believe it. I’ll tell you.

Joe Rogan: Please?

Tom De Longe: Atlantis….

Joe Rogan: What’s the connection?

Tom De Longe: That there is a very advanced group that left after a catastrophe.

[They] hung around in a small outpost here, and throughout time would push civilization forward.

That’s who the Greek gods were.

That’s why it’s very interesting when [in] the Roswell wreckage, there’s Greek writing.

Joe Rogan: Is it?

Tom De Longe: There is.



DeLonge may well have “let the cat out of the bag” and spoken about things he wasn’t supposed to talk about for years to come.

He clearly appears to be talking about “very advanced” extraterrestrials who suffered a catastrophe, elsewhere, and then “hung around in a small outpost here” on Earth.

What he articulated in the above excerpt contains ALL the blueprints of the “Illuminati Fallen Angel Narrative” we’ve been told to expect, over time.

The ‘catastrophe’ he refers to appears to be whatever destroyed the super-Earth that became the Asteroid Belt, and ruined Mars after having originally been in an Earth-like state.

The “small outpost” that these people “hung around in” on Earth is apparently Atlantis / Antarctica.

He then describes how these people would “push civilization forward” as the “Gods,” such as in Greece.

It’s a short excerpt and easily missed, but when I watched the show with my wife, it jumped out at me with shocking clarity.



Another very interesting part of the broadcast provides us with some visuals to explore.

This was where DeLonge talked about visiting SAIC headquarters. Dr. Steven Greer was told this name means C!A Science in reverse, as another “inside joke.”

DeLonge talks excitedly about the giant statues you see on the way in… and they are most definitely, uh, interesting:




Who are these statues with Roman-like headdresses? In the show, at 1:03:56, DeLonge lets the cat out of the bag:

Tom De Longe: I’m going to tell you something else. So I went and met a former director of CIA and NSA. He was director of both, I won’t tell you his name. Right when I sat down and told him about my book-

Joe Rogan: Pull up that picture of again, look at those little hands.

Tom De Longe: Right when I sat down and told him, this is a big deal. So I’m sitting with this guy, he was like not that long ago was director of CIA and he went on to be director of NSA.

Joe Rogan: Well, I think we could find his name.

Tom De Longe: Maybe. But right when I sat down and told him about the book, you know what he says to me?

He goes, “I didn’t read much science fiction as a kid, but I’ve read a lot about Greek mythology.” Looked me in the eye.

I said, “Well, you’re going to love the last page of my book then.” He’s like, am I?


When my book was about ready to go to pressing, I had a very important person call me up. He says, “Can you stop that pressing and maybe insert something about Greek mythology?”

I said, I sure can.

So something you got to realize is, for example, the sixth biggest defense contractor in the world, at least they used to be six.

There’s a company called Science Applications International Corporation, SAIC. Their headquarters are actually in San Diego.

In the front of the building you have an obelisk coming out of a fake lake, and two Atlanteans on thrones.

They’re both holding pyramids. One says the past and one says the future.

They’re eight-foot-tall statues. It’s f–ing nuts, by the way.



Earlier in the show, at 30:21, DeLonge acknowledged what the Wikileaks emails had revealed: that he was in direct contact with Podesta.

Tom De Longe: Once they found out who I was working with, they were like, holy s__t. They only found that out when WikiLeaks broke into John Podesta’s emails.

I was having video conferences and conference calls with… he was Obama’s senior advisor at the time.

So the Wall Street Journal broke the story, like what’s this rock star talking about UFOs with Hillary Clinton’s campaign manager. No, he was Obama’s senior advisor.

So it had nothing to do with Hillary, so we were setting these up.

When that broke, I had to call up my partner from the C!A, and I said I got to say, now I can talk to you a little bit more about who these people are.



Part of DeLonge’s initiative was apparently to build working flying saucers for mass distribution, hence the fundraiser.

However, in the Rogan broadcast, starting at 1:35:05, he made it clear that it would take eight years to see any results:

Tom De Longe: You just go and you buy shares, whatever you want to buy and-

Joe Rogan: How will it be lucrative for him?

Tom De Longe: Because first of all the technology itself is like a trillion-dollar thing. If we could figure that out over the next eight years, and they think we can so they-

Joe Rogan: Who’s “they?”

Tom De Longe: The engineers that are building this thing, the guy … So Steve Justice, that was head of advanced programs at the Skunk Works, we talked about that, they build all of our …

They are the tip of the spear for the most advanced spacecraft and aircraft that the United States national security apparatus has, period. Period. Hands down. And he was the big boy there.

And their model, we think we have a … This is a guess, but I think there’s a 60% chance within 36 months or so, we’ll be able to demonstrate something pretty kick ass.

As long as there’s no major obstacle there, we think within eight years we’ll be able to have something.

But it’s expensive, and we’ve got to work with the government and we’re going to have to work with major aerospace.



It seems odd, to say the least, that DeLonge’s people would already know that it would take eight years to get to a working prototype, even if they were already funded.

If Steve Justice knows how to build a UFO from his time at Lockheed SkunkWorks, and they get the money, then why not proceed?

A genuine research and development project would leave the door open for innovation, unexpected breakthroughs and the like.

Furthermore, you would want your investors to get a good ROI, Return on Investment, as quickly as possible.

Why eight years? It just doesn’t make sense. DeLonge himself probably has no idea, and is just repeating what he heard.

When he was discussing one of their experiments involving an electron emitter, that seemed to be pretty clear:

Joe Rogan: 35:08 How do you shoot a single electron?

Tom De Longe: F__k if I know. I’m not a physicist. They just do this s__t. That’s what they do. I was actually on a phone call today about it.



This prolonged, eight-year duration of time fits in perfectly with the “Partial Disclosure” initiative we were warned about.

Specifically, we were told that an attempt would be made to promise new technology, but hold it off long enough for a variety of ‘goals’ to be achieved along the way.

Those goals may not at all be in the best interest of humanity at large, and may fit in with what we heard in the Facebook Dossier.



Despite the fundraiser not meeting its goals, a six-part miniseries still emerged on History Channel, promising the world’s first real Disclosure.

I watched part of the first episode and was frustrated and bored enough that I did not finish it. I will try to do so at some point.

It did interest me that when Luis Elizondo met the first on-camera insider from his team in the show, they greeted each other as “Brother.”

If you’ve ever been around any Freemasons, they always call each other “Brother,” and this would definitely jump out to other Masons.

The main reason why I was frustrated was that the entire time was spent talking about the 2004 Nimitz sightings, and nothing else.

There are countless great stories of sightings, and I have always tried to link data like this together, looking for larger themes.



As it turns out, my father and his wife both had the same reaction. The show had tons of advertising buildup leading up to it.

When they watched it, they felt like they had been ‘snookered.’ Dad said “that’s it,” and they did not intend to watch any further episodes as a result.

Over the years I have observed that my father’s opinions are a good gauge of mass consciousness, since he does not specialize in all the areas I do.

He rememebered reading the classic 1956 book by Edward Ruppelt, The Report on Unidentified Flying Objects, and said it was filled with much more interesting sightings reports than this one.



My father also said he “liked the really interesting Ancient Aliens episode on Antartica” a lot more.

The premiere of Unidentified and Return to Antarctica were broadcast back-to-back on May 31st.

This review from Hidden Remote goes into detail about the contents of the Antarctica episode, and is worth reading in full. Here is a brief excerpt:

6/7: Ancient Aliens: Return to Antarctica Provides Compelling Alien Hypotheses

Godwin’s law says that if you reference Hitler, you lose the debate.

Ancient Aliens does not share these reservations, because their connection is explicit.

Some believers within the Nazi party who, through psychic mediums, believed in the alien existence underneath Antarctica, led to Kraut submarine exploration beneath Antarctica, and ultimately establishment of secret bases alongside a preexisting alien race.



I did notice in the run-up to the debut that the official trailer video on YouTube had only racked up 30,000 views:




Additionally, DeLonge’s channels did not get anywhere near the engagement we see with established UFO personalities like Third Phase and SecureTeam 10, who are now being jeopardized.

The free subscriber counts to both pages were 20,776 and 18,640, respectively, and most videos were at around 30,000 views or less:



The obvious exception to the rule are the three UFO videos that auto-played in so many MSM articles when this debuted.

Here, you can see they had 1.3 million, 2.2 million and 5.7 million views, respectively, at the time these images were taken in May.



There are a wide variety of UFO-related articles now emerging in the mainstream media.

Here is one of significant interest that just popped up. It is being considered a ‘threat,’ and taken seriously by Congress:

6/19: Senators Get Classified Briefing on UFO Sightings

Three more U.S. senators received a classified Pentagon briefing on Wednesday about a series of reported encounters by the Navy with unidentified aircraft, according to congressional and military officials — part of a growing number of requests from members of key oversight committees.

One of them was Sen. Mark Warner (D-Va.), the vice chairman of the Senate Intelligence Committee, whose office confirmed the briefing to POLITICO.

“If naval pilots are running into unexplained interference in the air, that’s a safety concern Senator Warner believes we need to get to the bottom of,” his spokesperson, Rachel Cohen, said in a statement….


“Navy officials did indeed meet with interested congressional members and staffers on Wednesday to provide a classified brief on efforts to understand and identify these threats to the safety and security of our aviators,” spokesman Lt. Cmdr. Daniel Day said in a statement.

He said “follow-up discussions with other interested staffers” were also scheduled for Thursday.

“Navy officials will continue to keep interested congressional members and staff informed. Given the classified nature of these discussions, we will not comment on the specific information provided in these Hill briefings.”



This next article has a fairly good summary of how they have moved the ball forward on this story recently.

Invariably, these articles bring up TTSA and AATIP as if it is completely normal and credible, without addressing any of the public’s concerns.

This entire initiative is obviously seeking to completely ignore the established UFO community that now exists, just as our briefings had indicated:


6/24: Navy Releases Incredible UFO Footage (Same DeLonge Clip Again)

President Trump, while discussing the UFO reports with ABC News’ George Stephanopoulos on June 16, said he had been briefed on the recent rise in U.S. Navy pilots reporting unidentified aircraft.

Stephanopoulos pressed the president, asking what Trump made of it.

‘I think it’s probably – I want them to think whatever they think. They do say, and I’ve seen, and I’ve read, and I’ve heard. And I did have one very brief meeting on it.

“But people are saying they’re seeing UFOs. Do I believe it? Not particularly,’ he said.

Asked if he thought he would know if extraterrestrial life had been confirmed, the president replied, ‘Well, I think my great pilots would know. Our great pilots would know.’

‘They see things a little bit different from the past. So we’re going to see. We’re watching, and you’ll be the first to know,’ he told Stephanopolous.


The video’s release comes as Navy pilots are reporting more and more sightings of anomalous aircraft that appear to defy the laws of physics, prompting the service to roll out new guidelines last month to log sightings – though none of the information will be made public.

A Navy spokesman told The Washington Post that the reporting on UFOs would fall under ‘privileged and classified information’ so that military aviation safety organizations can ‘preserve the free and honest prioritization and discussion of safety among aircrew.’



The president very likely understands that if he were to respond with any real enthusiasm to the UFO question, it would be weaponized against him.

He would be called an ‘Alien Lover,’ ‘Saucer Freak,’ ‘Martian Don,” and who knows what else.

6/15: Trump “Doesn’t Particularly Believe” in UFOs But Held Recent Meeting


Therefore, a very careful political game is being played here.

The Q Anon briefings reveal a much deeper truth, where secret space programs and Roswell were acknowledged as factual as of September 19th, 2018.

The Orion space capsule on the White House lawn last year seemed like another obvious ‘clue’ of what we can expect moving forward.




After the 2016 Wikileaks emails hit the internet, Gen. Michael Flynn Tweeted about it and advocated for the child victims:


General Flynn


God knows w/ new how much Children need our help…Thank you @MELANIATRUMP for your sacrifice. @LindaSuhler @DanScavino 

Vote Trump Pics 📘@VoteTrumpPics

“My husband is ready to lead this great nation.” – @MELANIATRUMP

Melania Trump 🇺🇸 #MAGA

View image on Twitter
3,322 people are talking about this


Flynn had to leave his esteemed position not long thereafter, on Valentine’s Day 2017.

New information has come to light that he had uncovered a connection between the Clinton Foundation and terrorist financing:

6/22: Flynn Uncovered Massive Clinton Scandal Linked to Terrorist Funding, Was Immediately Targeted

I have personal reasons to believe that Flynn was important to the Alliance and was unfairly targeted.

Flynn also allegedly possessed a list of high-level names who were involved in this scandal.



What we are seeing is a very clear and undeniable buildup to a Partial Disclosure event.

If the DeLonge initiative was completely ‘clean,’ I would be all for it — but there are many obvious questions we all have.

The community as a whole seems to be freaked out by it, given the overall lack of popularity of these channels and videos.

By comparison, the Q Anon material has an incredible amount of support and engagement.

The Deep State has many, many different tools they’ve put into the media over the years for how they can do a Partial Disclosure.

This includes “alien megastructures” around Tabby’s Star. It inclues Ou’muamua, the cigar-shaped UFO asteroid.

You have the weird, lit-up area on Ceres. You have the possibility of them announcing an incoming, obvious spacecraft.

You have undersea ruins. New chambers in various pyramids with planted objects then found in them. Decloaking black triangles.

We were always told this would start to happen when they had run out of time… and here we are.



I have only ever gotten secondhand information from the Alliance, through insiders. And it has really dried up greatly as they make final preparations.

I do feel it is very important that we acknowledge that this is not a virtual war for hundreds of thousands of personnel.

They are literally fighting and dying in the largest covert operation in recorded history to restore peace and freedom on Earth.

In the Hero’s Journey spiritual archetype, the hero has to begin the quest without being fully prepared. You effectively stumble into it.

This can be seen with Luke Skywalker disavowing Yoda and his Jedi training and going off to fight the battle anyway.

Then… and this is very important… Divine assistance comes to the hero to ensure that the quest will be completed.

This, again, is not just a cool storyline for writing books, TV shows and movies. It is quite literally our spiritual DNA. It is “The Rules.”



Though I haven’t talked about it in this Ebook, I have had benevolent ET contacts throughout my life, and very consciously since 1996.

I have been remembering and documenting my dreams every night since September 21st, 1992. Right now I am finishing a book where I document what happened.

There are many very obvious examples of these dreams predicting the future with accuracy.

The movie Third Eye Spies is another must-see, revealing how ordinary people can learn teachniques like this through remote viewing.



I also had detailed information about the Alliance and their planet-saving initiative appear in 1999, long before I consciously had any idea that this was real.

The president has appeared numerous times in my dreams over the last few years and we have spoken extensively about what they are doing.

In one case, he said that his own past made him very familiar with “Dark Business,” and that he now wanted to do something to stop it.



With that being said, I have had hundreds and hundreds of documented dreams about what the Alliance is getting ready to do here.

One theme is very consistent. The Alliance does need to take a “leap of faith.” It will never be perfect. “The best is the enemy of the good.”

However, the dreams have also said that once they actually make this information public, “The Rules” completely change.

The benevolent ETs will then be authorized to generate all sorts of game-changing events that were unforeseen, and radically improve the situation in humanity’s best interest.

In one very powerful dream, this included the nearly spontaneous release of new technology that immediately starts cleaning up the planet.

The benevolent ETs could help us far more than we have anticipated, but “The Rules” require the Alliance to flip the switch first.

Since I have been told that top personnel do read these writings, I hope this message will be seen, heard and understood.



I would also like to remind you how important it is that we stick together in the midst of this global All is Lost point.

The negative forces have always used the tactic of “Divide and Conquer” against us.

They want generation against generation. Nation against nation. Gender versus gender. Race versus race. Religion versus religion.

The mainstream media is doing everything in its power to make its viewers constantly angry and triggered.

There is so much reactionary behavior going on right now that everyone is literally a raw wound.

As I saw at Contact in the Desert, even the mention of the current US president will cause some people to become extremely upset, unless it is negative.

The Deep State / Cabal / Illuminati has done its very best to deceive all of us, including its own most loyal members and devotees.

Therefore, I cannot stress this enough: Even if you disagree with someone else’s perspective, we must always remain kind, compassionate and understanding with one another.



My goal in writing this Ebook is to put all of this information together in one place, and then let you draw your own conclusions.

It seems very clear that we are right on the verge of epic disclosures being revealed in an event Q calls DECLAS.

I personally have never been more excited about anything in my life. Truly.

And I am incredibly grateful to the Q Anon team for Post 2700, and the acknowledgement that this will NOT be kept secret.

All of the data and testimony is converging with real-world, provable events towards an inescapable conclusion:

DECLAS is coming. Very soon.

And the world will never be the same.



Right now as I post this, we are at the 24-hour mark from when I finished the final tweaks and announced this post on social media and in an email blast.

I am happy to report that thanks to you, we have already had 102,000 views in 24 hours, which may well be a new record.



Even though our email blast was labeled as ***SPAM*** by Gmail, despite no commercial offers in it, we have not been deterred.

Remember that if all else fails, the Deep State does not appear to have a way to block you from texting your friends a link if you have their phone number.

Also, if you want a PDF copy of this, scroll down, click SHOW ALL, go to where it says SHARE at the bottom, click on the Print logo on the far right, and then save as a PDF.

The Project Veritas Google Insider video is a must-see, and validates almost everything we’ve discussed in this article:




This Tweet just came to my attention and is probably only the beginning of all the amazing things we are about to see as the above videos, and others like them, inspire new insiders to come forward:


Project Veritas


.@YouTube is LOSING their censorship battle. How do we know? Dozens of insiders have come to Project Veritas in the last 24 hours.

5,962 people are talking about this

Discussion of David’s Critical New Disclosure Film — #1 Documentary!

Source: Divine Cosmos

Today, October 30th, 2018, “Above Majestic” enjoys its worldwide debut.

The Secret Space Program, Q Anon, elongated skulls, ETs, the Cabal and so much more have all been rolled into one film for the very first time.

David Wilcock has top billing and extended screen time in the movie, making it a “must-see” for all fans of this website and our overall body of work.

Not surprisingly, Fakebook has declared our movie to be “Fake News,” and has already created an absolute ban on any and all advertising or discussion of it.

That’s how you know we are doing something right. This makes it all the more imperative that we speak up and support the cause.

Amazingly, despite this obvious shakedown from the Powers that Were, the film is #1 in the Itunes Documentary category!

[Update: We are now up to #1 on Amazon as well. Scroll to the end for the latest updates.]

As a gift to our audience on the day of this new career “first,” we have written up an extensive and interesting discussion of topics related to this film. Enjoy!



Never before have we had a film that blows the lid off of the Secret Space Program, ET life, the crimes of the Cabal, beings with elongated skulls, Q Anon and much more.

On the day before release, Orchard Entertainment got a letter from Fakebook saying that our movie was “Fake News,” and no advertising whatsoever would be permitted.

Nonetheless, we debuted first at #4, and then rose to #3 in the Documentary category — truly a stunning achievement!




The paid trolls are already striking, with a “Most Helpful” review of one word and one star, by a certain “Mage,” as follows:



Yes, Gray’s Mage. Seriously.

Reptilian Draco ETs do run the planet but you’ll be OK, I promise. This film helps to ensure their defeat.

[And how did he get in on October 29th to sling hate when the movie didn’t go live until the 30th? Hmmm.]

Please jump in and make sure your voice is heard in the reviews section so the “paid trolls” can’t artificially drive down our ratings. Thanks!

I also just checked and we are already up to #10 in the Documentary category on Amazon as well:



As I was writing this article, we shot all the way up to #1 in the Itunes Documentary Category! Thank you all for making this happen!



This, despite the message Orchard Entertainment got when they tried to advertise the film on Fakebook:



Guess we are “Not Authorized” to discuss “politics and issues of national importance.” Oh well.



We all have Project Camelot to thank for helping to usher in a new era of disclosure in the UFO community that is still moving forward.



This began with their debut insider in May 2006, “Mr. X,” who added intriguing new weight to the 2012 investigation.

Sadly, Mr. X died suddenly of a stroke at age 48, on December 13th, 2008, when he had a new baby and was about to come out with significant new information.

This did not appear to be an accident, as it was very sudden, completely unexpected and timed very closely with his imminent re-emergence as an insider after two years.



Mr. X’s data from top-secret government documents revealed that ETs reserved the right to reveal themselves to humanity during the 2012 timeframe.

Despite the benevolent ETs’ strict adherence to laws of free will, they made it clear that once this “end time” event happens, they are showing up en masse.

This was shared with the US government at the highest levels in various secret meetings, such as with President Eisenhower.

The big event itself obviously has since been delayed, and appears to be correlated with the “solar flash” many insiders now anticipate:

B: Was there anything that you read at that time in the 1980s that pertained to what then was in the future?

X: Yes. There was talk about what was described as a mass landing, in 2012, at the end of the year….

B: And that was a date that you read in the documentation?

K: And was that going to be something that the aliens were telling the Americans was going to happen? Or was it …

X: Well, they were telling them it was going to happen regardless of whether they wanted it to or not.

K: And was there a reason why they were choosing that year?

X: For a long time, I just think there were a lot of civilizations that were on this planet, maybe still are, but some that were and are not any more, that knew of that day and why it was so important.

B: So there’s a sense of an inevitable future that will be approaching.

X: Yes.


Many people feel that since “nothing happened” at the Mayan Calendar end-date, the entire prophecy was a bust.

[Something very big did happen to a star right next door, as we will discuss in just a minute.]

I certainly endured a great deal of flack online for having discussed the science of this cycle with no apparent change resulting at the end of 2012.

Nonetheless, the science associated with this prophecy is extremely deep, complex and compelling for those who study it.

I have spent much of my life working on this and am still having astonishing new breakthroughs.

Each of my three published books has delved into this with extensive technical detail.



Most amazingly, our closest large stellar neighbor, Proxima Centauri, did indeed have a ‘solar flash’ in the year 2012.

The light took the normal 4.2 years to arrive here, and the light from the “superflash” appeared to us as of March 2017.

[This next article erroneously lists the year as 2016, but the and NRAO articles below have it as 2017.]

The study, titled “The First Naked-Eye Superflare Detected from Proxima Centauri”, recently appeared online….

And while multiple studies have been conducted that have explored low- and moderate-energy flare events on Proxima, only one high-energy event has even been observed.

This occurred on March of [2017,] when Proxima Centauri emitted a superflare that was so bright, it was visible to the naked eye.



This data was covered in far more detail in Season 29, Episodes 18 and 19 of Wisdom Teachings and at my recent all-weekend conference in Estes Park, Colorado.

The WT episodes in question were “An Imminent Warning from Proxima Cenaturi,” and “Solar Flash: Ascension Energetics.”



The two other articles I drew off of for all the best scientific details in these presentations are as follows:

2/28: Superflare Blasts Proxima B, The Nearest Exoplanet, Dimming Hopes of Life

The flare boosted Proxima Centauri’s brightness by a factor of 1,000 over a 10-second span, the researchers said.

“March 24, 2017, was no ordinary day for Proxima Cen,” MacGregor said.

2/26: Powerful Flare from Star Proxima Centauri Detected With ALMA

At its peak, the newly recognized flare was 10 times brighter than our sun’s largest flares, when observed at similar wavelengths.


This is obviously not a “supernova,” but perfectly fits the ancient prophetic descriptions of the “solar flash” we are expecting.

As I have said before, the Hindus called it the Samavartaka Fire, the Zoroastrians called it Fraso-Kereti, and the Greeks called it Ekpyrosis.



How close did this next-door solar flash come to the Mayan Calendar end-date? Very close, as it turns out.

The Mayan Calendar end-date was in 2012. Let’s take that year as our starting point.

Proxima Centauri is 4.2 light years away — our closest large neighbor. So let’s start with 2012 and add four years: 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016.

Then the remaining 0.2 years is a total of (12x.2)= 2.4 months. Subtract the ten days after December 21st from 2.4 months and we have February 1st, 2017, if our starting point was January 1st, 2012.

A superflare from March 24th, 2017 would therefore have occurred (28+24)= 52 days after January 1st, 2012, which is about February 21st, 2012 — if you don’t mess with leap year. Otherwise it would be around February 20th.

Therefore, if our current reckoning of light speed is accurate, our solar system’s largest close neighbor had a massive solar flash within ten months of the predicted 2012 end-date window.

If both stars are moving into a giant galactic energy cloud, as our model suggests, then this cloud would be much bigger than the puny 4.2 light years of distance between our own star and our closest neighbor.

Proxima Centauri therefore had its flash right on time as it moved into this cloud… whereas ours hasn’t happened yet.



This is a truly stunning advancement in the scholarship of this entire subject. I first mentioned the Proxima flash publicly at New Living Expo in April.

The astronomers assume that these flashes are happening all the time, but they have no solid evidence to support that. This was the first time such an event was ever observed in the history of the telescope.

In light of all the supporting data we have assembled about the science behind this event, the likelihood that this epic solar flash is a “coincidence” is very small.

We are already seeing the charge-up in our solar system that we would expect to precede an epic energy release from the sun.

In a more honest and advanced society, the discovery of this nearby superflare, in direct correlation with ancient prophecies, would be the biggest story of the millennium.

Bear in mind that this event was so intense it would create a total transformation of the biosphere of any planets within that system.

Things have been so crazy this year that this is the first time I have had a chance to write about this stunning correlation on this website.



Corey Goode began having his own contact experiences slightly over two years after the 2012 end-date.

The contacts began just four months after he and I started sharing insider info on a daily basis in November 2014.

Goode’s alleged contacts revealed that very advanced and powerful ETs are holding off our own “solar flash” event, unlike what happened at Proxima Centauri.

This was done with the use of giant spheres that I was aware had been coming into our solar system since the late 1990s, from leaked NASA / SOHO imagery. They were called “Sun Cruisers” at the time.

These giant spheres are partly a type of technology, while also apparently being super-advanced life forms.

Invisible to the naked eye, they created a grid pattern in our solar system that could hold off the solar flash until the appropriate time.

Fluctuations in the solar output that would have led to the flash were carefully modulated and distributed throughout our system by the spheres.

The spheres were also able to absorb and hold back energy that would have severely affected our consciousness in ways we were not yet ready for at the time.



We are told by alleged ET sources that this solar flash will not occur until we are properly ready for it as a planet, or at least as close as can be feasible.

Even with that in mind, the “Guardian” ETs are not anticipating that this event will happen any later than 2029. That’s really not very much time.

We have a LOT to do in order to be ready by that date, particularly since the truly critical period occurs in just the next two years (See update at the end.)

No one really knows when the flash will occur — and a 17-year delay from 2012 is inconsequential when looking at a cycle with a 25,920-year span.

This 25,920-year cycle is something I have researched and written about extensively, with references from many different sources.



In physical terms this cycle appears as the “Precession of the Equinoxes,” which causes all stars in the night sky to drift by one degree every seventy-two years.

360 degrees times 72 years is how you get 25,920.

As Santillana and von Dechend revealed in the epic Hamlet’s Mill, fully 35 different ancient texts had these “precessional” numbers deliberately encoded into them — worldwide.

This appears to be the work of ET races who very much wanted us to investigate this cycle, since the end of the cycle gives us quite the surprise.

These prophecies very often describe an epic advancement of human evolution at the end of the cycle, as well as a massive solar event.



The science behind the exact timing of the flash, according to Secret Space Program insiders, is that it will only happen at a Solar Maximum or Solar Minimum.

There is a regular, predictable 11-year cycle between each minimum or maximum that has been observed since the dawn of the telescope.

At Solar Minimum, the sun has a spotless surface, and at Maximum we see a wildly churning surface riddled with sunspots.



The sun appeared to be hitting its Solar Minimum in 2017, but has defied all expectations by continuing to have 132 spotless days in 2018 as of mid-August.

NASA scientist Tony Phillips was saying we were still in a Solar Minimum as of September 27th, 2018, causing global cooling effects.

As an example, when I stayed in Canada this September, it turned to bitter cold and snow by mid-September — a full month ahead of time.

Eleven years after the still-visible minimum of 2018 puts us into the year 2029 as the new expected window. This is really not very much time.

Again, classified scientists and ETs have somehow calculated that the “solar flash” cannot occur unless the sun is at a maximum or minimum.

I had clear prophetic dreams giving me this exact window of time — roughly 2029 — before Corey Goode got the same thing from his alleged ET contacts.

I found interesting to say the least.



This prophecy of a solar flash becomes far more compelling when you read how extensively it appears in various ancient texts.

This includes the Old Testament, New Testament, the Qu’ran and many other sacred texts, including Hindu, Zoroastrian, Egyptian, Greek and Roman.

There are a wealth of modern prophecies about this that I still need to summarize and disclose in future efforts.

Bear in mind that the ETs who gave us these ancient prophecies apparently have time-travel capabilities.

Therefore, they could be having secret meetings with world leaders today and then jumping back a few thousand years to plant the appropriate prophecies.

The modern prophecies, like we see in the Law of One, can be far more specific than some of the ancient ones that are partially encoded in mythology.

There is widespread consensus in these prophecies that the sun gives off a blindingly brilliant flash of light, and we are transformed in the process.



The prophecies indicate that this is a type of spiritual graduation for those who are ready for it. I have always called it Ascension.

All the benevolent ETs have a central goal: to help us awaken to the fact that we are in a spiritual classroom, whether we realize it or not.

For most people reading this site, the idea of karma being an “absolute law” is so basic that it is foolish to even discuss it.

Yet, we must not forget that there are many, many people who are still grievously uninformed about this most basic of spiritual principles.

In a more enlightened society, we would all be very well aware of the absolute futility of trying to manipulate, control, deceive, betray or otherwise hurt people.

Sure, you can do it and think everything is fine in the short term.

However, without fail, your life will soon have “bad luck” that precisely balances whatever you created for others.



I became very aware of karma at an early age. My mother had informed me about it ever since as early as I can remember.

I remember my aggressive buddy Brad one time jumping out of his car in the snow to beat up a kid who threw a snowball at us on the way home from school.

He had the kid on the ground only to discover that it was his buddy Ed’s little brother. He didn’t beat him up. It was very strange… a little too weird.

It really didn’t take very long for me to figure out how reliably I would get injured or otherwise disrupted if I did something selfish or harmful.

This became far more obvious once I went completely sober in 1992. I have seen many thousands of very obvious karmic events ever since.

We also tend to forget that good karma is equally as immutable of a universal law as bad karma.

In other words, higher angelic beings are required to manifest positive events for us when we create more love, peace and happiness around us.



In light of how obvious and exacting karma can be, it is ultimately wise to have a healthy fear of it.

The more you experience this, the more you understand that you absolutely cannot and will not “get away” with anything.

No matter how clever you might think you are, even if you can completely deceive someone in physical terms, it will come back in some other form.

You can lie, cheat, steal, verbally abuse, physically abuse, betray, manipulate, control and torture, but everything you do is guaranteed to return to you.

It doesn’t always happen right away. According to the Cayce Readings, part of why we reincarnate is that it can take lifetimes to work off significantly bad karma.

The folks in the Cabal genuinely do not believe in the Law of Karma. They often equate themselves to natural forces like wildfires.

It doesn’t work that way. Fire is an element. We are human beings, subject to very specific and exacting spiritual laws.



Becoming aware of karma is a very intrinsic aspect of the Ascension process.

You are breaking down the notion of a conventional, materialistic “real world” in which there is no cause-and-effect relationship between your actions and your subsequent experiences.

It has never ceased to amaze me how many people, in my own private life, have scoffed at me for my belief in karma, and how precisely I believe in its effects.

Synchronicity is another very obvious clue that helps you understand the seemingly “magical” law of karma, and to navigate your process of Ascension.

If you keep doing hurtful things, experiencing karma and having no insight into the connection between your actions and experiences, you have “True Helplessness” in Law of One terms.

You probably won’t start to get synchronicity in a case like that. At the very least you have to become aware that your “bad luck” has a direct cause — namely you.



In the previous article, I quoted from writer Adam Stenbergh, whose research concluded that Facebook / Instagram was the perfect “Sadness Generator.”

This is obviously due to the incredible hatred we all face on these platforms. The Cabal obviously has had a huge involvement in the development of social media.

A total Wild West environment has been created, in which you can slander, defame, threaten and abuse anyone with almost no visible repercussions.

The police will actually tell you, “Call us when someone appears at your door trying to murder you.” It’s that bad.

People can seemingly “get away” with whatever they want online. We see outrageous hate come in on a daily basis across all of our platforms.

You don’t have to like me, the message I share or the way I share it. Nonetheless, it is very sad to see how much needless karma is being generated.

A person who routinely attacks and “trolls” others online is going to have a horrible life, and the karma will prevent them from ever getting out of it.



The Law of One describes how the world we are living in is a carefully-crafted illusion, in which the Law of Karma is not obvious.

Most of us have to go through many lifetimes of suffering needlessly, from our own hand, before realizing why all this “bad luck” keeps happening.

Now that we are at the end of the cycle, you may well be experiencing wave after wave of seemingly “bad karma” even if you are being very precise in your positivity.

Using the terms in the Law of One and the Cayce Readings, you may well be working off debts from other lifetimes.

As we get closer and closer to the epic turning points, including the mass exposure and arrest of the Cabal, more and more karma will be worked off.

I have certainly noticed intensive challenges this year despite being very careful not to create any new karma. Old stuff is definitely being discharged.

So again, I would advise you to embrace these experiences, no matter how difficult they might be. That is the key to preventing their repetition.



Not everyone will go through Ascension at the end of this cycle. In fact, the sources usually agree that most of us will not be ready for it.

The Cabal controls the media, and you hardly ever see any “entertainment” that accurately describes the Law of Karma and how exacting it is.

One movie and TV show after another demonstrate people who completely “get away” with hurtful acts and have no repercussions.

This is fiction. This is not reality. People who manipulate, control, dominate and abuse others end up in absolute misery before long.

The key quality for preparedness is a loving, forgiving, patient, open-hearted “service-to-others” perspective, while also being adept at lovingly maintaining your sacred boundaries.

The people who are not ready to evolve into the next level will end up being safely transported to another planet that is at the appropriate “vibrational level.”



The ancient prophecies also make it very clear that there will be a mass appearance of ETs when the solar flash happens, just as Mr. X’s classified documents revealed.

This is the great secret of Jesus, Krishna, Mohammed, Buddha and so many other masters.

Certain modern Christians have attempted to demonize all ET life as negative. Yet the word “Angel”, or the Greek “Aggelos,” simply means “Messenger.”

Anyone identifying as Christian who thinks all ETs are evil should definitely study in detail, for an awakening experience.

This site is written by a Christian and clearly shows how there are good ETs, or angels, and bad ETs, or demons, in the Old and New Testament both.

It took many years before I really “got” that the Law of One message was indistinguishable at its core from that of Christianity.

The scientific proof of Ascension is truly deep, and takes these ancient prophecies and breathes significant new life into them.



I have no doubt that a solar flash / Ascension event of this nature will happen. The science and prophecies are irrefutable.

And right up until it does, very few people will be aware of what is going on, just as the prophecies said.

The reason benevolent ETs had to hold this event off at the end of 2012 is that we were completely unprepared for something like this to occur at the time.

It is absolutely necessary that mass disclosure, and a visible defeat of the Cabal, precedes an event of this nature to help usher in a planetary awakening.

Otherwise, not enough people will have had the opportunity for a massive spiritual awakening, and the “graduation numbers” would be far too small.

Thankfully, “Above Majestic” is a “red pill” disclosure capsule about the Secret Space Program, the Cabal and Q Anon that is ready for mass consumption.



The entire focus of the Law of One series is on increasing our graduation numbers in the short time we have remaining.

Spiritual beings like you, as you read this, are very likely volunteering here to help increase the graduation numbers, from a Law of One perspective.

Although the solar flash will be a planetary event, we are also going through very intense personal experiences as it gets closer.

All you really have to do to fulfill the mission, at the core, is to “radiate the realization of Oneness with the Creator” to others.

This is easier said than done, as we are constantly assaulted with provocations that intend to destroy our peace of mind.

You may not believe that anything will be happening over the next ten or eleven years, but I still feel it is a very good idea to prepare for it anyway.

The worst thing that could happen to you is that you become a much nicer, more agreeable and friendly person. How bad could that be?

I don’t know about you, but I’m not interested in doing 25,000 more years in “third density.” I’m done.



One of the next Camelot witnesses, very early along, was “Henry Deacon” in September 2006, who talked about working at a base on Mars.

He used a portal technology called “The Corridor” to travel via teleportation to Mars, from a military base in the UK.

He specialized in repairing certain types of classified, advanced equipment, and never revealed to me exactly what it was.

Deacon seemed surprisingly disinterested in what he had done. It was difficult to get him to talk about any of it.

He described how much of his time was unstructured, and thus he spent a lot of time playing ping-pong with other employees on Mars.

He also mentioned that the Mars base he worked at had 200,000 “personnel,” and only 10,000 of them were Earth-born humans.

Deacon met many different types of humanlike ETs in the course of his work — and UFOlogy would never be the same after his testimony.

Deacon was very impressed with my work on interplanetary climate change, and knew how accurate it all really was.



I joined up with Camelot soon afterwards in 2007, and traded information about my Montauk Project insider “Daniel” in exchange for access to Deacon.

[Some of these stories are shared in the Special Features section of the new movie.]

Henry Deacon and I were soon speaking regularly, for two hours at a time. I quickly learned that we did indeed have a vast “Secret Space Program.”

Somehow, this knowledge had remained almost completely hidden from the public — even from most dedicated UFO researchers.

If information of this type becomes public knowledge, it will vastly enhance the likelihood of a mass, collective awakening.

Deacon came to the July 2009 Zurich conference anonymously, under the cover-story of being my “Uncle Mark.”

He was inspired to get up on stage during NASA astronaut Brian O’Leary’s main talk, at the 58:05 minute mark in the video:



Deacon did not go into very much detail about his off-planet experiences in this unanticipated and frankly shocking public debut.

To me, this only enhanced his credibility, as a person making up stories for fame and recognition would have gushed with all of his best stuff.

Nor has Deacon ever made a single dollar off of being a Secret Space Program whistleblower.

No one knew he was planning on doing this until right before he said he wanted to get up on stage.

Deacon further surprised everyone by holding up his “OFFICIAL” US passport, which was brown instead of blue.

I visually inspected it myself, on stage, and confirmed that it appeared to be completely genuine by any conventional measure.




Not long after meeting Henry Deacon, I got introduced to Jacob, whose knowledge and experience of the secret space program went much farther.

Jacob claimed to have visited approximately two thousand different off-planet locations, mostly via portal travel.

He claimed to be working at the very highest levels, directly with the Rothschilds, but also was not happy about what was going on and wanted to share secrets.

Almost everything Jacob told me was not intended for public consumption, and went very far beyond what anyone was hearing in the public.

The information was vastly complex, and I kept it strictly hidden for many years as a way of preserving confidentiality and assessing new insiders.

Pete Peterson and Emery Smith appeared in 2009, and both added significant new details to the story that I had been missing.

I quickly learned that any one high-level insider you meet will have areas of the story that overlap with others, as well as unique and fascinating new items.



Long before the term “LARP,” or Live Action Role Play, appeared on 4Chan, I was seeing many people make up stories based on these witness reports.

It was very, very common for me to leak some small aspect of new information, only to have it appear in the alleged testimonials of others a week or two afterwards.

In most of these cases, the information I provided would be wrapped up in a host of fantasy information that the person had clearly fabricated.

Real insiders, by comparison, would not make obvious mistakes, such as blatantly contradicting other, unpublished data I knew to be true.

One of the reasons I withheld so much I was hearing from Daniel, Henry Deacon, Jacob and Peterson for all those years was to be able to quickly identify LARPers.

There are still many specific details that are not public, which make it easy to spot fakes.



In almost all cases, my policy is to say nothing — neither good nor bad — about people like this.

As I always tell my audience, if someone has been out there for more than a couple of weeks and you don’t ever hear me talk about that person, BELIEVE ME, I know who they are.

Every example of someone trying to put out information like this is sent to me very redundantly, in hundreds if not thousands of messages.

I try not to get in the way of people saying whatever they feel like saying, under most circumstances.

Even in cases of being directly attacked, I usually will still maintain silence. Few of the LARPers ever last for very long. They get identified or otherwise flame out.

The karma for making up stories like this and misleading the public is swift and severe, to say the least. It will be a very hard road for that person.

My guess is that these people don’t really believe the insider testimonies are true, and therefore want to jump in on the fun and make up their own stories.

I simply put out the message that I believe is the truth, and leave it up to you to decide what to do with it.



I was a student of the Law of One series ever since 1996, and in fact built my entire spiritual and scientific focus off of it.

It never ceased to amaze me how many overlaps there were between the Law of One and the testimonials of genuine insiders.

L/L Research published a series of redacted excerpts as Book Five in 1998. There were many precise references to what we would call a secret space program therein.

There were mentions of bases underground and off-planet, as well as reverse-engineered craft and ET interactions.

This was in 1981, long before UFOlogy had any idea that these things might exist — and the questioner Dr. Don Elkins had a hard time with the new data as a result.

This content was so far-out that L/L Research kept it unpublished and invisible for 14 years — until Book Five emerged in 1998.

These sessions have all been properly re-integrated into the whole on, which is free for you to read.

Invariably, each new authentic insider I met would have data that overlapped with this — and especially Corey Goode once he emerged in 2014.



So again, I live a life that would be very mystical for most people. I have written my dreams down every morning for 26 years now.

I understand the language of dreams and I am able to decipher them, getting at least one or two “readings” a day on how to proceed.

I was having amazing dreams about this coming Ascension event long before I found the science and prophecies to prove it.

Each new twist and turn in this investigation has been met with absolute fascination. The Secret Space Program has been one of the most stunning aspects of all.

The ETs who are working with our high-level insiders, behind the scenes, are absolutely aware of what we are heading into.

One key element of Corey Goode’s testimony is that we will inherit all of these underground and off-planet facilities in the secret space program after we go through the Great Shift.

The future is very bright and exciting indeed. We just have an incredible amount of spiritual work to go through in order to get there.



Above Majestic has multiple witnesses and scholars coming forward to discuss this very interesting subject.

And in light of Q Anon confirming the existence of secret space programs on September 19th, and going silent since October 9th, this film couldn’t be more timely.

I mentioned that Montauk Project whistleblower Preston Nichols died less than a week before, on October 5th, 2018.

Then Karl Wolfe died suspiciously on October 10th, followed by Bob Dean the day after, on October 11th.

All three of these men are high-level insiders who would have been invaluable to the disclosure effort in a post-mass-arrests society.

The timing is suspicious, to say the least. And now our movie gets banned by Fakebook.



After publishing my last article, my original Montauk Project insider Daniel revealed that he also nearly died on October 10th.

This strained the idea of “coincidence” even further.

Here is part of what he just told me:


“I almost died on October 10th from anaphylaxis, caused “out of the blue” by a doctor-recommended, $7 over-the-counter pain med from Wal-mart.

My tongue tripled in size and got hard as a rock, my throat swelled up and cut off my air. You can’t call for help when you can’t breathe, and there is not enough time to “text.”

Fortunately my early survival training got me through it. You know me… I’m not allergic to anything, so this caught me totally by surprise.”


We discussed how each of these events have “plausible deniability,” in that they seem to have a conventional explanation.

Karl Wolfe’s was the least “deniable,” as he got struck by an 18-wheel truck while he was riding his bicycle and died from the trauma.

In this case, any number of strategies could have been used to “spike” Daniel’s reaction to the seemingly benign over-the-counter pain medication.

Daniel agreed with me, after some discussion, that this was very suspicious, particularly due to the timing.

The Cabal may have wondered if he would ever come forward publicly, which he has never yet agreed to, and they tried something like this “just to be on the safe side.”

Daniel also revealed that Duncan Cameron, the other key Montauk insider, is also now on his death bed.

All of this suggests the Deep State is fearing an imminent disclosure event, perhaps soon after the November 7th elections, as we discussed previously.



The Above Majestic film doesn’t really get into Ascension, the solar flash, or the deeper esoteric studies therein. I am presenting that info here for context.

It is important to keep these greater spiritual concepts in mind, from a Law of One perspective, when seeing a movie like this.

What the film does do is present a very interesting and compelling narrative about the Secret Space Program, the Cabal and its ET roots.

I really “went for it” by putting in as much information that would expose the Cabal as possible. In that sense it is a very brave film.

It is no wonder that we got banned from Fakebook immediately. “Quick, Quick!!!” We still made it to number one anyway, thanks to you.

Since our team is fighting and dying on the front lines here, we really do need your help by diving in and getting involved in this stunning disclosure initiative.



Here is the official Itunes link that is now up and running, so you can see the movie right now:

As with any film, you can buy the movie to watch it as many times as you want, in this case for 14.99, or rent it to see it once, starting later this month.

With everything now going on, this might be one movie you actually want to own.

It is so jam-packed with amazing info that it will likely take a few different viewings, in different states of consciousness, to really take it all in:


Order Above Majestic now!
Get 4 hours of bonus material with purchase
on iTunes and Vimeo!


Orchard explained, “Of the three bonus features, we have a three-hour interview of [David Wilcock,] which is unreleased and absolutely amazing material!

The interview is cut into part 1 and part 2. I would think your fans would be thrilled to have this interview.”

Again, thank you for supporting this work and those of us who are still alive to carry it on.

We do need your help right now in making sure the Deep State doesn’t Deep Six our disclosure effort.




We are happy to report that we are now up to #7 on Amazon, in addition to being #1 on Itunes in the Documentary category:



And right now as I am here to make this update, I also came in right on a “quad” of numbers — in this case 6666.



This seems appropriate given how well this film exposes the negative agenda on Earth, and the secrets that are being hidden.



I also forgot to mention that these numbers are still not fixed. They have already fluctuated since we started bringing out this material.

The fluctuations have to do with our collective consciousness, which ultimately determines how ready we are and how much time we will need.

Another seemingly “fixed” date in our future timeline is late 2020.

Right up until the immediate past, the Anshar have been telling Goode that we have another nexus-point of very major significance in late 2020.

In fact, if we haven’t “gotten it together” by then as a planet, we will have far less success with what comes later as of 2029.

For this reason it is very important that we focus hard in the next two years and really push for Full Disclosure.

This film certainly is a useful tool to help that process along, and I am proud of it for that reason.

Lastly, if you are in a country where you are not getting it on Itunes or Amazon, please use Vimeo instead:

Vimeo link:



As I write and add to this update, (including fixing the pub date to 10/30,) the hit counter is going crazy.

We got two more synchronicity numbers along the way — 6060 and 444:




And of course, another one right after I hit Publish:




Our film has also just broken into the top three on New and Noteworthy, which everyone sees on Itunes or Apple TV:



Your support is what has made this possible, so we do thank you. Please leave comments on the movie to help fight Deep State trolls.

As I made this announcement and then checked the page, there was a synchronicity — 3344:



I popped in here to make the update and it was up to 72,722:



And hey, look at the total number of comments for the site:



I guess I should go to Vegas!

Thanks again for all your help in making this miracle happen for Disclosure. And a word count of 6666!




So much for the “perfect score” of 6666 words… this one is too good not to add.

I just got word that the film has now shot up to #3 on Amazon as well, as of 1:16 PM PST. Take a look:



This is also the fastest-growing article we’ve ever had in terms of views. We just topped 100,000 and it’s only been up for about three hours.



Thanks again for making this such an exciting launch of a worthy Disclosure initiative!



LRM ONLINE has gone live with their exclusive clip from ABOVE MAJESTIC. Please find links and screenshots below!

LRM Online – Homepage:
LRM Online – Film Page:
LRM Online– Twitter (18.1k Followers):




We just found out that we hit Number One on Amazon’s Hot New Releases for the Documentary category:



Very exciting. Thanks again for your help in making this happen!

We are also a minute or two away from hitting 150,000 views already in only four hours:



And this right after posting the above:



And then this as soon as I posted the above:




In addition to hitting #1 on Itunes and Amazon both, we have now already exceeded the total view count from our previous article — in only six hours.

I would definitely recommend reading “MOMENT OF TRUTH: Q Anon Discusses Secret Space Program” if you haven’t already done so.

The hit counter has risen faster than in the entire history of this website. Thank you, Fakebook, for banning our movie and proving we’re on to something!

As I checked on the numbers, yet more synchronicity appeared. First, a quint in the comments:



Then when I loaded the front page of the site, we had a 111 as the hit counter screams towards 200,000 in only six hours:





Somehow after I posted the above, which was only in a few minutes, it immediately went from 196,111 up by another 20,000-plus views:



This is obviously not a synchronicity number, but we’ve had so many others that I’m just including this one to document how fast the counter went up.

This means we hit 200,000 views in UNDER six hours. Truly amazing. We greatly appreciate your support and interest!

What is happening? As soon as I posted the above, which was only about two minutes, it went up another 20,000 to more than 237,000:



Right now we are apparently getting five to ten thousand hits a MINUTE. That is a career first for sure.

I just got locked out of the site for a couple minutes after posting the above. We are having very high traffic. As soon as I got back in, we were up by more than 20,000:



I’ve honestly never seen anything like this. The site is still online, so this is where it pays to have such expensive monthly fees, I guess.

I just came back in after a few minutes to take another look, and now it has gone up by another 22,000 — and it had a 111 in it:




I had some dinner, came back and we are now at an astonishing 304,796 views in less than eight hours, and still climbing fast:



I have TWO video interviews I am filming for tomorrow, so this is just the beginning. Lots more is on the way!

Thank you for your support in helping this truly grassroots effort gain traction and pave the way for Full Disclosure!

ET Autopsy Insider Emery Smith Hit With Massive Attack After Coming Forward

Let’s pray for a speedy recovery for Emery.

Timothy Frappier

Source: Divine Cosmos

Emery Smith claims to have autopsied about 3,000 different types of ET humanoids. The day after we announced his coming forward, he was hit with an attack that landed him in the emergency room.

Right before his health collapsed, three black SUVs followed him and abducted his dog Raven. Miraculously, Raven was found alive by a good citizen after the perpetrators dumped her off on the highway.

However, immediately after the abduction, Emery developed pneumonia-like symptoms with a fever that skyrocketed up to 105. The ER in Palm Springs could not admit him until 7AM the following morning.

His oxygen level went down to 90 percent, which when coupled with the enormously high fever could very easily have killed him. This all screams of “foul play.”

As we were finishing this article, his health slipped and he had to go back into the hospital once again. We are calling for your prayers for his health and safety.

Our last article shared the story of the dog’s abduction in an update, but not everyone reads updates. For Emery’s security, we did not say how sick he really was, or that he was in the hospital, until he stabilized.

These attacks reek of desperation on behalf of the Deep State. Why would they try to completely destroy his life if he was simply making up stories, as their paid trolls will assert?





When you have been lied to for so long — in fact, born into a world where all you’ve ever known is lies — it can be very difficult when the truth finally appears.

It’s almost like a person who has been locked in a room their whole lives, never allowed to see the outside world, finally being set free.

There are plenty of movies, television shows, video games and the like that have prepared us for the type of cosmic disclosure that Emery Smith is bringing to the table.

However, for most people there is still an enormous difference between enjoyable science fiction movies and the idea that this stuff is actually true.

There is a level of UFO secrecy that goes far above the US military, the highest generals, even the Commander-in-Chief of the US Armed Forces.

What we are calling the Deep State is in possession of far, far greater secrets than most could ever even imagine.



The whole UFO-related insider world “went private” during the Eisenhower administration, from 1953 to 1961.

This led to his infamous 1961 warning about the “rise of unwarranted power and influence… by the military-industrial complex.”

Here is a copy of that part of his Presidential farewell speech from the US National Archives:





In 2013, a former CIA insider revealed Eisenhower had tasked him to threaten the folks at Area 51 that they would be invaded if they did not share their information.

This is what the insider said, in his own words, about Eisenhower’s reaction when he was called in to be part of a team that would confront Area 51:

[In this meeting within the Oval Office,] President Eisenhower [told the insider]:

We called the people in from MJ-12, from Area 51 and S-4, but they told us that the government had no jurisdiction over what they were doing….

I want you and your boss to fly out there. I want you to give them a personal message….

I want you to tell them, whoever is in charge, I want you to tell them that they have this coming week to get into Washington and to report to me.

And if they don’t, I’m going to get the First Army from Colorado. we are going to go over and take the base over.

I don’t care what kind of classified material you got. We are going to rip this thing apart.”

In response to Dolan’s question, “Eisenhower was going to invade Area 51?” the CIA agent confirmed that Eisenhower indeed planned to do so with the First Army.

After traveling to Area 51 and S-4, the CIA agent said that he saw several garage type doors with flying saucers in them.

He described seeing a Gray alien at the S-4 facility that his boss “partially interviewed”.

Upon returning to the White House, the agent and his boss relayed what they had seen at S-4.

Significantly, the FBI Director, J. Edgar Hoover, was also present during the debriefing of the CIA agent and his boss over what they had witnessed at S-4 and Area-51.

According to the CIA agent, Eisenhower was shocked.


What we are seeing is that even the President of the United States was only given a little taste of what was going on at Area 51, even after threatening them.

If the military-industrial complex (MIC) had access to a live ET, and various ET technologies, they obviously would be able to make contact with other ETs.

From there, it isn’t hard to imagine that those ETs would have friends, and would ultimately introduce us to a much larger community.

Once ‘we’ entered into that community, there could be all sorts of rewards, including hyper-advanced technology they would teach us how to build.

Multiple insiders have said we are uniquely good at integrating technology from many different sources, where the result is greater than the sum of its parts.

Thus, a huge discrepancy began occurring in the 1950s, where technology that is still superior to what we have today was being developed covertly.

This included “smart-glass pads” that are made of a fully clear, see-through material and superior to the Ipad — including holographic displays.

Where Emery worked at Sandia Labs, they simply called it a “folder,” perhaps as a way of “reducing psychological impact.”

Once you hear him speak (and the full-length first episode will be made free online in January,) it’s hard not to be convinced that he is the “real deal.”



If ‘we’ (in the MIC) went into the manufacturing business with all the cool stuff that we learned, various ETs would need to start “paying” us for our products.

There is no money exchange in this greater cosmic society. No one is going to accept your worthless pieces of paper just because you say they have value.

Instead, we see a barter system. You trade one item of value for another that is also seen to have value.

Some groups might have much easier access to certain commodities than others, for various reasons — including the places they go and the things they do.

Apparently, one of the key forms of payment ‘we’ have been receiving for many years now is samples of dead bodies from ETs all over the galaxy.

This was seen as very valuable…. for obvious reasons.

Only then would we really be able to figure out “who’s who in the zoo”, and have some idea of the vulnerabilities of potentially hostile races.

Emery appears to be one of potentially thousands of covert military employees who autopsied bodies that were being given to us as “payment”…. by our “friends.”

You can see how someone like Emery complicates the idea of a neat, tidy, “partial disclosure” that rolls out over the next 50 to 100 years.

The multiple, brazen attempts on his life would not be happening if he had nothing to say.



Even the Tom DeLonge “soft disclosure” we covered in the previous article included the idea that some deeper force was working to prevent this information from ever being distributed.

If our own elected officials have no access to such potentially significant programs, going all the way back to Eisenhower, we have a very serious problem on our hands.

After Eisenhower was JFK. Many insiders, documents and reports suggest Kennedy got some info on UFOs, but not very much.

We also have heard from multiple sources that Marilyn Monroe was assassinated after calling a friend to organize a press conference where she would tell the world the UFO info she heard from JFK.

In May 2017, the UK Express covered this story with film clips from Michael Mazzola and Dr. Steven Greer’s film Unacknowledged.

It is very difficult to imagine how far ‘we’ might already have gone with the full cooperation and technology of multiple ET races, all kept in secret.

A surprising number of insiders have surfaced to shed light on this amazing story… but for most people it still seems hard to accept.

Nonetheless, someone like Emery Smith has the potential to create a revolutionary wave of disclosure — particularly now that the Tom DeLonge phase is fully operational.



Some people end up finding their way into this classified world by starting out in the military, and then getting pulled into privatized defense-contractor programs — like Emery.

They are sworn to secrecy, upon pain of death, and usually have no idea that the highest military officials in the nation — even the Joint Chiefs of Staff — may be completely unaware of their activities.

I have known Emery Smith since 2008. I kept his identity so secret that I didn’t even give him the pseudonym of Paul until very recently.

When people would say “David Has No Evidence,” or “No Other Insiders Have Corroborating Testimony,” I held my tongue — for Emery’s own safety.

Emery did appear openly at many CSETI gatherings where CE-5 contact protocols were being used to call in potential UFO sightings.

He also appears in the movie SIRIUS as one of the speakers, as do I… but no one was aware of how much he really knew, including his friends and family.

The things he has told me over the last ten years may seem quite sensational, but they line up precisely with what we end up hearing from many other insiders.

By the time Corey Goode started talking in late 2014, I already had seven years to meditate on the implications of what Emery and many other insiders had already shared with me.



Emery never wanted to come forward about any of his black-ops experiences. He had no intention to ever do so.

There were threats and attempts on his life since I started anonymously leaking some of his intel, as well as the complete loss of all his worldly possessions.

This is exactly what happened to Pete Peterson after coming forward on Cosmic Disclosure with much more controversial information. Every last thing Pete owned was stolen.

On August 14th, 2017, I wrote David Wilcock’s Brakes Sabotaged: Was It the Dark Alliance?, which featured some of Emery’s intel.

Very soon after this was released, Emery’s home in New Mexico was broken into, and everything was stolen or otherwise destroyed.

This included large crystals that had been completely smashed to worthless powder on the ground. Evidence was planted to make it all look like the work of drug addicts.

When Emery went to see the damage, all that was left was a box with some of his military badges in it, with an armor-piercing bullet next to it, left standing upright on the counter.

The police were so intimidated by all of this that they refused to even go inside and investigate.

I was very reluctant to publicize this at the time. Nothing about this incident appeared on this website until October 22nd, 2017, two months and one week later.



The October 22nd article was entitled Something Big is Coming, Part II: Is Wikileaks About to Drop the Nuke?, and it was very extensive in scope.

Some of “Paul’s” intel was mentioned. In this case, I profiled his testimony on “smart suits,” which as it turns out are very advanced.

I mentioned films like Spider Man: Homecoming, in which the Tony Stark character gives Peter Parker a similar suit as he himself was using as Ironman.

Emery has had the opportunity to try out these smart suits, and they are quite spectacular, including giving you the ability to jump up to 30 feet high.

The article also revealed much more of the Alliance operations against the Deep State, which the adversary is very grumpy about.

Only a half-hour after this intel was posted, Emery suffered a head-on collision while driving his SUV in Topanga, California.

The timing was very, very suspicious… to say the least.

This definitely appeared to be intended to take him out, as well as to threaten both of us in the hopes of using fear to prevent us from talking any further.

Here is what I wrote about it at the time, and posted into the existing article as an update:




I just got done having a text exchange with my insider, Paul. I am still in shock but feel it is essential to report what happened.

Just 30 minutes after this article went up last night, at 6:30 PM, Paul was struck unexpectedly in his vehicle… and suffered a head-on collision.

The driver had wildly veered over into the oncoming lane right before the impact.

Thankfully, he survived with only concussions and whiplash. His vehicle, however, was completely totaled.

This is a guy who has already lost everything, just like Pete. The last worldly possession he still owned was the vehicle.

After I leaked his intel in David Wilcock’s Brakes Sabotaged: Was It the Dark Alliance?, his house was burglarized to the bare walls.

A single bullet was left standing on his countertop. This is a still from the video where he filmed this:

He was the one who had leaked the intel to me about the “smart suits,” which I debuted here last night at 6PM.

The timing, particularly in light of everything else that has been going on the last few months, is extremely suspect.

As with the complete theft of everything in his house, I have asked him to document the vehicle damage with photos and video for later publication.

This may have been an example of vehicle hacking being used to steer another car into hitting his car. It is totally crazy.


So let’s talk about how all of these things may be related.

In response to some scornful comments we received, I am NOT saying these accidents are because of me.

What I AM saying is that the Cabal is on the verge of a mass, public exposure. I am one of the people covering that story with intel most others don’t have.

The reason this and the previous articles have been so lengthy is that the data will be scrutinized far more in the future if this comes to pass. The case is very complex.

The Alliance will make its moves regardless of whether I am involved in any of this or not. Their plan does NOT revolve around me or my work.

That being said, I did have my life threatened. Corey’s life was threatened. Pete’s life was threatened. Paul’s life was threatened. Tompkins actually died.

The brakes did go out on my car. Now Paul has just had a head-on collision. It is a miracle that he wasn’t injured more greatly. It was a big, bulky SUV.


I had been telegraphing for three days via electronic communication that I was writing “the big one” — i.e. this article.

Therefore, I have theorized that the Cabal is trying to “clean it up” before either being exposed or attempting a Partial Disclosure.

The Partial Disclosure could involve UFOs and / or ancient ruins in Antarctica.

Any scholars or insiders who could credibly and intelligently counter these plans would become a threat.

Certain individuals could throw off the narrative the Cabal is trying to spin more than others. We are simply some of those people.

Tompkins’ testimony is of almost singular importance in establishing the origins of the Secret Space Program during WWII for the US, as one example.

Many others are undoubtedly facing similar threats at this time.




On November 12th, 2017, I wrote Something Very Big, Part III: Saudi Mass Arrests Sign of Impending Cabal Defeat?,which was chock-full of very exciting intel about pending indictments and arrests.

At the beginning of this article, I shared more of what had happened to Emery, including the head-on collision that occurred only a half-hour after the previous article went up.

This was the first time that I actually posted pictures of the crash, further proving that it did really happen.

Take a look:




Just half an hour after we released Part Two, one of our top insiders we have been calling Paul was nearly killed in a head-on collision.

This was particularly significant because we had released more of his highly sensitive intel in that same article.

I didn’t find out what happened until a day or two after the event took place, as he had been in the hospital.

This was the same insider who had everything he owned stolen, with nothing left but an armor-piercing bullet on the countertop of his home.

This had occurred shortly after the last time I had released intel from him in August:



The police said there was no traceable evidence of a break-in, despite clear boot-prints on the door where it was kicked in.

They were so frightened by whatever this was that they wouldn’t even enter the house. They dropped Paul off outside and he had to go in alone:



The attack was very spiteful, including smashing all his crystals to bits on the floor and stealing every personal record and belonging from the previous 30 years.

Holes were cut in the wall where various classified items had been stored — and all of these precious documents and keepsakes were removed:




In the second and even more serious incident, which again was only a half hour after my article had launched, Paul suffered a head-on collision.

Paul had just pulled out of a grocery store onto a busy, double-lane road. The driver of an oncoming car steered directly into Paul’s lane.

Paul had a brick wall to his side, leaving him with nowhere else to turn… and no escape. It was the perfect trap.

Instead of slowing down or steering away, this driver maintained his collision course — and actually accelerated.

The Range Rover was the last item of value that Paul still owned, and it was destroyed beyond repair in the collision.



Paul turned away from the car to try to change the impact angle and reduce the severity of the crash at the very last second.

This may very well have been a move that saved his life, even though it brought the impact even closer to his side of the car.



Paul’s body collided with the windshield, leaving visible cracks as you can see here. Blood was found on the window and the driver’s side door.

Luckily, he escaped with whiplash and a concussion and nothing more severe, other than the final loss of everything he owned.



Since then, we have taken elaborate precautions to insure that his valuable information can never be lost.

We will have more to say on that soon enough.




What I did not say at the time this was written was that Emery and I were already at Gaia HQ, in Colorado, taping his testimony in episode-length installments.

I knew we were running a very dangerous game here. It was vitally essential that we preserve his knowledge and experience in case something happened.

We had a lot of fun with it and managed to produce fifteen very hard-hitting episodes.

As I have said before, I had many great surprises during this process, since he shared much more on camera than he had ever told me before.

I remember in the past being frustrated when I would ask about certain things and know he was holding back, for whatever reason.

In this case we made sure not to do anything stupid, as in anything that would jeopardize national security. We were also extremely thorough.

I did not want to say a single word about what we had done until at least one episode had already aired.

Why? Simply put, although I didn’t like thinking this way, I was well aware that Emery might be attacked once again.



It is possible that various assets in the Dark Alliance were unaware of the “soft launch” of Emery’s testimony on Cosmic Disclosure until I wrote about it.

If they were watching his finances through covert means publicized by Edward Snowden, then they knew he had gotten very close to absolute zero.

Gaia has offered him some assistance, but this is a grassroots company that pays everyone equally and cannot throw large amounts of money around.

Furthermore, everything business-related gets delayed around the holidays, making it even tougher.

One thing we’ve learned about the Dark Alliance / Deep State is they get really, really pissed off when they are trying to destroy someone and we then rise to their aid.

They obviously felt they were very close to destroying Emery. Then when you rose up to defend him and keep him from going “over the cliff,” they were obviously furious.

On Christmas Day, you began saving Emery’s life by sending him donations. On the day after Christmas, the Deep State attempted to kill him.


Here’s the update I wrote to the last article about this, in case you may have missed it:



Last night I got the kind of text from Emery that you never want to see. Here was a part of it:

We pulled over to let dogs pee and in 5 min three black SUVs followed us right after sunset. They pulled off about 50 Meters away and took my dog and accelerated away! I’m devastated! My only last family member

Emery was extremely distraught, as expressed in other personal texts I will refrain from sharing. His health was also very bad, with what he believed was pneumonia.

This could have been the result of how rough things got before we bailed him out, coupled with lack of sleep and massive stress.

For some time we didn’t hear very much. I was just encouraging him to get to a safe place and make sure to hydrate.

I was very sorry about the dog. I could only imagine what might have happened, and my thoughts were pretty dark, I must say.

This was very obviously a Dark Alliance targeted attack, not just three random black SUVs who happened to follow him and want to abduct his dog.

The whole thing was just crazy. “Someone” obviously ordered this attack. That same “someone” is clearly trying to intimidate us into not speaking about the Secret Space Program.



This is an act of total desperation. If the Deep State were smart, they would totally avoid targeting someone like this after they came out.

By doing this attack, they are absolutely, 100 percent signaling that Emery is telling the truth, the whole truth and nothing but the truth.

That means that some aspect of the Deep State already has a program where even one employee, in only 3-4 years of time, can personally autopsy 3000 different ET bodies.

Based on the number of operating rooms and floors in this one base alone, there are probably THOUSANDS of other employees doing the exact same job.

Again, Emery has no “smoking gun” that can absolutely prove everything Corey is saying is true.

He has seen live ETs in person as well, at various times, including tall humanoid reptilian types. So there are many, many validations.

Part of why Corey made sense to me was that I had heard Emery’s stories long before we ever spoke. Now you are getting this for the first time.

Please send your prayers and support to Emery in this difficult time. “They” are trying to punish him for coming forward, and it only further proves he is for real.



The story had an unexpected twist, well after I first heard the news. Emery is already plugged into Alliance networks.

With that in mind, check out the text I got after having a long time to think about this and mourn his dog:

We have recovered Raven who was thrown out of an SUV on the highway. An angelic woman took her to Pet Smart to buy her water and snacks and posted on Facebook ASAP, which my colleagues immediately zeroed in on and contacted her! The search and abduction was over in 90 minutes without me calling in the satellites!

We are very, very grateful that Emery’s dog Raven was not killed, and that he was able to get the dog back.

The adversary very likely did not count on anything like this happening.

I have asked Emery to get as much documented evidence about this as possible, so fake Dark Alliance trolls won’t accuse him of making this up.

It was similarly irrefutable for him to take pictures of his car after he suffered a head-on collision. Just so we are clear. This is all very real.

Anyone accusing him of making this up is acting like a psychopath and should be shunned.

I recommended documenting any tissue damage to the dog, photos of the Facebook post with the name scrubbed, et cetera.



Since Emery already gave us the initial bulk of all of his coolest stories in the course of 15 episodes, I am not sure why this was done.

Granted, we can go into a lot more detail, and we plan to. This kind of a move, however, just reeks of desperation.

The Deep State obviously wants to make other insiders afraid to come forward. They don’t even care at this point. It’s just wild and chaotic.

With that being said, we will not let Emery’s life be in vain. This only further motivates us to do whatever we can to get the truth out.

This is a very real battle, with very high stakes. So please consider giving financial assistance to Emery if you have not already done so.

He became very despondent from this, as expected. He is only human, as are we all. The Cabal folks seem very angry and jealous right now.

If we can step away from the immediate shock, horror and crisis of this, we can be grateful that he got his dog back, relatively unscathed.

This also is a very significant event in the history of disclosure. Acts of terror like this reek of total desperation. It can come back around on them in very unexpected ways.

From a spiritual perspective, attacks against Emery like this (or anyone else) also authorize the “good guys” to do much more to quicken the Deep State’s downfall.

After coming back from breakfast and checking on this with a single click, there was another repeating-digit pattern — this time 555.




I asked Emery and his associates to provide proof of where the dog’s discovery was announced on social media.

I obviously do believe him, but in today’s sad world of paid Dark Alliance trolls, who viciously attack everything, some degree of proof is useful.

This is the first level of what came in. Much more documentation will follow. We will probably write a separate update about these events.



Please devote some time to praying and / or sending positive, loving thoughts to Emery right now, as he is in very poor health. Thanks.






Many things were left out of this update for Emery’s own safety. It was a combined operation. What happened to the dog was only a part of it.

Simply put, he was already in the emergency room by the time I posted the proof of his dog’s abduction.

He thought he had pneumonia. It turned out to be a very, very severe case of influenza, with a fever that skyrocketed all the way up to 105.

Bear in mind that this is only 2.6 degrees below the temperature where permanent brain damage or death can result — 107.6 degrees Fahrenheit.

We are not sure exactly how Emery suddenly became so violently ill.

One possibility, based on things Pete Peterson had told me, is that Emery was shot with an “ice dart” by one of the SUVs that went by, before grabbing his dog.

This might not feel like more than a bug bite, but it could easily be loaded with viruses or pathogens that could make you develop a sudden, huge fever.

Whoever did this may have ‘hoped’ that the added shock of having his dog stolen could further weaken his health and cause him to actually die.



The sad part is that even with all of this said, there are people who will deny, deny, deny that any of this actually happened.

Some, if not many of them will be paid Deep State trolls, who are probably told horrible lies about us to make them feel good about what they are doing.

For this same reason I told Emery that he needed to document his visit to the emergency room with as much photographic evidence as possible.

Too many people think this is all a game, just something to read about if it can hold their interest for a few minutes.

“They just made this all up. It’s all about Ego and Money.” 

This is the same thing I’ve heard for the entire 22 years I’ve been doing this. It never stops.

If Emery had a “big ego,” why did he absolutely refuse to come forward for ten years until he was threatened with imminent death?

No level of proof will stop the “paid trolls” from making such accusations, but my goal here is to reach the real people who might still be on the fence.



With that being said, here is some of the documentation we gathered from Emery’s visit to the Eisenhower Medical Center in Palm Springs.

In case anyone tries to question this aspect of the story, Eisenhower was the best emergency care he could find for the area.

As I said before, they were already at full capacity the night this happened, and wouldn’t admit him for seven more hours.

He ended up going back to a hotel to sleep, and returning after waking up around noon the next day — still very violently ill.

I was deeply concerned about all of this, but until he got healthier I did not want to tip off the adversary with any news that he was this unstable.

At one point the medical staff considered moving him to a more sophisticated hospital, but they were worried that if they moved him, he would die. Literally.

Here is a wider shot of Emery on the hospital bed, showing more of the equipment in the room:



This was the first shot he sent me, where it became very clear how sick he was:



I asked him to take a photo of his wristband, and here it is:



I also said it was important to get documentation on his symptoms and treatment.

This is a close-up showing he had a temperature of 103 at the time this was taken. At other times it had gone up to 105.

The Oxygen Saturation level was at 91, and had come up a point from 90, which is extremely dangerous.

This also shows the medications he was given for a shortness of breath — which he is still suffering from now:



Lastly, this is a full-page view of the same document that the above image was taken from:




As I was writing this update and had gotten to this point, Emery texted me and said his condition has worsened again… and he is going back in.

Even if you “don’t believe in this sort of thing,” please send Emery your thoughts and prayers for a full and fast recovery.

The best way to do this is to clear your mind, go into a relaxed and meditative state, and send him feelings of love and peace.

If you so choose, you can visualize him surrounded with white, healing light.

I feel it is very important that we do this. He might not be suffering from a normal flu. There could be something at work here that is harder to fight than normal.

I would only call for this in a genuine emergency, and this is it.

The only other thing I have to give you his “signature” at this point, since all of this is so new, is a brief clip from our first episode.

Nothing else is online yet. Gaia uploaded this to my YouTube account, since I granted them access, and made it live earlier today:




I am documenting what is happening to Emery because this is an incredibly brazen attack by the Deep State.

Let’s bear in mind that we have eyewitnesses to three black SUVs pulling up and grabbing his dog as it was walking around on its own, 50 yards away.

We also have proof that the dog Raven was found by a concerned citizen, which was miraculous in and of itself, and Emery was able to get her back.

Normally the Deep State would simply roll out a whole mess of “troll videos” trying to discredit Emery and make him look bad, for whatever reason.

By attacking him so forcefully and frontally, they are indeed making it very obvious that they are “on the ropes” and feeling threatened by this.

All it does is show us how very real all of this is. If Emery was “larping,” i.e. making it all up, I highly doubt any of this would have happened.

Additionally, Paypal locked up his account after only allowing a very small amount into his bank, citing a “fraud investigation.”

Furthermore, they are giving themselves three days — 72 hours — to complete the investigation, even after seeing my website.

So please, Paypal staff, bear in mind that we have a large audience and we really do want to help Emery Smith. There is no fraud going on here.



I feel confident that with your help, Emery is going to make it.

We already have taped enough from him that a Cabal hit would only make him even more of a hero. No one is stopping those 15 episodes from getting out.

We are taking multiple precautions to ensure his future safety. The power of our mass consciousness to affect his healing process cannot be undermined.

So again, please send Emery your thoughts, prayers and good wishes, and if you feel inclined to donate, now would be the time.

Our next update will go much more into Corey’s latest experiences with various ET groups, but it was important that we get this out first.

By the way, Corey’s Sphere Being Alliance website has been very severely hacked. That is obviously not an accident.

Additionally, just since I said I was about to do more YouTube videos, the entire service has been overwhelmed with tons of new, fake David Wilcock videos.

Clearly, “they” are doing everything they can to try to distract, divert and destroy our efforts.

With that being said, don’t lose track of the massive work we just released on Christmas Day about mass indictments and targeted arrests of the Deep State.



I was originally going to add this as an additional update to the last article. When I clicked to check on it, I had yet another three-digit synchronicity:



For me, that was another ‘sign’ that this really needed a full article all its own… well before I knew he would be going in again.

I do find it very upsetting that this is happening. This was not at all easy to write. That does not mean we are backing down.

I know that by pulling together as a team, we can surround Emery with protection and ensure his survival. Thank you for helping. We do appreciate it.


Personal and Global Attacks Become Lethal: Is the Disclosure War Reaching a Climax? [Part I]

Source: David Wilcock

Unprecedented solar emissions. Huge wildfires smoking out the US. Massive earthquakes. Three different monster hurricanes that steered perfectly into Houston, Florida and Puerto Rico.

Damages to the already fragile US economy could easily exceed 1 trillion dollars — at a time when there is nothing left to restore it with.

Within the UFO / Seeking Truth community, we saw the tragic deaths of Jim Marrs and William Tompkins — as well as the possible attempted murders of Graham Hancock and David Wilcock, as we will discuss in Part Two.

David’s insider ‘Paul’ had everything he owned stolen from him, as well as serious death threats. Pete Peterson’s house has now been emptied to the bare walls and his trailers, packed with priceless classified items, are under imminent threat.

A massive, coordinated online attack against Corey Goode, including the destruction of his business and the expected loss of his children, was intended to lead to a fake, staged ‘suicide’, made believable by his overall anticipated collapse.

This all occurred shortly after Ancient Aliens, a top History Channel show, featured Corey Goode and William Tompkins’ Secret Space Program testimony in an episode entitled “The Majestic Twelve”, which aired on July 7, 2017.

So much has happened since our last update a month ago that it is difficult to summarize everything. Are these events interconnected? The answer definitely appears to be yes.

Since I am still on vacation, we will break this up into two different parts in order to not create any further delays. We will start by “following the money.”





Let’s begin our investigation with a mental exercise.

Even if you have trouble with the idea of a Secret Space Program, or SSP, being real, let’s just imagine for a minute that it actually is true.

What would happen to our society if we were given absolute proof that the testimonies of the late William Tompkins and others such as Corey Goode, as presented in the “Majestic Twelve” episode of Ancient Aliens, were completely authentic?

The [MJ-12] episode also covers Project Horizon and other secret space bases, structures on Mars dubbed “ancient builder race” by astronauts, NASA hacks that say the MJ-12 and the space programs they helped start existed, Roswell and other UFO cases.


What if we discovered that countless trillions of dollars of our money, since as early as the 1950s, have been spent on developing vastly superior technology to anything we see today?

What if the scope, depth and sophistication of this build-out is vastly bigger than most of us could even imagine — and indeed extends throughout our solar system?



Let’s just say that the insiders are right… and these convenient, quick-sounding labels of words like “billion” and “trillion” have been used to obscure how much stuff could really be manufactured with this much money.

What if this money financed antigravity craft, massive bases on Mars, the Moon and other satellites in our solar system and beyond — some of which comfortably house hundreds of thousands of employees?

What if the full release of this technology would instantly propel us into a world of everyday space travel and interaction with countless different races of humanlike ETs?

What if the Cabal that planned and financed all of this was still clinging to power on earth, but was now threatened with complete exposure to the public?

And… what if an Alliance within the military, intelligence and governments themselves is threatening this Cabal with complete exposure if they do not surrender — and agree to tell us the truth?

That’s the world that some of us are living in — right on the front lines. This “shadow World War III” may very well be reaching a stunning conclusion in the near future.



The SSP narrative is so far removed from conventional reality that it seems almost impossible to imagine something like this ever becoming common, public knowledge.

However, anyone who has studied UFO lore has heard that the US government acquired craft with interstellar travel capabilities ever since the Roswell Crash of 1947.

Furthermore, it is considered common knowledge that these craft were “reverse engineered,” leading to working models being built out of them with our own technology.

It is commonly accepted by most open-minded investigators that such exotic aircraft have been tested in bases such as ‘Area 51,’ and are occasionally seen in our skies.

If we could cruise around our solar system within a few years after Roswell, that means our military-industrial complex has had nearly 70 years to establish manned bases out there.

The amount of money that has gone missing is vastly, vastly greater than what it would cost to build a fleet of reverse-engineered, advanced spacecraft.



I was an angst-ridden 12-year-old when the news about the Packard Commission came out in February 1986. It only made me even more convinced that our world was run by an evil Cabal.

This disclosure was extremely embarrassing to the military-industrial complex, as it revealed they were vastly overpaying for simple items like toilet seats — on a massive scale.

This revelation likely came from the same Alliance faction that had just started pushing the Iran-Contra scandal through a few months earlier, as of August 20th, 1985.

As I discuss in The Ascension Mysteries, Iran-Contra was very likely intended to end the Cabal — as it revealed treasonous collaboration with terrorists and cocaine dealers at the Presidential level.

By typing in “military hundred dollar toilet seats” into a search engine, it came up right away:




Take a look at what we hear in the original article from the New York Times:

Disclosures about the Defense Department paying hundreds of dollars for a hammer and hundreds more for a toilet seat have infuriated President Reagan, who has called the reports a ”constant drumbeat of propaganda” and not typical of the way the Government operates.

But that ”propaganda,” the President apparently forgot or did not know, originated with a commission on governmental efficiency for which he has been full of praise, the Grace Commission.


Reagan and his administration — many of the same people who became known as “Neocons” and are implicated in 9/11 — did not at all like these revelations.

Reagan attempted to defend them by calling this “propaganda” and acting as if it made him angry, rather than being interested in understanding why this was happening.



In this next article from the LA Times on July 30, 1986, the reviewer makes a joke early along, only to reveal this is how the US military really worked:

You may have read in the paper the other day that a division of Litton Industries and two of its former executives are accused of defrauding the government out of $6.3 million on military contracts.

According to the U.S. attorney, the company “grossly inflated prices intentionally” on about 45 contracts from 1975 to 1984.

It makes you wonder if all our weapons aren’t overpriced….


A handy book for any taxpayer is “The Pentagon Catalog” (Workman), which describes and shows diagrams of numerous pieces of military hardware that authors Christopher Cerf and Henry Beard describe as “ordinary products at extraordinary prices.”

They claim that their firm, Pentagon Products, can supply any of these items to anyone at the prices our military paid for them, and they boast, “We will not be oversold.”

Anyone who buys this paperback for $4.95 gets a $2,043 nut free.

The nut is glued to the inside of the back cover, in the upper right hand corner, and fits in a hole in the pages, so it goes through to the front.

This nut, which is described as “a plain round nut,” was made by McDonnell Douglas for the Navy at $2,043 each.


But, as the book points out, wouldn’t it be embarrassing if some big piece of equipment failed because of a spare part that cost only a few cents? We certainly don’t want to risk our airplanes by fitting them with cheap nuts.

The book also lists a claw hammer sold by Gould Simulation Systems to the Navy for $435. In the picture it looks like the kind you can buy at any hardware store for $10.

Comparatively reasonable is McDonnell Douglas’ price of only $37 for a screw. It appears in every respect to be an ordinary screw, but the book points out:

“The fact is, a screw this expensive simply cannot get lost! How many times have you had a screw roll off your worktable and disappear, then just casually reached for another one because the missing fastener was too cheap to hunt for?

“Lots of times, right? Well, you can bet your bottom dollar . . . that if one of our screws rolls into some dark corner, you’re going to conduct a full-scale search!”


Other items offered in the catalogue include:

  • a $285 screwdriver,
  • a $7,622 coffee maker,
  • a $387 flat washer,
  • a $469 wrench,
  • a $214 flashlight,
  • a $437 tape measure,
  • a $2,228 monkey wrench,
  • a $748 pair of duckbill pliers,
  • a $74,165 aluminum ladder,
  • a $659 ashtray and
  • a $240- million airplane.


Pentagon Products may be a fictional company, but these prices are not. They are documented.



In 2015, we found out that a single helmet for a fighter jet was supposedly worth 400 thousand dollars:

Would you pay $400,000 for a single helmet?  Of course you wouldn’t – but that is precisely what the U.S. government is doing.

Just the helmet for the pilot of the new F-35 Lightning II is going to cost taxpayers nearly half a million dollars.  And since we are going to need 2,400 of those helmets, the total bill is going to end up approaching a billion dollars.  But what is a billion dollars between friends, eh?

Sadly, our military has a very long history of wasting money like this. Back in the 1980s, the “six hundred dollar toilet seat” became quite famous.

Average Americans were absolutely outraged that the government was wasting so much of our hard-earned money, and promises were made that things would change.



Then in 2016, an expose’ from The Nation revealed even more examples in current times.

This journalist was able to track down 33 billion dollars in mysterious over-spending just on his own:

The latest revelations of waste at the Pentagon are just the most recent howlers in a long line of similar stories stretching back at least five decades.

Other hot-off-the-presses examples would include the Army’s purchase of helicopter gears worth $500 each for $8,000 each and the accumulation of billions of dollars’ worth of weapons components that will never be used….

Keep in mind that the above examples are just the tip of the tip of a titanic iceberg of military waste.

In a recent report I did for the Center for International Policy, identified 27 recent examples of such wasteful spending totaling over $33 billion. And that was no more than a sampling of everyday life in the 21st-century world of the Pentagon….


The first person to bring widespread public attention to the size and scope of the problem of Pentagon waste was Ernest Fitzgerald, an Air Force deputy for management systems.

In the late 1960s, he battled that service to bring to light massive cost overruns on Lockheed’s C-5A transport plane. He risked his job, and was ultimately fired, for uncovering $2 billion in excess expenditures on a plane [in late 1960s dollars]….

The C-5A fiasco, combined with Lockheed’s financial troubles with its L-1011 airliner project, led the company to approach Congress, hat in hand, for a $250 million government bailout….

In a time-tested lobbying technique that has been used by weapons makers ever since, Lockheed claimed that denying it loan guarantees would cost 34,000 jobs in 35 states, while undermining the Pentagon’s ability to prepare for the next war, whatever it might be.

The tactic worked like a charm….


By rewarding Lockheed Martin for its wasteful practices, Congress set a precedent that has never been superseded.

A present-day case in point is—speak of the devil—Lockheed Martin’s F-35 combat aircraft.

At $1.4 trillion in procurement and operating costs over its lifetime, it will be the most expensive weapons program ever undertaken by the Pentagon (or anyone else on planet Earth), and the warning signs are already in:

[There are] tens of billions of dollars in projected cost overruns and myriad performance problems before the F-35 is even out of its testing phase.



What if we learned that the US government created vast Ponzi schemes as fundraisers, where the actual costs of wars and the space race were much less than what was reported to the public?

[This is precisely what multiple insiders, who have proven their high-level credentials, have told us over the years. The Packard Commission was just a taste.]

What if these mega-fundraisers included the Korean War, the Vietnam War, the Apollo moon missions, the trillion-dollar fighter jets, the nuclear arms race and now the War on Terror?

Take a look at some figures anyone can obtain via internet search:




If you add up just the above, in conventional dollars, you have 341B + 770B + 110B + 5.48T + 2.1T, for a total of 8,801 billion, or 8.8 trillion dollars.

Then throw in the absolutely ridiculous figure of 1.4 trillion for the F-35, and you are now up to 10.2 trillion dollars.

Multiple insiders have risked their lives to reveal that these methods are used as a way of funneling vast amounts of money into secret projects.

Some of this money was obviously spent legitimately on these programs — but we are told that a significant majority of it was redirected elsewhere.

On a far more mundane level, when I was given a bribery and threat attempt on July 3rd, 2017, just four days before the MJ-12 episode aired, I was told I could sell something and be vastly overpaid for it.

I was told “This is how we do it. This is how we get money where it needs to go without it being anything easy to trace.”



Some of the articles we linked to above have some interesting facts worth exploring at this point.

Let’s take a look at our first example, from the hyper-expensive nuclear weapons program:

Nuclear weapons have cost the United States at least $5.48 trillion since 1940.

For most of that time neither Congress, the armed services nor the President had a clear idea what was being spent, according to a four-year study sponsored by the Brookings Institution….

The money spent on nuclear weapons, plus money for environmental cleanup, would buy 290 million automobiles, says an author of the study.

[The author’s name is] William J. Weida, a professor of economics at Colorado College in Colorado Springs and a former director of the Economic Policy and Analysis division of the Defense Department.



Just so we are clear, the current US population is about 324 million.

The money we have spent on nukes could buy a new car for almost every man, woman and child in America.

You could build an entire civilization for that kind of money.

How many nukes does the US now have to show for this astonishing 5.48 trillion-dollar expenditure? A mere 6,800 — and better yet, only 1800 of them are deployed:

As of July 8, the United States has 6,800 warheads, according to data from Hans Kristensen and Robert Norris at the Federation of American scientists.

2,800 of them are retired, 4,000 are stockpiled, and 1,800 are deployed. The total number of U.S. warheads is second only to Russia, which currently has 7,000 of them.


That would mean that each missile would theoretically cost as much in pure economic value as the manufacture of 42 thousand, 647 different automobiles.

That would add up to a price of over 805 million dollars per missile — a staggering number that approaches a billion dollars.

This is obviously approximate, but it at least puts us in the ballpark.



Granted, you also need a delivery system in order to make a missile, as this New York Times article suggests:


The cost includes money spent to invent them and produce them, build the missiles, bombers and submarines to deliver them and to defend against enemy nuclear attacks.


In total, we have:

  • The amount of raw materials and labor involved in the invention of the technology;
  • the mining of fissile fuel, with appropriate equipment and safety precautions;
  • the refining and machining of the materials to make the missile;
  • the costs of manufacturing a portion of the plane or sub that would deliver one missile, and:
  • the labor involved in the construction of one missile.

This combined cost for one missile should certainly be less than what it takes to develop over 42 THOUSAND different automobiles.

Once you consider that these glorified rockets could be a lot cheaper than we are being told, everything starts to make a lot more sense.


As this next quote reveals, Mercury cost 265 million per flight. Gemini cost 723 million per flight.

Yet, somehow, the price tag for each Apollo flight added up to 9,900 million bucks — or 9.9 billion dollars each.

How is it that we could successfully launch over 37 Mercury flights for the same money it cost to do one Apollo flight?

Mercury put astronauts into orbit around the earth for the first time. Gemini again put them in earth orbit, but included longer trips and spacewalks.

Is it really 37 times more expensive to send astronauts to the moon than it is to launch them into earth’s orbit and safely return them?

Here are the details if you want to read it for yourself:

Project Mercury spanned five years (1959–1963) and cost $277 million in 1965 dollars, which translate into $1.6 billion in 2010 dollars.

Since six Mercury piloted missions were flown, that amounted to $265 million per flight in today’s money.

As for Gemini, the program costs $1.3 billion in 1967 dollars during its six-year lifespan (1962–1967).

In today’s money, it would amount to $7.3 billion, or $723 millions for each of its 10 piloted missions. We thus could say that a Gemini mission cost twice as much as a Mercury’s.

As reported above, the Apollo program costs $20.4 billion if we simply added yearly spending of its 15 year-lifespan (1959–1973), or $109 billion in today’s money.

Since 11 Apollo piloted missions were flown, that amounts to $9.9 billion per flight.

That’s way over Mercury and Gemini mission costs, reflecting the complexity of going to the Moon.

And if we consider these $109 billion resulted in six lunar landings, each of these missions costs some $18 billion!



This writer naturally assumes the outrageously higher cost was simply due to “the complexity of going to the Moon” — but multiple insiders have risked their lives to say there is much more to it than that.

Let’s also not forget that each Mercury mission required a rocket to be launched. Just like a nuclear missile, which is also a rocket.

Nonetheless, a Mercury rocket only cost 265 million per flight, whereas a nuclear rocket supposedly costs over 805 million per unit — as we said above.

Once you get the basic design perfected, and know where to mine the fissile materials, should it really cost so much more to produce a nuke?



Numbers like “million,” “billion” and “trillion” get thrown around all the time, but do we really understand exactly how much we can build with this kind of money?

Most people have no idea. None whatsoever. This is the result of generations of mass-media brainwashing.

The numbers give us convenient labels to file everything away under a short sub-heading in our minds.

How many people could really even imagine the difference between having and spending 10 million, 100 million, 1000 million or 1,000,000 million?

Yet, this all-too-easily ignored figure of a trillion dollars is literally, again, one million, million dollars.



Let’s say you were lucky enough to get handed a trillion dollars. The only catch was that you actually had to spend it.

If you tried to spend one million, million dollars, you would probably run out of ideas pretty quickly after the first few million — perhaps 100M at the most.

“Nonsense, David, I’d start making hundred million-dollar movies!” Okay, great idea. Go “all in” at 100M per movie. Make it big.

In order to spend a trillion dollars you would need to personally produce ten thousand  of these Hollywood blockbusters.

If you could read and approve a 120-page script a day, every day of your life, it would take you 27.39 years to get through ten thousand of them.

Each of these films requires tens of thousands of highly skilled employees to work full time for several months at least.

Right now we are lucky to see ten movies of that caliber and price point per year, maybe 20 if you are very generous.

The amount of time and effort it would take to train enough people to even make, say, 50 films of this size and cost per year is astronomical.

It would take you 500 years at our current production speed to spend a trillion dollars by making 20 major blockbusters at 100M each per year.



Now we are starting to get a better sense of exactly how big a trillion dollars is. If Hollywood made 20 films at 100M each per year, it would take them 500 years to burn through a trillion dollars.

Each film requires the labor of armies of tens of thousands of people, extensive materials costs to build sets and props, and tons of computer power and time.

Our back-of-the-envelope calculation for the on-the-books costs of Korea, Vietnam, Apollo, the nuclear arms race, the F-35 and the War on Terror was 10.2 trillion dollars.

[UPDATE: That’s over 5000 years of hiring huge armies of people to make 20 top blockbuster films per year, at 100M per movie.

Not to mention technical breakthroughs would probably bring the costs way down and allow you to make many more at the same price.]

This doesn’t even begin to cover the money that is just flat-out missing.

What if US Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld announced that 2.3 trillion dollars was “missing” from the US defense budget on the day before 9/11?

What if the total amount of “missing” money, in addition to the 10.2 trillion already mentioned and other fundraising methods, is now 6.5 trillion dollars as of August 2016?

A relatively obscure audit report from the Office of Inspector General of the United States Department of Defensesuddenly is getting a lot of attention for what it apparently reveals: The Pentagon can’t account for $6.5 trillion.

At ArmstrongEconomics, the blog reported, “Once again, the office of inspector general has come up with a huge hole in the Department of Defense with a missing $6.5 trillion.”

The day before 9/11, Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld admitted $2.3 trillion was missing from the Defense Department budget, noted the blog.

That figure has now grown to $6.5 trillion and counting.



Now we’ve looked at 10.2 trillion spent on a handful of wars, a fighter jet and a space program with six moonwalks, and another 6.5 trillion that is “missing.”

The US military budget has been approaching a trillion dollars a year in total spending for the last decade, as you can see here — even though we went through a crippling financial crisis in 2008.

The numbers in this diagram are in billions:




For all the fear-mongering we hear in the media about China and Russia, the article that features this budget breakdown also shows how absurdly high this figure really is:

U.S. military spending is its largest expenditure after Social Security benefits. It’s greater than those of the next 10 largest government expenditures combined.

It’s four times more than China’s military budget of $216 billion. It’s almost 10 times bigger than Russia’s budget of just $84.5 billion.

It’s difficult to reduce the budget deficit, and the almost $20 trillion debt, without cutting defense spending.


We are being told by the media that Russia is this terrifying adversary, as if the Cold War is back on again. Yet the US has ten times more military cash than they do.

China is supposed to be an even bigger and scarier villain. The US has 400 percent more military spending than they do.

What the heck is going on here?



The entire world is teetering on the brink of bankruptcy. All the money is gone. The US alone is nearly 20 trillion dollars in debt, as you just read.

The Cabal’s own “Too Big to Fail” mega-corporate banks didn’t have anything left in 2008, and needed a 29 trillion-dollar bailout, as we revealed in Financial Tyranny.

Yet, in practical terms, this makes no sense. All that money had to go somewhere. 29 trillion is nearly half of the entire wealth of the planet in a given year, as measured in world GDP.

If you play “follow the money,” the obvious answer to the problem is that they had to spend it on something.



If we assume that wealthy elites stole this money and spent it, what could they have bought with it?

You may have imagined them dining on caviar and fine steak, washing it down with a 400-dollar bottle of Dom Perignon champagne on their private jets.

They might have fleets of Bentleys waiting in the garages of a few different mega-mansions around the world, and towering yachts in the harbor.

The costs of these luxuries are much less than the ten trillion in assets held by the top 92,000 people, who represent the .001%.

If each one of them had exactly the same amount of money, which is highly unlikely, it would amount to 108 million, 698 thousand dollars and change.

A private jet ‘only’ costs a maximum of 4 million a year.



Sprawling mansions owned by the top celebrities typically weigh in at 10 to 20 million. The most expensive cars still only cost 1/10th of a million, except for certain very rare examples.



Yachts are where things can get ridiculous.

There aren’t enough super-yachts for all 92,000 of the 0.001 percent to have one, but if there were, they could spend all they have trying to get one and go broke, since they are 275M each.



Forbes was only able to identify 125 super-yacht owners enough to know their nationalities, though they also say 355 of them were sold in 2013, totaling 3.5 billion.

How many super-yachts at 275 million could you buy with ten trillion dollars? That’s 36 thousand, 363 — vastly greater than the number known to exist.



The top 92,000 individuals alone possess 10 trillion. However, the total number socked away by the super-rich is as much as a staggering 32 trillion dollars:

In July of 2012, James Henry, a former chief economist at McKinsey, a major global consultancy, published a major report on tax havens for the Tax Justice Network.

[He] compiled data from the Bank for International Settlements (BIS), the IMF and other private sector entities to reveal that the world’s super-rich have hidden between $21 and $32 trillion offshore to avoid taxation….

With roughly half of the world’s offshore wealth, or some $10 trillion, belonging to 92,000 of the planet’s richest individuals — representing not the top 1% but the top 0.001% — we see a far more extreme global disparity taking shape than the one invoked by the Occupy movement.



Now let’s take a look at the combined wealth of entire nations as it stands today in 2017, based on GDP, or Gross Domestic Product.

What you are seeing here is that the total value of the US is 19.4 trillion, China is 11.7 trillion, Japan is 4.8 trillion, and so on:


Everyone is talking about how wealthy China is. They are buying up everything in sight, going through a massive construction boom, you name it.

Yet, as you can see here, their combined GDP for 2017 is $11.79 trillion.

This is just a bit higher than what the top 92,000 people have stuffed under the couch.

How much could you actually do with 11.79 trillion? Let’s take a quick look at China and find out.



Just some of China’s 11.79 trillion per year has been allocated to the construction of utterly vast, creepy “Ghost Cities” that no one is even living in.

Here is one article about this from the February 2016 issue of Wired Magazine, complete with stunning photographic documentation:

The Kangbashi district of Ordos, China is a marvel of urban planning, 137-square miles of shining towers, futuristic architecture and pristine parks carved out of the grassland of Inner Mongolia.

It is a thoroughly modern city, but for one thing: No one lives there.

Well, almost nobody. Kangbashi is one of hundreds of sparkling new cities sitting relatively empty throughout China.

[They have been] built by a government eager to urbanize the country but shunned by people unable to afford it or hesitant to leave the rural communities they know.

Chicago photographer Kai Caemmerer visited Kangbashi and two other cities for his ongoing series Unborn Cities.

The photos capture the eerie sensation of standing on a silent street surrounded by empty skyscrapers and public spaces devoid of life.



In April 2017, China announced the construction of yet another city, which would soon expand to literally being three times the size of New York:

Plans for the Xiongan New Area, a special economic zone that authorities say will eventually cover an area nearly three times that of New York, were announced by the Communist party’s top leaders on Saturday with a flurry of government propaganda….

Official news agency Xinhua said Xiongan’s creation would reduce pressure on China’s car-clogged, 22 million-resident capital, and “usher in a new chapter in the country’s historic transitioning to coordinated, inclusive and sustainable growth”….

China has created dozens of “new areas” in recent years as part of a massive urbanisation drive that has seen hundreds of millions of people pour into its cities.

Critics say many have become ghost towns but in a recent interview Wade Shepard, the author of a book on the phenomenon, said some were now beginning to take off.



Even though China already has a total of 650 established cities, they intend to use part of this 11.79 trillion per year to build an additional 285 of them.

This, of course, means that one of the most highly populated countries in the world is literally about to double the size of their cities with the money they already have.

11.79 trillion per year is more than enough to do this:

Two hundred and eighty-five. That’s the number of new purpose-built eco-cities that China claims to be developing.

This is not a joke or an ironic jest… This is a very real development that is taking place in a China that is attempting to rapidly transition and stabilize on many fronts…

In a country that has roughly 650 established cities, the impact of this eco-city building bonanza could be drastic — even if only a modest portion of them are ever actually completed and populated….

This is a country that has urbanized faster and more extensively than any other country in history — by far.

Since 1949, when the Communist Party first came to power, China created (or designated) over 600 new cities.

In the past three decades alone, the country has urbanized more people than the entire population of the United States.

By 2030, [China] expects to have over a billion urban dwellers — which means an Estonia-size population chunk is going to have to urbanize each month (yes, month).


Remember — all of these expenses are in excess of China’s yearly military budget of 216 billion, which is only 0.2 trillion dollars.



Now maybe you have a better idea of what it means when 92,000 people have socked away ten trillion dollars.

Forget about 92,000 private jets, five mansions per person, five Bentleys per person, and so on.

Look at what China is doing with a similar amount of money in any given year.

We are literally talking about enough money for the .001 percent to build entire countries — entire civilizations — if they had the land and raw materials to do so.

And that may well be the point.

The hidden cities we are looking for do indeed exist, according to brave insiders — one of whom just died at a very suspicious time.

The cities are either underground or off-planet. It is as simple as that.

Yet, for some reason, the idea that we have been lied to about something this massive in size seems to defy people’s emotional threshold completely.



Adolf Hitler spoke about the value of telling a “big lie” in Mein Kampf, and this idea should be kept at the forefront of our awareness as we survey this concept.

This quote comes from the Jewish Virtual Library website, where it is presented for our consideration. I have bolded certain passages for emphasis:

In the big lie there is always a certain force of credibility; because the broad masses of a nation are always more easily corrupted in the deeper strata of their emotional nature than consciously or voluntarily.

And thus in the primitive simplicity of their minds they more readily fall victims to the big lie than the small lie, since they themselves often tell small lies in little matters but would be ashamed to resort to large-scale falsehoods.

It would never come into their heads to fabricate colossal untruths, and they would not believe that others could have the impudence to distort the truth so infamously.

Even though the facts which prove this [colossal lie] to be so may be brought clearly to their minds, they will still doubt and waver and will continue to think that there may be some other explanation.

For the grossly impudent lie always leaves traces behind it, even after it has been nailed down, a fact which is known to all expert liars in this world and to all who conspire together in the art of lying.    — Adolf Hitler



You’ve just read a quote from Hitler’s manifesto that precisely explains what is going on right now. It has often been shortened and paraphrased.

Simply put, if the Powers that Were tell a big enough lie, most people simply could not believe that it could be true.

The people have, as he put it, “primitive simplicity in their minds” where they could never handle telling such a “colossal untruth” within their own personal lives.

For this same reason, they couldn’t imagine anyone else telling a lie of such colossal magnitude either.

Even when the “broad masses of a nation” see irrefutable evidence that this “big lie” is real, “they will still doubt and waver… and think that there may be some other explanation.”

Cue the invariable cry of the skeptic:

“That would never happen to ME! I am Highly Intelligent! There Is No Scientific Evidence! You Have a Huge Ego and Are Writing This Only to Make Money!”

Yep. So why don’t you stop reading and go do something else? Don’t waste one precious minute of your resources on something you know is not true.



In conclusion, we have shown ample evidence of awesome military over-spending, documented for generations now.

China has just over half the yearly GDP of the US, and yet they are on a building spree unlike anything the world has ever seen.

My point is simple: All the tools are there to see that the military-industrial complex, or MIC, could be experiencing an even bigger construction binge.

Opulent cities large enough to house millions of people can be built, and have been built, with that level of cash. We just haven’t been allowed to see them. Yet.

On the face of it, you might think the idea of a Secret Space Program is ridiculous.

However, there is no denying that powerful people are trying to assassinate Corey Goode and me both — as well as others in our field.



Just after I wrote the last article, William Tompkins died — and he was our valuable eyewitness to the US’s discovery of the Nazi SSP in WWII.

He revealed that the Nazis had cut a deal with sinister reptilian ETs many insiders call the Draco.

They were also called “Saurian Men,” and were described with the code name “S-M” by insiders who wrote notes on Carlos Allende’s copy of Morris K. Jessup’s “The Case for the UFO.”

Read this article on Mysterious Universe to get a good overview of this very strange ‘leak’ from the MIC that emerged back in 1957, as notes added to Jessup’s book.

Tompkins also was instrumental in designing prototypes for massive “space submarines” that became part of the Solar Warden program Corey was involved in.

Even stranger was that Bill died just hours before the total solar eclipse — which is in keeping with the Cabal’s method of doing ceremonial assassinations.

Graham Hancock nearly died the week before, as we will discuss. This happened within days of when the brakes went out on my car.

Graham is the world’s leading expert on ancient civilizations, and has already linked the Giza monuments to what we see on Mars in The Mars Mystery.




Pete Peterson recently validated much of Goode and Tompkins on Cosmic Disclosure. This is a show I host on Gaia, the “Netflix of Seeking Truth.”

The corroboration of their testimonies is absolutely stunning. This goes far, far beyond the possibility of anyone creating such an interconnected set of lies.

You can go here and see all 8000-plus titles on Gaia, pay only 99 cents for the first month, and cancel without penalty if you don’t like it.

When we last checked in, Pete was under threat of having everything stolen. Day after day we have watched this continue. Nothing has been able to stop it.

Pete has now had his house emptied to the bare walls by agents of the bank. The current sheriff has nothing to do with this operation and is innocent.

My insider friend ‘Paul,’ who personally autopsied about 2000 different types of ET corpses, and had been working closely with me, also lost everything he owned.

This event occurred only three days after I leaked his new testimony about the “Zombie Program,” using advanced cloning technology, on August 14th.

More on this in Part Two. They even left a bullet on the countertop in an otherwise emptied-out house to send him a message.

They drilled holes all over the place in his walls to find possible secrets hidden in there — and did in fact get a box containing priceless computer files.



The point is, someone absolutely does not want us doing what we are doing.

I recommend reading all three of the previous updates to really understand the scope and depth of this story, if you haven’t already done so:


UPDATE ONE: Why David Needed a Time-Out

UPDATE TWO: David’s Brakes Sabotaged

UPDATE THREE: Dark Alliance Mega-Attack Repelled… For Now


Graham Hancock’s brush with death happened at exactly the same time that Pete’s house started to be emptied out — just days after the brakes went out on my car.

Tompkins died almost immediately after I wrote Update Three — just hours before a total solar eclipse over America.

Jim Marrs, the world’s leading JFK expert, had died not that long before all these events started.

Corey Goode has just navigated another very serious threat while he was in Spain, which we may or may not even be authorized to discuss in any detail.



You stepped up marvelously to help Pete rebuild from this devastating loss, for which I greatly appreciate your help.

So far we have raised over 53 thousand dollars to help him rebuild. This was a stunning demonstration of public support:



Pete will be making a public statement thanking you for your amazing generosity in the near future. I will probably bring him on the radio.

He is using the money to finance the construction of a new lab, so his valuable technical work can continue forward.

The bank has now stolen and destroyed over 2 million dollars worth of belongings for a house that was only worth about 300K.

They have completely broken the law by failing to move the items to a storage facility that we could then reimburse them for, and recover the valuables.

The items have been thrown in the dump, driven over by bulldozers, and then covered with wet garbage, followed by dry garbage, so they can never be found.

We are trying to file motions to have this elevated to a criminal charge and I will keep you posted.



Given the active threat I and others now face, I don’t expect to wait that long to write Part Two. Stay tuned.

Despite the level of threat going on, I am very excited about the possibility that this could mean disclosure is imminent — and will be much bigger than we thought.



I just came back here to make a final round of editorial tweaks. I uploaded them, refreshed the page, and bam — 6066 views.

The “666” obviously is the number from the Book of Revelation regarding the Antichrist.

What we are seeing in this investigation matches the Bible prophecies very nicely.



As I have said many times, this happens without any conscious effort.

It continues to be an indication that positive forces out there have our backs.

There is much more to share in Part Two.

The Cabal is obviously very vulnerable right now if they are conducting so many obvious acts of desperation.

Things have gotten really serious with the acceleration of earth changes. This is a call for each one of us to step up and defend ourselves and our planet.



I posted this update, re-read the whole article from the beginning, got to the end and hit Refresh. Boom — there it was again! 7770.



I’ve always seen 777 as a nice counter-balance to 666 in numerology so this was particularly significant to me. No effort required — it just works.

Let’s just say that if all the dreams and briefings are real, we could soon be in for the most astonishing “mass awakening” in recorded history.

Financial Tyranny

FINAL VERSION 2/9! A 122-nation alliance is backing a lawsuit that could free the Earth from financial tyranny. This investigation reveals who the perpetrators are and what we can do to solve the problem.

[Note: The most recent updates to these first six sections were posted on Sunday, January 29th. The remaining four sections had to be published separately, due to size constraints on our database.

Please Note: You may quote excerpts from this investigation and republish them in your blog, but please do not re-post the entire investigation, as additional updates and ‘tweaks’ may be necessary. Instead, please link your readers back to the original. Thanks!]


2012 has begun as a year of rampant paranoia and hopelessness on the Internet and throughout mainstream media.
The economy appears to be in a dire predicament — ready to go over a cliff into an abyss few can even allow themselves to consider.

The Euro has been teetering on the brink of total collapse. A frantic bailout of the entire European Union, proposed by the Federal Reserve, has done very little to relieve the fears of the public.

On December 19th, 2011, Britain announced they will refuse to participate in this bailout — showing how tense and uncertain the situation really is.

Simultaneously, very aggressive and blatant moves are being made to start World War III in the Middle East — with imminent, ever-increasing threats from Israel and the United States to attack Iran.

Since 9/11, Americans and much of the Western world have been led to believe that the biggest enemy they face is terrorism from Islamic extremists. Nonetheless, there is now overwhelming, undeniable evidence that the true enemy… is within.

You are about to read a comprehensive investigation summarizing all the best information I have gathered about the true nature of this crisis since I became directly aware of it, twenty years ago — in 1992.

Very few people are aware that a massive 122-nation coalition has formed to solve the problem — just in the nick of time – and they are backing a legal, public solution to end Financial Tyranny.


A trillion-dollar lawsuit was filed as of November 23, 2011 — and the resulting investigation will provide a rock-solid legal framework to reveal the full nature of the problems we face… and arrest those responsible:

Bear in mind that the evidence backing this lawsuit, if made public, will completely expose what has been going on at the highest levels — by the people themselves, speaking in their own words.
This would be the most dramatic public expose’ of the group responsible for this Financial Tyranny since the early 1800s — as you will see.

Our initial announcement and confirmation of this lawsuit has already received over 650,000 hits, 34,000 Facebook Likes and 1000 written comments as we publish this final, completed investigation.

This initial announcement also earned me a very serious warning — from two different insiders working at high levels of government — that I needed to publish the entire investigation as quickly as possible, or my life could be in imminent danger.

The conspirators are desperate to stop the bleeding and save themselves from prosecution. Threats, bribery, blackmail, torture and murder are their standard tools of the trade.

As you will see, on December 31st, David Hutzler publicly conveyed vital information to me for this case, acting directly on behalf of Benjamin Fulford — the former Asia-Pacific bureau chief for Forbes Magazine, and a leading representative of this international alliance.

Ben had David direct me to the “Unwanted Publicity Intelligence” website, which contains extremely sensitive documents. I was astonished when I reviewed this website, considering that I was told it is lethally dangerous to publish pictures of the Federal Reserve bonds we will be discussing.

A week later, on January 6th, David and his eight-year-old son Mackie burned to death in their home. Hardly anything recognizable was left. Accelerants were found outside and arson has not been ruled out.
Just as we were preparing to publish the final version of this investigation, we discovered startling new news.
Autopsies revealed that David Hutzler and his son both died of gunshot wounds — not fire.
MARTINSBURG – The bodies of a father and son discovered after a fire in Glengary last month were found to have gunshot wounds, and an investigation has determined that the blaze was intentionally set, officials confirmed for the first time Monday.

The bodies of 56-year-old David Cole Hutzler and his son, 9-year-old James Hutzler, were discovered Jan. 6 after a fire at 436 Apple Harvest Drive in Berkeley County near the Virginia state line. Both victims were found in the mobile home’s rear bedroom.
“I can confirm for you that the fire was intentionally set,” Assistant West Virginia State Fire Marshal Patrick Barker, who investigated the fire, said Monday.

Meanwhile, West Virginia State Trooper J.D. Brand, who is one of the officers leading the investigation into the deaths, confirmed reports that both victims had gunshot wounds. He told a reporter Monday that the incident is now being considered a homicide investigation.

We all knew and loved “Hutz” on Benjamin Fulford’s forum. He participated frequently and really wanted to make a difference in this world. His comments were funny and insightful. He loved my work and believed in what I’m doing.
He was one of those people who had “the burden of wisdom” — the knowledge of the degree of harm that is being done in this world by Financial Tyranny.

Friends of his have spoken to me personally and said how dearly he loved his son. He would have done anything for Mackie.

Hutz knew from Fulford that we were very close to some major changes in the world — which were extremely positive. That’s why he forwarded me the links to this damning evidence on Ben’s behalf.

All that being said, the police are literally expecting us to believe that he shot Mackie, lit his own home on fire with gasoline well enough to burn it beyond all recognition, and then went back and shot himself — in the same room where Mackie was.

“We believe he took the life of his son and then set the fires and than took his own life,” says Trooper Brand.

From the investigation and talking to people close to the victims the lead investigator, Trooper Brand says the father had a history of making remarks that seemed questionable and unstable.

“Spoke to a number of people that new the victims quite well. Received several accounts of the victim making suicidal comments and also several indicators that over the past couple years he had become mentally unstable,” says Trooper Brand.

Trooper Brand says unless any new information is found, their investigation is complete.

If you start learning the truth about Financial Tyranny, you will naturally be branded as making “questionable remarks” that seem “mentally unstable” by people who are unaware of the things you are about to read.

Given the fact that this one legal case could single-handedly destroy a conspiracy for global financial tyranny that goes back at least 300 years, do you really think this cover story is true?

If you’re suicidal enough to kill your own son and kill yourself, why would you be so concerned about trying to destroy all the evidence?

Out of fear, skeptics will insist there is no connection between this bizarre double murder and the damning information Hutz passed along to me. I disagree.

Even in light of this blatant threat, I will not be intimidated. This tragic event only inspired me to do an even better job with the investigation.

You deserve to know the truth.

Our future depends on it.


Up until now, the only mainstream media outlet that has dared to report on this intriguingly vast and mysterious case is the Courthouse News Service:
The “back story” behind this lawsuit is extremely complex. Since November 23rd, 2011, I have worked an average of 14 or more hours a day to produce this report.

Furthermore, the core information pertaining to the case itself is cloaked in the deepest secrecy. Much of it must be obtained firsthand — from people who have to risk their lives to tell the truth.

Wherever possible, I have drawn off of provable information. When this was unavailable, I relied as much as possible on “leaked” insider testimony that is already well-established on public record to reveal the story. The works of David Guyatt — at — have been uniquely beneficial in this regard.

In addition to the above investigative methods, you will also read the world’s first exclusive, detailed interview with the two main plaintiffs responsible for filing this lawsuit — explaining what they are doing and why it is so urgently needed.
First, however, we need to break down the lies and reveal the full scope of the problem – relying upon provable facts, documented in the public domain, as much as possible.


Since 1913, the currency of the United States has been owned and managed by a private corporation of international bankers known as the “Federal Reserve System.”

This group prints “Federal Reserve Notes” and loans them out to the United States Treasury. American taxpayers then pay interest to the Federal Reserve banking families for the rights to use their money.

The Federal Reserve banking families can therefore print as much money as they want — and give it to whomever they want, secretly, with no oversight or input from the United States government.

In this clip, former Federal Reserve chairman Alan Greenspan admits that the Federal Reserve is an independent agency whose decisions cannot be overruled by any element of the legitimate United States government.

“REPORTER: What is the proper relationship… what should be the proper relationship between a chairman of the Fed and a president of the United States?

GREENSPAN: Well, first of all, the Federal Reserve is an independent agency. And that means basically that, uh, there is no other agency of government which can overrule actions that we take. 

So long as that is in place, and there is no evidence that the administration, the Congress or anybody else is requesting that we do things other than what we think is the appropriate thing, then what the relationships are don’t frankly matter.

I’ve had very good relationships with presidents.”


Twenty. Six. TRILLION. Dollars.

This is a very difficult number to comprehend — but we do now have a way to wrap our minds around it.

At his website, Los Angeles-based 3D designer Oto Godfrey has created an incredibly powerful series of images to help us actually visualize this much money — in stacks of 100-dollar bills.

Before you see it, try to stop for a minute and think what it will look like. How many stacks do you think there are? How big do you think they will be? I was quite surprised when I saw it for myself.

The website goes into more detail about each category — so I recommend going there and checking it out, and supporting Oto Godfrey’s amazing work.

100 Dollars
Ten Thousand Dollars
One Million Dollars
One Hundred Million Dollars
One Billion Dollars
One Trillion Dollars
One Trillion Dollars
Fifteen Trillion Dollars
Fifteen trillion dollars — or one year’s worth of the US National Debt — is a stack of money that is longer and wider than a football field… and over 2/3rds the height of the Statue of Liberty.

If you add another 11 Trillion to get our total of 26 Trillion, that same stack will now be taller than the Statue of Liberty.
This monstrous mass of paper would look as if a gigantic Borg Cube had completely invaded an entire football stadium — past the ceiling.

Here is a small part of the letter where Congressman Alan Grayson reveals how he found this number, in the newly-audited Federal Reserve balance sheets, to John Hively — “The World’s Most Accurate Economic Forecaster Since 1989”.
CONGRESSMAN GRAYSON: I wouldn’t want anyone to think that I’m dramatizing or amplifying what this GAO report says, so I’m just going to list some of my favorite parts, by page number.

Page 131 – The total lending for the Fed’s “broad-based emergency programs” was $16,115,000,000,000. That’s right, more than $16 trillion. The four largest recipients, Citigroup, Morgan Stanley, Merrill Lynch and Bank of America, received more than a trillion dollars each.

The 5th largest recipient was Barclays PLC. The 8th was the Royal Bank of Scotland Group, PLC. The 9th was Deutsche Bank AG. The 10th was UBS AG. These four institutions each got between a quarter of a trillion and a trillion dollars. None of them is an American bank.

Page 205 – Separate and apart from these “broad-based emergency program” loans were another $10,057,000,000,000 in “currency swaps.” In the “currency swaps,” the Fed handed dollars to foreign central banks, no strings attached, to fund bailouts in other countries….

These currency swaps and the “broad-based emergency program” loans, together, totaled more than $26 trillion. That’s almost $100,000 for every man, woman, and child in America.

That’s an amount equal to more than seven years of federal spending — on the military, Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, interest on the debt, and everything else. And around twice America’s total GNP….

If the Fed had extended $26 trillion in credit to the American people instead of Wall Street, would there be 24 million Americans today who can’t find a full-time job?


Does this upset you? Or have you become so numb that you just want to click away and look at hot models – or read about celebrities? “I don’t want to hear this $#!+. My life is bad enough as it is.”

26 Trillion is a gigantic number. Seemingly unimaginable.

This is a documented, proven fact. Isn’t it strange that you’ve hardly heard anything about this in the mainstream media?

That should be your first clue. Knowledge is power. Instead of feeling sick, angry, paranoid, sad or depressed, be aware that once you know the truth, nothing can stop us.

There will be losses. David and Mackie Hutzler may be two of the most recent ones. However, once a “critical mass” of people possess sensitive information, there is simply no possible way to stop it from spreading.

Most people can’t even comprehend such a vast amount of money as 26 Trillion dollars in practical terms – but we’ll get to that.

At first, the most obvious number that jumped out from the report was “only” 16 trillion. You have to add in the ten trillion in “currency swaps” to reach the full 26-trillion-dollar mark.


Let’s stick with the initial figure of 16 trillion for now, as there are very few articles on this subject – and most of them quote that number.

This next article from clearly reveals the scope of the outrage:

The results of the first audit in the Federal Reserve’s nearly 100-year history were posted on Senator Sanders’ webpage earlier this morning:

What was revealed in the audit was startling: $16,000,000,000,000.00 had been secretly given out to US banks and corporations, and foreign banks everywhere from France to Scotland.

From the period between December 2007 and June 2010, the Federal Reserve secretly bailed out many of the world’s banks, corporations, and governments.

The Federal Reserve likes to refer to these secret bailouts as an all-inclusive loan program, but virtually none of the money has been returned — and it was loaned out at 0% interest.

Why the Federal Reserve had never been public about this or even informed the United States Congress about the $16 trillion dollar bailout is obvious.

The American public would have been outraged to find out that the Federal Reserve bailed out foreign banks while Americans were struggling to find jobs.


So how much could this figure of 16 trillion dollars have done if it were redirected into the United States economy, on behalf of the people — rather than rewarding the banks and financial institutions who started all this mess in the first place?
Let’s continue with the article from and find out:

To place $16 trillion into perspective, remember that the GDP of the United States is only $14.12 trillion.
The entire national debt of the United States government spanning its 200+ year history is “only” $14.5 trillion.

The budget that is being debated so heavily in Congress and the Senate is “only” $3.5 trillion.
Take all of the outrage and debate over the $1.5 trillion deficit into consideration, and swallow this Red pill:There was no debate about whether $16,000,000,000,000 would be given to failing banks and failing corporations around the world.

In late 2008, the TARP Bailout bill was passed — and loans of $800 billion were given to failing banks and companies. That was a blatant lie — considering the fact that Goldman Sachs alone received 814 billion dollars.
As it turns out, the Federal Reserve donated $2.5 trillion to Citigroup, while Morgan Stanley received $2.04 trillion. The Royal Bank of Scotland and Deutsche Bank, a German bank, split about a trillion and numerous other banks received hefty chunks of the $16 trillion.


The initial figure of 16 trillion that jumped out of the Federal Reserve audit is more money than all the goods and services produced by every single person in the United States — for any given year.

It is greater than the entire amount of debt ever racked up by the United States in its 235-year history as well.

The 2010 Census estimated there are 114,825,428 households in the US. Sixteen trillion dollars in secret bailouts adds up to 139 thousand and 342 dollars per household.

The full figure of 26 trillion adds up to nearly a quarter million dollars per household – $226,430.68 to be exact.
When you put it in those terms, the full weight of the theft becomes nothing short of staggering.

Imagine if your family had a quarter million dollars saved — and then someone robbed you. What if the thief then told everyone what he did – but no one cared enough to do anything?

That’s what just happened to every single family in the United States of America.

Every single adult in the United States who was unemployed or on public assistance could have been given a job – so they can lead a happy, fulfilling and prosperous life – with plenty of money to spare.

A vast public works program could easily have been created to stimulate the economy – so that the money would become an investment, not a one-time gift.


We could have built high-speed bullet trains to make it easier and faster than flying to travel through congested urban areas — such as the East Coast megalopolis — and other corridors between nearby cities.

We could have restored our archaic, battered fleet of passenger airliners, (which still have ashtrays in the bathrooms,) with all new jets – and bigger, more comfortable seats. (Many flights are delayed or canceled for maintenance. This is a consistent problem when I fly.)

We could have restored our crumbling roads and bridges – increasing comfort, safety and gas mileage.

We could have transformed the inner cities with massive construction and refurbishing projects, and dramatically improved public transportation – making it easier for people to work.

We could have massively upgraded the nation’s fiber-optic capabilities – bringing our Internet access up to speed with most of the rest of the developed world.

We could have completely modernized public schools with enough computers for every kid.

We could have trained or hired teachers to educate our children in the skills and software needed to be competitive in today’s evolving workforce – including touch typing, word processing, spreadsheet, Photoshop, web design, video editing, motion graphics, computer animation and music sequencing.

We could have noticed the enormous popularity of Guitar Hero and RockBand and built sound-proofed music studios in schools, where kids earn lessons and studio time on real musical instruments as an incentive for good grades. If they sign a record deal, a figure such as 25 percent of their advance would be paid back to help finance the school.

We could have boldly invested in clean energy technologies to heal the environment – as China is now doing, to the tune of half a trillion dollars.

And, as Foster Gamble revealed in his groundbreaking independent film Thrive, we could have ended poverty and environmental destruction for as little as 200 billion dollars a year.

Instead of doing any of this, the “one percent” continued to live the lifestyles of the rich and famous — while the poor sank ever deeper into the Next Great Depression, as economist Paul Krugman recently called it.


In early November, Congressman Bernie Sanders revealed that in addition to handing out 16 trillion dollars, (not counting the ten trillion in “currency swaps” Congressman Grayson pointed out), the Federal Reserve also owns the financial agencies they are supposed to be regulating:

The GAO [audit] also revealed that many of the people who serve as directors of the 12 Federal Reserve Banks come from the exact same financial institutions that the Fed is in charge of regulating.

Further, the GAO found that at least 18 current and former Fed board members were affiliated with banks and companies that received emergency loans from the Federal Reserve during the financial crisis.

In other words, the people “regulating” the banks were the exact same people who were being “regulated.”Talk about the fox guarding the henhouse!…

For example, the CEO of JP Morgan Chase served on the New York Fed’s board of directors at the same time that his bank received more than $390 billion in financial assistance from the Fed….

Getting this type of disclosure was not easy. Wall Street and the Federal Reserve fought it every step of the way.

But, as difficult as it was to lift the veil of secrecy at the Fed, it will be even harder to reform the Fed so that it serves the needs of all Americans, and not just Wall Street. But, that is exactly what we have to do.
So far, we’ve seen that the Federal Reserve secretly created 26 trillion dollars, without US government approval. This adds up to nearly a quarter million dollars per household in America.

This money was then handed out to financial institutions like Goldman Sachs, Citigroup, Bank of America, JP Morgan Chase, Morgan Stanley, the Royal Bank of Scotland and Deutsche Bank.

While I was conducting this investigation in mid-December, it felt very surreal to see mainstream media journalists say the entire bailout added up to nothing more than 1.2 trillion dollars. Then they tried to say “this is what a central bank is supposed to do.”

Add up the emergency loans the Federal Reserve distributed to banks between 2007 and 2009 — when the American economy lurched closer to collapse than anyone had previously thought possible — and it’s an impressive picture.

On Friday, Bloomberg News made available the fullest version yet of its data on Fed emergency lending, a subject the news organization has written about numerous times in the past year. The Bloomberg release includes records of about 50,000 transactions the Fed made through seven different financial mechanisms.

At their peak, these seven programs represented $1.2 trillion in loans to banks and financial institutions — the high-water mark of a massive, systemic bailout whose details the country’s central banking authority has not always seemed eager to divulge….

Even as critics have accused the Fed of being less than forthcoming, few people claim that the central bank did the wrong thing by stepping in to backstop a financial system that seemed to be on the verge of imploding.
“In the middle of the financial crisis, this is what you need. This is what a central bank is supposed to do,” said James Wilcox, a professor at the Haas School of Business at the University of California, Berkeley.
Wilcox compared the financial crisis to a forest fire — except, he said, “forest fires are more predictable in the path they’re going to take.”

The Huffington Post featured the genuine figures earlier, as we just saw — which made this all the stranger.

The utterly fake figures of 1.2 trillion and 7.7 trillion were both refuted on December 13th, 2011 by economist L. Randall Wray, who said the actual number is a full-on 29 Trillion dollars.

The true total of Federal Reserve emergency lending to Wall Street is not $1.2 trillion, as Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke contends, nor the $7.7 trillion figure reported by Bloomberg News, which Bernanke publicly contests.

The real number, argues economist L. Randall Wray, is a staggering $29 trillion.

Wray writes that Bernanke’s recent defense of the lower figure is “misleading” and that the chairman’s claim that Fed bailouts do not constitute a form of spending is plain wrong.


There is simply no justifiable explanation for why this much money was needed. It had nothing to do with securing the assets of ordinary Americans, as we will see.

However, let’s ask this question first: Was this enough money to rescue these institutions and restore them to full health? Or, did it merely keep them on life support a little longer?


The answer is shocking. The 26 trillion dollars was nothing more than a sudden gasp of air for companies that are still drowning in debt.

Thanks to deregulation, such as the repeal of the Glass-Steagall act, these institutions were allowed to hold one dollar in the bank, but then spend like they had 5, 10, 30 or even 100 dollars.

To put it in perspective, if you had ten thousand dollars in your checking account, you would suddenly become a millionaire if you could leverage it at the “100X” point in one single “trade”.

These financial institutions have manipulated and abused this system to do casino gambling, on a global scale — to the tune of hundreds of trillions of dollars.

It’s a very complex discussion, but when you see the term “derivatives”, this is what it means.


Incredibly, just four financial institutions have gambled 600 trillion dollars’ worth of money they don’t even have – so this bailout was still not even close to being enough to protect them.

Even if they had all the money in the world at their disposal, they’d still need ten times more to bail themselves out:

In 2009, five banks held 80% of derivatives in America. Now, just four banks hold a staggering 95.9% of U.S. derivatives, according to a recent report from the Office of the Currency Comptroller.

The four banks in question: JPMorgan Chase & Co. (NYSE: JPM), Citigroup Inc. (NYSE: C), Bank of America Corp. (NYSE: BAC) and Goldman Sachs Group Inc. (NYSE: GS).

Derivatives played a crucial role in bringing down the global economy [in 2008], so you would think that the world’s top policymakers would have reined these things in by now — but they haven’t.

Instead of attacking the problem, regulators have let it spiral out of control, and the result is a $600 trillion time bomb called the derivatives market….

The world’s gross domestic product (GDP) is only about $65 trillion, or roughly 10.83% of the worldwide value of the global derivatives market, according to The Economist.

So there is literally not enough money on the planet to backstop the banks trading these things if they run into trouble.

Oto Godfrey has not created a graphic description of 600 Trillion dollars — yet. However, he did create an image of the total amount of unfunded liabilities in the United States — the total amount that will be needed, in the coming years, to pay all the bills.

That comes out to 114.5 Trillion dollars. Remember — the amount that has already been created by the derivatives swindle is at least five or six times this much.


I personally do not think it is a bad thing to let these companies fail. I fight back with facts – and think for myself instead.

The real money of ordinary people holding accounts in those banks could have been protected for much less than the cost of even the first public TARP bailout.

Just to prove the point, let’s go to and get some provable statistics:

The average American household income was 50,000 dollars in 2010. The overall tax rate is 19 percent, leaving $40,500 in disposable income.

Overall, Americans spend an incredible 94 percent of their disposable income. The remaining 6 percent is saved in the bank.

This adds up to a mere $2,400 dollars per household. This is not a guess, but a provable statistic.
With 114,825,428 households in the USit would only take one payment of 275 billion, 581 million dollars to guarantee the savings of all American citizens.

The Fed’s secret bailout of 26 trillion dollars was nearly 100 times greater than that.

Obviously the money being held in the stock market is a lot more than 275 billion dollars – but how much is there, exactly?
We know this figure. All you have to do is add up the value of all the companies on the New York Stock Exchange.

This is called “total market capitalization” or the “Total Market Index.” As of this writing, it is just over 13 trillion dollars:

As of today (12/24/11), the Total Market Index is at $ 13,197.2 billion, which is about 88% of the last reported GDP.

This means that even if every single company in the world were to completely stop doing business — abandoning their offices, factories, equipment and services – we could still guarantee every stock on Earth for half the cost of the $26 trillion dollars in interest-free ‘bailout’ loans handed out by the Fed.

Obviously, the offices, factories, equipment, inventory and 95% of the employees could still be used after breaking up these monopolies and arresting the top conspirators. Without the toxic profit losses due to such incredible theft, these companies would probably thrive like never before.

The idea that any company’s entire value to its shareholders would simply disappear in the face of a breakup is completely illogical. Stocks always go down and up, down and up. That’s what they do. People will always need things. There will always be buying and selling.


Again, the Federal Reserve is a private corporation that prints money for the United States. The US then pays interest for the rights to use these “Federal Reserve Notes.”

The Federal Reserve secretly handed out 26 trillion dollars in bailout money between 2007 and 2010. The top four bailed-out banks are now doing 95.9 percent of all the gambling. Their total risk adds up to 600 trillion dollars – ten times more than all the money in the world.

At this point, it may seem that all we have to do is dismantle the Federal Reserve, let the US Treasury print its own money, back up everyone’s bank accounts for 275 billion dollars, and then allow a handful of “too big to fail” financial institutions to collapse — and be restructured in smaller pieces.

However, we now have scientific proof that this problem goes much deeper than just the Federal Reserve and a few of their closest banking buddies.

Instead, the Federal Reserve appears to be at the epicenter of a vast “interlocking directorate” of companies that may earn up to 80 percent of all the world’s wealth.

This, of course, makes it a lot more complicated to clean things up – but I do still believe it can be done, or else I wouldn’t have conducted this investigation.


Ever since Benoit Mandelbrot discovered “fractals” in the 1970s, the fascinating new science of Chaos Theory has become a part of our collective knowledge base.

Mandelbrot discovered a remarkable “geometry of nature” – in which highly complex systems can be reduced down to a few very simple ingredients.

What if we use this same science to “hack” the world’s economy with super-computers – and see how many corporations actually control it?

Three scientists from the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology in Zurich, led by James Glattfelder, recently did this – and their results were published in New Scientist, a respected science magazine.

Glattfelder’s team unleashed a vast armada of supercomputers on Orbis 2007 — a very elaborate database of the top 37 million corporations and individual investors worldwide.

The results were absolutely stunning.


The Swiss scientists quickly found a total of 43,060 trans-national corporations in the Orbis 2007 database.

From this group, Glattfelder’s team revealed that a ‘core’ of 1,318 companies directly controlled 20 percent of the world’s wealth.

However, these corporations also appeared to own and control the stock in a majority of the world’s largest companies — whose profits added up to an additional 60 percent of global revenues:

Although they represented 20 per cent of global operating revenues, the 1318 [corporations] appeared to collectively own, through their shares, the majority of the world’s large blue chip and manufacturing firms — the “real” economy — representing a further 60 per cent of global revenues….

[This] core of 1318 companies [had] interlocking ownerships. Each of the 1318 had ties to two or more other companies, and on average they were connected to 20 [other corporations].


If that isn’t surprising enough for you, then how about this?

Glattfelder’s team then crunched the numbers even harder – and found a very deeply hidden “super-entity” of only 147 corporations – and “much of it” was connected to the 1,318-company ‘core’.

These 147 companies were all interconnected with each other in an “even more tightly knit” pattern than the 1,318 corporations in the ‘core’. To put it simply, they all owned each other’s companies.

[Specifically, each company within the “super-entity” owned shares in all 146 others.]

Together, this super-elite, good-old-boys-club of 147 companies directly earns a whopping 40 percent of all the wealth in the world:
When the team further untangled the web of ownership, it found much of it tracked back to a “super-entity” of 147 even more tightly knit companies — all of their ownership was held by other members of the super-entity — that controlled 40 per cent of the total wealth in the network.

Without the advanced technology of supercomputers and chaos theory, no one would have been able to discover this. History has caught up to the Powers that Were.


Next question: What kind of companies do you think these top 147 corporations are? Remember – they control a staggering 40 percent of the world’s wealth.

As it says on page 6 of the paper, 75 percent of the corporations within the “super-entity” were financial institutions.
The top 20 financial institutions within the “super-entity” should sound pretty familiar to you by now.

They include Barclays Bank, JP Morgan Chase & Co., Merrill Lynch, UBS, Bank of New York, Deutsche Bank and Goldman Sachs.


To be fair, these scientists did say this could all be due to the magic of Chaos theory.
They said this could all be a “logical phase” of the “self-organizing” nature of complex systems – such as the global economy:

“Such structures are common in nature,” says Sugihara…. Or as Braha puts it: “The Occupy Wall Street claim that 1 per cent of people have most of the wealth reflects a logical phase of the self-organising economy.”

So, the super-entity may not result from conspiracy. The real question, says the Zurich team, is whether it can exert concerted political power.

Driffill feels 147 is too many to sustain collusion. Braha suspects they will compete in the market but act together on common interests….

“It’s disconcerting to see how connected things really are,” agrees George Sugihara of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography in La Jolla, California, a complex systems expert who has advised Deutsche Bank.


You never waste words when you write up a scientific paper after years’ worth of hard work. Bearing that in mind, read the last paragraph of the actual paper itself:
This is the first time a ranking of economic actors by global control is presented. Notice that many actors belong to the financial sector… and many of the names are well-known global players….

This means that they do not carry out their business in isolation but, on the contrary, they are tied together in an extremely entangled web of control.

This finding is extremely important since there was no prior economic theory or empirical evidence regarding whether and how top players are connected.

Finally, it should be noted that governments and natural persons are only featured further down in the list.

Then add this line in from the second-to-last paragraph of the first part of the paper, on page 8:

Our results show that, globally, top holders are at least in the position to exert considerable control, either formally (e.g., voting in shareholder and board meetings) or via informal negotiations.

“Informal negotiations” would be one way to describe the Federal Reserve System secretly handing 26 trillion dollars to the “top holders” within the “super-entity” of 147 corporations.


Remember what we learned from Congressman Bernie Sanders after they audited the Federal Reserve?

The directors and board members of the 12 Federal Reserve banks are also running the top financial institutions. They just printed 26 trillion dollars of American money and gave it to themselves.
There’s nothing “natural” about this at all.

Our next task is to “follow the money” – and see if we can find out what corporations and industries are owned, either publicly or in secret, by the Federal Reserve “super-entity”. (Glattfelder’s team has not yet published the full list.)
It’s not that hard to do. If 80 percent of all the world’s profits are going to the Federal Reserve “super-entity”, then they would need to control many of the most profitable industries.

As Glattfelder’s team already said, this entity controls “the majority of the world’s large blue chip and manufacturing firms.”

In case you are unfamiliar with the term “blue chip,” it refers to any large company that consistently draws profits. The Dow Jones Industrial Average tracks the top 30 “blue chip” companies.


I was able to find a Fortune 500 listing of the most profitable industries, by percentage, for 2008 – but nothing more recent. (If you can find it, let me know.)

This list only applies to American companies, but it is still very relevant. Here’s how it looks:

The Number One industry on the list is Network and Other Communications Equipment, earning a 20.4 percent profit margin. Number Two on the list is Internet Services and Retailing, at 19.4 percent.

Financial Data Services do not appear until sixth place – at 11.7 percent.

Pharmaceuticals squeak into third place at a 19.3 percent margin. However, this is misleading – because the overall healthcare / pharmaceutical industry is broken up into fully seven different categories:

Pharmaceuticals – 19.3%. Medical Products and Equipment – 16.3%. Insurance: Life, Health (stock) – 4.6%. Health Care: Pharmacy and Other Services – 3.0%. Health Care: Medical Facilities – 2.4%. Health Care: Insurance and Managed Care – 2.2%. Wholesalers: Health Care – 1.3%.

There are only 43 industries on the Fortune 500 list that actually generated profits – and seven of them are healthcare.
Healthcare therefore accounts for 16.28% of all the money-making industries on the Fortune 500 list. Nothing else captures that many different categories.


The second most-profitable American industry, based on the number of categories it has on the list and how high of a percentage they make, is the petroleum and energy business – which controls six out of 43 spots:

Mining, Crude Oil production – 11.5 percent. Oil and Gas Equipment, Services – 10.2 percent. Utilities: Gas and Electric – 8.7 percent. Petroleum Refining –2.1 percent. Pipelines – 1.5 percent. Energy – 0.9 percent.

The oil companies therefore enjoyed 13.95% of all the most profitable categories of American businesses in 2008.

Together, oil and pharmaceuticals occupy 13 out of 43 slots on the Fortune 500 list of the most profitable American industries – or a stunning 30.23 percent of all the money there is to be made.


Remember – the above figures only tell us how strong of a profit each of these industries is making. If you invested in an industry that was making 20 percent profit per year, you’d be very happy.

This doesn’t actually tell us how much money they are pulling in. If you had a company that cost ten dollars to run, and you made twelve dollars a year, you’d still be making a 20 percent profit.

In order to figure out how much actual money is being made, you have to look at individual businesses.

Here is a link to the Fortune 500 list of the 50 most profitable American businesses in 2010:

The single most profitable American corporation in 2010 was Exxon Mobil — earning 30 billion, 460 million dollars.

Chevron comes in behind AT&T to take third place at 19 billion, 24 million dollars.

ConocoPhillips was #16 at 11 billion, 358 million. Devon Energy and Occidental Petroleum both made 4.5 billion.

Add it all together and you get 69 billion, 842 million dollars in oil profits for 2010 alone – basically 70 billion – and that’s only the oil companies in America’s top 50.


The Fortune 500 list only applies to American industries.

You have to go international to include the non-American “supermajor” oil companies – namely BP, Royal Dutch Shell and Total S.A. – each of which are also very substantial – in addition to the American-based Chevron, ExxonMobil and ConocoPhillips.

The full international list with all these companies included is called the Forbes Global 2000. This gives us a better overall sense of what’s going on in the world – but it still only tracks companies that have to publicly report their earnings.

Eight out of the top 20 largest international companies are banks: JP Morgan Chase, HSBC (UK), ICBC (China), Citigroup, BNP Paribas (France), Wells Fargo, Banco Santander (Spain) and China Construction Bank. That’s a total of 40 percent.

Seven of the top 20 public international companies are oil and gas: Exxon Mobil, Royal Dutch Shell, Petro China, Petrobras, Gazprom, Chevron and Total. That’s 35 percent.

So, fifteen out of the top 20 companies on the Forbes 2000 list – seventy-five percent – are either banking or oil. That leaves only five slots left in the top 20.

Let’s also not forget that the Forbes 2000 list only applies to publicly-traded companies.


Let’s go back to the Fortune 500 list of the top American corporations for a minute.

Fully nine out of the top 50 most profitable Fortune 500 companies in 2010 were pharmaceuticals – and they add up to a total of 64 billion, 924.6 million dollars in profits.

These are only the most obvious, verifiable pharmaceutical / healthcare companies on the list, and only those that appear in the top 50 of the Fortune 500 list:

Johnson and Johnson weighs in at ninth place with 13 billion, 334 million. 10th place is Warren Buffet’s Berkshire Hathaway, with 12 billion, 967 million. Then, Procter & Gamble comes in right behind them for 12th place at 12 billion, 736 million.

Pfizer shows up at number 21 with 8 billion, 257 million. Eli Lilly is in 29th place with 5 billion, 69.5 million.

UnitedHealth Group comes in at 32nd place with 4 billion, 634 million. Amgen is right behind them at the 33rd slot with 4 billion, 627 million.

United Technologies appears at 37th place with 4 billion, 373 million. Then lastly we see CVS Caremark at 47th place with 3 billion, 427 million.

Again – nine out of all 50 of the top Fortune 500 companies are pharmaceuticals. These companies alone pulled in almost 65 billion dollars in profits for 2010, close behind the 70 billion made in oil money.

Pharmaceuticals do not jump out this much on the Forbes Global 2000 list. The only pharmaceutical company in the top 20 is Berkshire Hathaway at #8, which is technically a conglomerate that has holdings in other industries as well.

The total combined income for oil and pharmaceuticals in the top 50 slots of the Fortune 500 list is 70 billion plus 65 billion — or 135 billion in total.

This does not include 20.9 billion for Atomic Energy Defense activities, nor 124.5 billion in veterans’ benefits, nor 10.1 billion in foreign military aid, nor 44.1 billion in foreign economic aid, nor 7.5 billion in defense-related activities.
The top 100 defense contractors in 2010 only earned about $129.48 billion, based on a rough, approximate calculation — out of a total Department of Defense expenditure of 692 billion for that year. That still leaves 562.5 billion dollars unaccounted for.

The top five defense contractors for 2010 were Lockheed Martin at 16.7 billion, Northrop Grumman at 11.1 billion, Boeing at 10.4 billion, Raytheon at 6.7 billion and SAIC at 4.7 billion.

In order for the ‘core’ of 1,318 companies to be earning 80 percent of the world’s wealth, it would be absolutely essentialfor them to profit from this enormous defense budget. There’s nothing else like it in the world.

Based on the new findings of the Swiss scientists, many of these defense contractors may be part of a single mega-conglomerate working behind the scenes.


To review, 80 percent of the world’s profits are being earned by a ‘core’ group of 1,318 corporations.
As we look even deeper, we find this ‘core’ is mostly run by a “super-entity” of 147 companies that are totally interlocked. 75 percent of them are financial institutions.

The top 20 companies in the “super-entity” include Barclays Bank, JP Morgan Chase & Co., Merrill Lynch, UBS, Bank of New York, Deutsche Bank and Goldman Sachs.

Many key Federal Reserve personnel work for these companies – and they secretly handed themselves trillions of dollars in free money between 2007 and 2010.

The 147-part “super-entity” has controlling interest in the 1318-part “core”, which in turn has controlling interest in 80 percent of the world’s wealth.

It would be utterly essential for the Federal Reserve corporations, and their beneficiaries, to be heavily invested into oil and pharmaceuticals — as well as the United States defense system — in order to earn such a tremendous percentage.

Is there any proof that the Federal Reserve elites are, indeed, invested in these and other top businesses? Absolutely.

Let’s now do some historical research on the top two Federal Reserve names we always read about – the Rockefellers and Rothschilds – and see what we find.


John D. Rockefeller, one of the top architects who founded and bankrolled the Federal Reserve System, also owned and ran Standard Oil Company, beginning in 1870. He soon became America’s first billionaire.

Rockefeller’s spectacular oil profits ultimately allowed him to be in a position to essentially buy the United States government — and its ability to print money – via the Federal Reserve.

Standard Oil had a virtual monopoly on producing, transporting, refining and marketing oil up until 1911, when it was broken up by an alarmed United States Supreme Court in antitrust legislation.

Standard Oil of New Jersey became Esso, later to be renamed Exxon – which became a key part of ExxonMobil, currently the most profitable company in the world — earning 30 billion, 460 million dollars.

Standard Oil of California became Chevron – currently the third most profitable company in the world at 19 billion, 24 million dollars per year.

Continental Oil Company became Conoco, now a part of ConocoPhillips – currently the sixteenth most profitable company in the world at 11 billion, 358 million dollars.

BP Amoco is a conglomerate of several Standard Oil splinter companies. Yahoo Finance currently lists BP Amoco’s gross profit at 16 billion, 28 million dollars.

Therefore, four out of the six “supermajors” in the oil industry are direct Rockefeller spinoffs – BP, Chevron, ExxonMobil and ConocoPhillips.

Our Swiss scientists proved that these companies never really broke apart. The 1,318 in the “core” and 147 “super-entity” corporations are extremely interlocked with one another.


Many researchers and insiders have suggested that the single largest Federal Reserve shareholder is the Rothschild family.
I went straight to the source and read their officially-sanctioned The Rothschilds: A Family Portrait, by Frederic Morton, Atheneum Press, New York, 1962, to learn more about them.

I didn’t realize that Frankfurt, Germany was very hostile to Jews in the late 1700s. The Rothschilds lived in the ghetto, were subject to extreme public humiliation, and were nearly broke as of 1764.

16: On his way Mayer could not escape the street urchins whose favorite amusement was to shout, “Jew, do your duty!”—whereupon the Jew had to step aside, take off his hat, and bow.

Having thus entertained the local children, Mayer reached the heavy chains with which soldiers manacled the Judengasse (Jew Street) every night.

The ghetto… [had] an ordinance that barred Frankfurt Jews from farming, from handicrafts, even from dealing in nobler goods such as weapons, silk or fresh fruit….

Another city edict limited the Jews to five hundred families and to no more than twelve marriages a year.


With such extreme public humiliation and oppression, occurring on a daily basis for generations, the Rothschilds may well have lost faith in the goodness and kindness of humanity.

Mayer Amschel Bauer (later “Rothschild”) was born in 1743. After his father’s death, he apprenticed for three years at the Bank of Oppenheimer and became a junior partner.

By then, he had earned enough money to buy his father’s counting house, which was adorned with a red shield, symbolizing the desire for Revolution – thus inspiring him to take the last name “Rothschild.” (The family home he purchased later had a green shield.)

Mayer Amschel soon found ingenious ways to make highly intelligent business deals with top royals, providing banking services to handle all the unpleasant transactions they didn’t want to be involved in.
He won over their good graces through a variety of clever techniques, such as selling them rare and precious coins at absurdly low prices.

I was surprised to see how bluntly the author of The Rothschilds spoke about the level of influence Mayer Amschel’s family came to have on the world – but things were very different in 1962, when the book was written.

13: [In] Frankfurt [Germany]… in a cramped ghetto dwelling… with a yellow star pinned to his caftan, Mayer Amschel Rothschild kept a small store two centuries ago.

[He] married Gutele Schnapper, and raised with her those five incredible sons who conquered the world more thoroughly, more cunningly and much more lastingly than all the Caesars before or all the Hitlers after them.


The Rothschild name is no longer commonly heard in mainstream media – but this wasn’t the case when The Rothschilds was written in 1962. Their deep connections to royalty were openly admitted in the book.

5: No modern name breathes a more storied eminence. No nonroyal family has held so much power so consistently, so peculiarly….

It would be insufficient to sum up the family as “still very wealthy.” The Rothschild fortunes in England and in France are as ineffable as ever….

6: For generations the people at Buckingham Palace have recognized the kinship: Queen Victoria often dined and slept in Rothschild houses; the Duke of Windsor fled to a Rothschild (an Austrian one) directly after his abdication.
11: The two big [Rothschild] banks in London and Paris (probably the world’s largest private financial institutions)… have not so much as a name plate outside.

Though they control scores of industrial, commercial, mining and tourist corporations, not one bears the name Rothschild.

Being privately held partnerships, the family houses never need to, and never do, publish a single public balance sheet or any other report of their financial condition.


As we read further in The Rothschilds, we find out that Mayer Amschel’s five male children distributed themselves throughout Europe – becoming essentially the world’s first multi-national corporation.

Each of his sons rose to very prominent positions of power – in Germany, Austria, England, Italy and France, respectively.

29: Perhaps the early Romans were the most successful nation we have known; perhaps Napoleon the most formidable individual.

It is quite possible that the people still bustling obscurely at the Green Shield [at the end of the 1780s in Frankfurt’s Jewish ghetto] were the family par excellence in modern history.

As long as Mayer lived alone with his wife, he was… a Caesar without centurions. But soon those boys marched out of Gutele’s womb like so many dauntless legions.

First came Amschel, future treasurer of the German Confederation. Then Salomon, who in the end achieved exactly the exalted station in imperial Vienna that remained [Prince] Landgrave William’s perpetual daydream.

Then Nathan, who rose to more power than any other man in England. Then Kalman, who wound the Italian peninsula around his hand. Then Jacob, who was to lord it in France during Republic and Empire.


Morton’s book does not apologize about the Rothschilds’ behavior. One of the most stunning examples is in the discussion of “consols” beginning on page 49.

“Consols” was short for “consolidated annuities” – essentially the stock of the British government after it consolidated its assets in 1751. Trading “consols” was literally trading the wealth of the British empire – and its people.

The French Empire, under Napoleon, was trying to take over everything in Europe. A seven-nation alliance commanded by the British was fighting back. It was commonly expected that the final outcome of this conflict would be decided at Waterloo.

The battle all happened on June 18, 1815. Napoleon was outnumbered – 72,000 to 118,000. Napoleon surrendered as of 10PM – after 25,000 of his men had been killed or wounded. 19,300 men were killed or wounded on the Anglo-Prussian side – all in a single day.

That much death and destruction in one field was a horror show. Four days later, Major W. E Frye surveyed the damage and had to leave, because he was so traumatized he nearly threw up.

On arrival there the sight was too horrible to behold. I felt sick in the stomach and was obliged to return.
The multitude of carcasses, the heaps of wounded men with mangled limbs unable to move, and perishing from not having their wounds dressed or from hunger, as the Allies were, of course, obliged to take their surgeons and waggons with them, formed a spectacle I shall never forget.


Nathan Rothschild was one of the very first to get the news of the British victory – on the dawn of June 20th.

The Rothschilds tells us an agent named Rothworth rushed Nathan the news by boat – beating the official British messenger by several hours.

49: There was no news more precious than the outcome of Waterloo… If Napoleon won, English consols were bound to drop. If he lost, the enemy empire would shatter and consols rise….

Another man in his position would have sunk his worth into consols. But this was Nathan Rothschild… He did not invest. He sold. He dumped consols.

His name was already such that a single substantial move on his part sufficed to bear or bull an issue.

Consols fell. Nathan leaned and leaned, and sold and sold. Consols dropped still more. “Rothschild knows,” the whisper rippled through the ‘Change. “Waterloo is lost.”….

Consols dived, consols plummeted—until, a split second before it was too late, Nathan suddenly bought a giant parcel for a song. Moments afterwards the great news broke, to send consols soaring.

We cannot guess the number of hopes and savings wiped out by this engineered panic… how many liveried servants, how many Watteaus and Rembrandts… [Rothschild] won that single day.


If you don’t understand what happened, he basically tricked everyone into selling everything they had, and then bought it all back on the cheap – right before the stock prices skyrocketed.
The single greatest way to make money and secure control is to stage a mass panic. That was the lesson. If everyone sells and you know exactly the right moment to buy, you can achieve seemingly limitless power.
As the Amazon commenter “SmokeNMirrors” pointed out on August 7, 2009,

Nathan himself believed that with that move he came to control the British money supply, and with it the whole of the British Empire.

That wealth begets wealth is well known; if less than 2 centuries ago one family essentially owned the British Empire, there is a very real chance that that fortune is now many times larger than it was then….

What is beyond doubt is that they have controlled the Federal Reserve since its creation (indeed, it was their creation!) and officially the Bank of England since at least the mid-1800s.


The Rothschilds’ own sanctioned family biography reveals the extent of power they came to hold throughout Europe.
However, blaming all this on the Jewish people would be a fatal and ridiculous mistake. Any time we begin demonizing whole races of people, we have voted for genocide.

The motivations and philosophies behind these “banking families” are rooted in secret societies that have nothing to do with Judaism, as we will soon see.

I do believe that forgiveness – despite the atrocities that have been and are being committed – will serve us much better than any desire for vigilante justice.

I have had multiple, trusted insider contacts tell me that the younger generations of this and other top banking families want to create radical, positive changes.

They do not share the cynical, negative attitude towards humanity that many of their elders still have.

Furthermore, the “system” is so large, so interconnected and so woven through all aspects of our society that the only valid way to transform it is from within.

Knowledge is the key. The system has thrived in secrecy. The truth will set us free.


Though this information is a closely-guarded secret, there have been enough leaks to confirm the identities of the key banking families who founded the Federal Reserve.
By now, many of them should sound familiar to you – since they used the Federal Reserve to bail themselves out:

J. W. McCallister, an oil industry insider with House of Saud connections, wrote in The Grim Reaper that information he acquired from Saudi bankers cited 80% ownership of the New York Federal Reserve Bank- by far the most powerful Fed branch- by just eight families, four of which reside in the US.

They are the Goldman Sachs, Rockefellers, Lehmans and Kuhn Loebs of New York; the Rothschilds of Paris and London; the Warburgs of Hamburg; the Lazards of Paris; and the Israel Moses Seifs of Rome.

CPA Thomas D. Schauf corroborates McCallister’s claims, adding that ten banks control all twelve Federal Reserve Bank branches.

He names N.M. Rothschild of London, Rothschild Bank of Berlin, Warburg Bank of Hamburg, Warburg Bank of Amsterdam, Lehman Brothers of New York, Lazard Brothers of Paris, Kuhn Loeb Bank of New York, Israel Moses Seif Bank of Italy, Goldman Sachs of New York and JP Morgan Chase Bank of New York.

Schauf lists William Rockefeller, Paul Warburg, Jacob Schiff and James Stillman as individuals who own large shares of the Fed. [3] The Schiffs are insiders at Kuhn Loeb. The Stillmans are Citigroup insiders, who married into the Rockefeller clan at the turn of the century.

Eustace Mullins came to the same conclusions in his book The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, in which he displays charts connecting the Fed and its member banks to the families of Rothschild, Warburg, Rockefeller and the others. [4]


Now that we’ve touched on the Rockefeller oil and Rothschild banking aspects of the Federal Reserve, let’s move back to pharmaceuticals for a minute.

Again, nine out of the top 50 most profitable Fortune 500 companies in 2010 were pharmaceuticals – at a total of 64 billion, 924.6 million dollars in profits.

Most people are unaware of the blatant crimes against humanity that have been committed by the biggest pharmaceutical companies:

The US Government Accountability Office says that far from being a font of innovation, the drug market… spends virtually nothing on the diseases that kill the most human beings, like malaria, because the victims are poor, so there’s hardly any profit to be sucked out….


Many pharmaceutical companies are in the business of creating “me too” drugs. They take a popular drug, change it by at little as one molecule, and re-release it as a new product.

This generates massive amounts of profits – and it is costing us dearly:

A detailed study by Dr Marcia Angell, the former editor of the prestigious New England Journal of Medicine, says that only 14 percent of [pharmaceutical companies’] budgets go on developing drugs — usually at the uncreative final part of the drug-trail.

The rest goes on marketing and profits.

And even with that puny 14 percent, drug companies squander a fortune developing “me-too” drugs — medicines that do exactly the same job as a drug that already exists, but has one molecule different, so they can take out a new patent, and receive another avalanche of profits….

The European Union’s competition commissioner, Neelie Kroes, recently concluded that Europeans pay 40 percent more for their medicines than they should because of this “rotten” system — money that could be saving many lives if it was redirected towards real health care.


The pharmaceutical giant Pfizer manufactures chicken feed for factory-raised birds. The droppings of these birds are then fed to factory-raised cattle.

A recent expose’ revealed that Pfizer has been putting arsenic in their chicken feed to allegedly kill parasites and stimulate faster growth.

For many years they argued this did not pass into the meat, but all went out as waste.

Recently this was proven incorrect by the FDA. All factory-raised chicken meat could have had arsenic in it – a deadly poison. This makes it very likely that factory-raised beef may have had arsenic as well.

Though this product Roxarsone has now been pulled from shelves in the United States, Pfizer indicated it wouldn’t necessarily pull it from about a dozen other countries unless regulators force them to.

The toxic poisoning of arsenic creates health problems. Most people try to solve their health problems by taking pharmaceuticals – rather than changing their diets, such as to ethically-raised organic meats.


Foster Gamble’s “Fact Checking” section of the Thrive Movement website reveals that the American Medical Association was financed by the Rockefellers (Federal Reserve).

If you own and control the pharmaceutical industry, it would certainly make sense to secretly run the agency in charge of regulating your products:

Fact: The American Medical Association (AMA) is largely funded by the Rockefellers, who in turn use their funding to influence AMA research and decision-making.

The Rockefeller Foundation website points to various connections between the American Medical Association and the Foundation. Here are a few examples:
The American Medical Association has been accepting money from the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations from as early as 1910.

In The World Without Cancer G. Edward Griffin makes the argument that the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations began to support the AMA in an effort to control the medical schooling establishment and to gain power over this “large and vital sphere of American life.”

If the pharmaceutical industry is putting profits over people, and gouging money out of an already strapped economy, then why would we keep it?

Johann Hari reveals the answer – they literally bought the government.

Why would we keep this system, if it is so bad?

The drug companies have spent more than $3 billion on lobbyists and political “contributions” over the past decade in the US alone. They have paid politicians to make the system work in their interests.

If you doubt how deeply this influence goes, listen to a Republican congressman, Walter Burton, who admitted of the last big health care legislation passed in the US in 2003: “The pharmaceutical lobbyists wrote the bill.”

This is where the lines between government, military, finance, defense contractors and corporations all begin to blur. At the core of all this is a “super-entity” of 147 companies – 75 percent of which are financial institutions.

A hugely popular Rolling Stone article by Matt Tabibi systematically revealed how Goldman Sachs is at the center of an incestuous relationship between Wall Street, the elected government and the Federal Reserve.

This article earned 23,000 Facebook Likes and 268 written comments as a result of its stunning journalism – most of which I won’t include here due to its complexity:

[Goldman Sachs] seemed to count on the unwillingness or inability of federal regulators to stop them — and when called to Washington last year to explain their behavior, Goldman executives brazenly misled Congress, apparently confident that their perjury would carry no serious consequences….

Goldman… [is] a powerful, well-connected firm, with the ear of the president and the Treasury, that appears to have conquered the entire regulatory structure — and stands now on the precipice of officially getting away with one of the biggest financial crimes in history.

The fact that this evidence [covered throughout the article] comes from a U.S. senator’s office, and not the FBI or the SEC, is itself an element in the worsening tale of lawlessness and despotism that sparked a global economic meltdown….

If the Justice Department fails to give the American people a chance to judge this case — if Goldman skates without so much as a trial — it will confirm once and for all the embarrassing truth: that the law in America is subjective, and crime is defined not by what you did, but by who you are.


Most people go with the “gut” rather than with scientific facts.

Go ahead and try to tell someone that a “super-entity” of 147 corporations appears to be running the world, and those corporations are completely interconnected with the Federal Reserve – which handed out 26 trillion dollars in bailouts, without any regulation or oversight from the American government.

You may find yourself coming face-to-face with very strong denial, ridicule and attack — even in the face of undeniable evidence.

Our Swiss scientist James Glattfelder, who used supercomputers to prove that a small number of companies control the majority of the world’s wealth, spoke directly to the skeptics in this next quote:

“Reality is so complex, we must move away from dogma, whether it’s conspiracy theories or free-market,” saysJames Glattfelder.

“Our analysis is reality-based.”

The next question you would reasonably ask yourself is this: How the hell have these people avoided getting caught for the last 100-plus years?


What if it were possible to discourage critical thinking in the public – so people would never put all the pieces together? One useful way to do this would be to control the educational system.

Again, I understand that I am hitting a brick wall with the “average person” by bringing this up, as they cannot face the possibility that the world they live in has been so deeply manipulated and compromised.
Nonetheless, Foster Gamble’s “Fact Checks” section of the Thrive Movement website makes a compelling case that this is what happened.


The Federal Reserve created the National Education Association via the Rockefeller family:

By way of grants, they spent millions of dollars — money which was used to radically bend the traditionalist education system toward a new system that favored standardized testing over critical thinking, toward “scientific management” in schools.

This was part of a calculated plan to make the schooling system benefit corporate America, at the expense of the American school child. Powerful foundations with private interests, such as the Ford Foundation, continue to support, and thereby influence the policy of, the NEA to this day.

Additionally, an unprecedented U.S. Congressional investigation into tax-exempt foundations identified the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations engagement in an agenda for vast population control.

Norman Dodd, Research Director for the Congressional Committee, found this statement in the archives of the Carnegie endowment:


In order for such a vastly interconnected group to avoid detection for this long, it would also be an absolute requirementfor them to buy, own and control the media.

You will soon see compelling, documented proof that the power elite were already bragging about this accomplishment by 1815 – the same year Nathan Rothschild won the British government on a bet.

However, we will review recent history first, so as to better understand how today’s world of seemingly hundreds of independent media sources is actually quite tightly controlled.

In 1983, there were 50 different independent media companies in the United States. By 2004, this number had reduced to five key players: Time Warner, Disney, News Corporation (FOX), Bertelsmann of Germany and Viacom (formerly CBS).
Ben Bagdikian expertly lays out all the proof for this media in his updated 2004 edition of The New Media Monopoly.

These five huge corporations — Time Warner, Disney, Murdoch’s News Corporation, Bertelsmann of Germany, and Viacom (formerly CBS) — own most of the newspapers, magazines, books, radio and TV stations, and movie studios of the United States….

These five are not just large — though they are all among the 325 largest corporations in the world — they are unique among all huge corporations: they are a major factor in changing the politics of the United States, and they condition the social values of children and adults alike.


A more recent investigation by revealed that the vast majority of media in the United States is dominated by six mega-corporations: General Electric, Walt Disney, News Corp, Time Warner, Viacom and CBS.

[As you delve into the individual categories of cabletelevisionprinttelecom and radio, you find a few more companies chasing behind the Big Six – but not many.]

These companies often control the entire creative process of a film or television show from beginning to ending – making it an ideal environment for creating propaganda:

The U.S. media landscape is dominated by massive corporations that, through a history of mergers and acquisitions, have concentrated their control over what we see, hear and read.

In many cases, these giant companies are vertically integrated, controlling everything from initial production to final distribution.

Three of these mega-conglomerates appear on Fortune 500’s Top 50 Most Profitable list for 2010:

This includes General Electric at 11 billion, 644 million; Walt Disney at 3 billion, 963 million; and Comcast at 3 billion, 635 million.

General Electric is also the world’s third biggest public company – according to the Forbes 2000 list.


You may not realize that most of the cable channels on American television are international. Subtitles are used in foreign countries. This is part of why so many people now speak English.

Therefore, the scope of this media consolidation is truly worldwide. Bertelsmann is the only company among Ben Bagdikian’s “Big Five” that is not primarily centered in the United States.

In his seminal work, Bagdikian reveals how these five main companies are shaping and molding society:

These Big Five (with General Electric’s NBC a close sixth) do not manufacture automobiles, or clothing, or nuts and bolts. They manufacture politics and social values.

The media conglomerates have been a major force in creating conservative and far right politics in the country.

They have almost single-handedly as a group, in their radio and television dominance, produced a coarse and vulgar culture that celebrates the most demeaning characteristics in the human psyche — greed, deceit, and cheating as a legitimate way to win (as in the various “reality” shows).


All this being said, it would be a terrible mistake to arrest and imprison the lower, middle and upper-mid-level staff in the media as if they are all complicit in the problem.

CEOs may not fully understand what’s going on either. They are well-paid to be the scapegoats when all hell breaks loose. The biggest powers are always those who work behind the scenes.

This was well underway by 1948, with a little-known CIA project called Operation Mockingbird. Many documents have since been leaked or declassified on this subject.

Spartacus Educational is overflowing with documentation and links you can read – including references to multiple academic books investigating the subject.

In 1948 Frank Wisner was appointed director of the Office of Special Projects. Soon afterwards it was renamed the Office of Policy Coordination (OPC).

This became the espionage and counter-intelligence branch of the Central Intelligence Agency.
Wisner was told to create an organization that concentrated on “propaganda, economic warfare; preventive direct action, including sabotage, anti-sabotage, demolition and evacuation measures; subversion against hostile states, including assistance to underground resistance groups, and support of indigenous anti-Communist elements in threatened countries of the free world.”

Later that year Wisner established Mockingbird, a program to influence the domestic American media.Wisner recruited Philip Graham (Washington Post) to run the project within the industry….

According to Deborah Davis (Katharine the Great): “By the early 1950s, Wisner ‘owned’ respected members of the New York Times, Newsweek, CBS and other communications vehicles.”…


The New York Times actually revealed a small part of this explosive story in 2007.

The C.I.A. monitoring of journalists in 1963, 1971 and 1972, including wiretapping their phones and setting up observation posts across the street from their offices to track their comings and goings and their visitors, was a practice that the White House itself employed during the Nixon administration….

As with other questionable or illegal C.I.A. activities that were endorsed by top government officials, this account shows that spying on reporters was approved at the highest levels of the Kennedy administration….

By ordering the director of central intelligence to conduct a program of domestic surveillance, Kennedy set a precedent that Presidents Johnson, Nixon, and George W. Bush would follow.

The top investigative books on this subject include A Very Private Woman by Nina Burleigh, Mockingbird: The Subversion of the Free Press by the CIA by Alex Constantine, The Mighty Wurlitzer: How the CIA Played America by Hugh Wilford, Who Paid the Piper? by Frances Stonor Saunders and The Very Best Men by Evan Thomas.

This consolidated control did not fizzle out in more recent years. It has only gotten worse.

After a shocking betrayal, Conan O’Brien led the pack in revealing how centralized the media still is today.


Very few entities within the mainstream media have ever risen up against their own companies – but Conan O’Brien is a rare exception who should definitely be mentioned at this point.

Conan O’Brien was spectacularly humiliated by Big Media in January 2010 – only seven months after NBC made him the host of the Tonight Show, fulfilling a long-term contract from 2004.

NBC felt Conan’s ratings weren’t high enough. In a classic power-play attempt, NBC tried to force Conan to give the coveted 11:30 slot back to Jay Leno and settle for a show that didn’t begin until 12:05 am.

He soon won a 40 million-dollar settlement for him and his staff due to this obvious breach of contract – and gave a healthy portion of his side of the settlement to his staff as well.


After this stunning public humiliation, Conan sank into a deep depression:

I grew up watching Johnny Carson every night and the chance to one day sit in that chair has meant everything to me.

I worked long and hard to get that opportunity, passed up far more lucrative offers, and since 2004 I have spent literally hundreds of hours thinking of ways to extend the franchise long into the future.

“I felt like I’d just been in a car accident,” O’Brien admits to the mag.

His wife Liza Powel says Conan suffered from depression…

“I hated to see him in such a state of tension and unhappiness,” Powel says on a more serious note. “It was very painful for him to let go of this hallowed ground that he’d finally got a chance to stand on.


In late September 2011, Conan announced on his relatively-new TBS show that he was going to officiate over the first same-sex wedding on television – between his costume designer Scott Cronick and his partner David Gorshein.

The mainstream media covered the story – but not with very much originality.

Fully eighteen different news and entertainment shows, from all different networks, were shown reading the same script – almost always word-for-word.

The key phrase revealed on Conan’s show was “Conan O’Brien may be about to push the envelope on late-night television.”

Conan thinly disguised this as comedy – when in fact it was a shocking, unprecedented expose’ of just how thoroughly centralized and controlled the media really is:


These facts clearly establish that the mainstream media is heavily consolidated and controlled – despite there being seemingly limitless television channels and media sources.
However, we still haven’t proven that the largest media corporations are interconnected with the Federal Reserve banking families – which dominate the “super-entity” of the top 147 corporations on Earth.
I was surprised to find out that nine of the biggest media corporations on Earth are also controlling partners in the pharmaceutical / healthcare industry.

A recent FAIR study of nine major media corporations and their major outlets, Disney (ABC), General Electric (NBC), CBS, Time Warner (CNN, Time), News Corporation (Fox), New York Times Co., Washington Post Co. (Newsweek), Tribune Co. (Chicago Tribune, L.A. Times) and Gannett (USA Today) found connections to six different insurance companies.

Five out of the nine media corporations studied shared a director with an insurance company; two insurance companies—Chubb and Berkshire Hathaway—were represented by more than one media corporation director.

The study also found crossover between these media corporations and several large pharmaceutical companies, such as Eli Lilly, Merck and Novartis….

Out of the nine media corporations studied, six had directors who also represented the interests of at least one pharmaceutical company. In fact, save for CBS, every media corporation had board connections to either an insurance or pharmaceutical company….

Media Corporation
Insurance & Pharmaceutical Companies
Disney/ABC Procter & Gamble
GE/NBC Chubb, Novartis, Procter & Gamble, Merck
Time Warner AIG, Health Cap, Paratek Pharmaceuticals
Fox/News Corp GlaxoSmithKline, Genentech, Hybritech
New York Times Co. First Health Group, Eli Lilly
Tribune Co. Abbott Labs, Middelbrook Pharmaceuticals
Gannett/USA Today Chubb
We have been raised in an educational system that rewards us with prestige and social status if we can precisely regurgitate the “accepted” information.

We can then get into the best schools. They may even pay us to go. We work hard… and money, career, success and fortune will follow… or so we were told.

In order to earn these benefits, we have to be right. We cannot be “wrong”. Our opinion — what we have learned — is the strongest asset we have.

If the information we hold as truth is incorrect, within the standards of the educational system, we receive an F….
…for Failure.

If we are a Failure, then that jeopardizes our money, our health, our livelihoods and the lives of those we care about.


We have been taught to use the word “They” when we refer to commonly-held, officially-sanctioned information.
For that same reason, I fastidiously avoid using the word “They” when describing a new scientific discovery.
“They said?” They who?

It’s important to know exactly who said what… and question those sources.

Who are you? And who are they?

Are you really an individual — capable of having your own thoughts?

Or… are you a corporate product?

Are you trained by design to be a sick, depressed, fearful and obedient worker? Sad, pissed off and “Broke as a Joke”?

Given what we have just learned about the media, the American Medical Association and the National Education Association, it’s not much of a leap to figure out that “They” is actually the voice of the Federal Reserve. 

These wealthy international bankers literally bought the rights to become the “collective voice” that you instinctively feel must be correct.

If you read the comments at the end of this investigation, you will see that some people simply do not have the “shame tolerance” sufficient to process this simple, provable, irrefutable truth.

Shame is the single greatest injury we can ever feel. Shame stays with us much, much longer than any physical pain we may feel — such as if we get a cut or a burn.

Shame can persist long after we’ve healed from a broken bone — or even a terrible car accident. Shame can become an emotional state that defines our entire life — our personality, our job, our residence, our relationships… everything.

Shame is what causes us to commit murder — like we may fantasize about if we catch our partner having sex with another person.

Shame is intolerable. Shame sears us with pain. We cry. We shake with rage. We are on the verge of throwing up. We feel as if we are spiraling into catastrophe. We feel there is no hope. All is lost.

We lie in bed, wishing we could sleep, but sweating out each tick of the clock… moment by moment.
Tick. Tock. Tick. Tock. Tick. Tock. 

Breathe in. Breathe out. Breathe in. Breathe out.

What is shame?

Shame is nothing more than what other people think about you.

If no one ever had any negative opinions of you, then you would never feel any shame.

You see? It’s that simple.

Intellectually you can understand it. There is nothing to it. The truth is right there in front of you.

It’s only your emotions that get in the way.

Who are the most important people you feel you must avoid being shamed by… at all costs?

THEY are.

If THEY think you are a failure, then you have been taught to feel you are truly lost.

And guess what? THEY have taught you exactly what lines not to cross. THEY reinforce these teachings everywhere you look.

Some thoughts are actually illegal. Particularly if they transform into actions. At that point, you have broken the law — and you will be punished. You are taught what not to do — and you know the consequences.

What if you could love the people in your life who attempt to shame you — without accepting the poison?

What if you could make a decision to simply not be hurt by anyone’s attempt to dump shame on you?

Listen, yes. Make sure you are not violating free will. Avoid manipulating or controlling others. Care about what they have to say. Listen to them. Offer feedback. Be willing to be wrong. Be sensitive to their feelings.
All of this can be done without accepting the poison of shame — or delivering it to others. 

You can be a loving person — holding true to all the world’s greatest spiritual teachings — and have the true freedom to think for yourself, and not be bothered by those who would attempt to shame you.

Your survival may well depend on it. 


I can lay all of the evidence out for you… with meticulous, irrefutable references… but if you’re not ready to hear it, you will use a variety of coping mechanisms in order to rebuild the worldview you have chosen to accept as truth.

You will scramble to avoid shame — and maintain the beliefs you have built up throughout an entire lifetime of experiences, day after day, week after week, month after month, year after year.

This, of course, is the worldview that has been fed to you — by the people who then convert your ignorance into profit.

In shame, you pick up the shattered pieces, use a variety of faltering arguments that sound as smart as possible, and proudly strike down any offending thoughts that jeopardize the worldview you have been taught to believe is true.

Deep in your heart, you know you are wrong… but the shame is much too great for you to go there. You have too much at stake. There is too much to lose.

THEY will think you are a failure.

Here’s what I have to say about that.

Your educational upbringing has constructed a reality for you. It speaks to you from every school. Every university. Every newspaper. Every magazine. Every television station. Every radio station. Many (but thankfully not all) books.

It’s not your fault. 

You have absolutely nothing to be ashamed of.

There are so many people who love you. I can promise you that you are not alone. You are loved and cared for… more than you can ever possibly imagine.

I don’t believe this. I know this.

Why? Because I am one of those people.

And there are many, many others just like me.


That’s why I’m putting my life on the line — risking hideous torture and death — to tell you all this.

I could be doing something else. Something much, much safer and easier.

But I’m not. I’m here. Right now.

And with these words, my thoughts of freedom have created immortality.

The idea can never again be silenced. The concept of freedom. The belief in abundance, peace and happiness… for everyone.

You didn’t ask for the world to be this way. You didn’t choose this. It just IS.

And now you and I have to do something about it — and help others who are fighting on our behalf.
In order to do that, my role in this is to continue to educate you. To continue the investigation. We’ve barely even gotten started.

Shame may have prevented you from hearing and understanding the rest of the story — but it’s time for you to know the truth.


Now step back and think about what we have learned so far in the course of this investigation.

The Federal Reserve handed out 26 trillion dollars in bailout money – to themselves. To their own companies. To their own banks.

That means they’re suffering. This is not something they would have done if they weren’t forced to. 
They are experiencing real trouble – and it’s affecting global headlines with rumors of financial collapse.

According to former Forbes Asia-Pacific bureau chief Benjamin Fulford, the 2008 collapse was pushed over the tipping point by an international coalition of countries who are actively resisting the Federal Reserve group.

I can now independently confirm this is true because I am in daily contact with some of their top representatives.

It happened because of my willingness to pursue this investigation — once I saw that the lawsuit Benjamin Fulford had been talking about for over a year was real, and had actually been filed in the Southern District Court of New York.

You are not alone. There are already 122 countries fighting for you. More are preparing to join the coalition. They are afraid to speak out because they know they will be killed if they do. At least for right now.

I have written and conducted this investigation on the direct request of this and other important groups — who are fighting for you.

They have handed me provable evidence to give to you. There is much, much more they will give you through other means.
This is, and will be, evidence that no one has ever seen before. Some of it will be very difficult for you to hear — and see.

“Well, this is just a metaphysical website. This is not CNN. This is nothing. Who the hell are you? This is the best they could do? LOL LOL LOL LOL!!!” 
The reason why it’s not someone else is simple. I sought them out. I’ve done the homework. I was extremely lucky to be offered this chance. And I am brave enough to take it.

As of January 23rd, 2012, I have heard from my top insiders that there are seismic waves of shock rippling through this community at the level of bravery I have demonstrated here by revealing all of this to you.

These peacekeepers will, at the right moment, lay down their lives — if necessary — for your freedom.
Hopefully it won’t come to that.

What we seek is a peaceful, negotiated surrender of the people running these organizations. Not genocide. Not masses rising up to torture and destroy them. A world we can all live in and share… together.
In peace. Free from pain. Free from corruption. Free from Financial Tyranny.

In order to be free, we must continue the investigation. Let’s not forget what we’ve learned as we head into Section Two.
The Federal Reserve appears to control, directly or indirectly, 1,318 corporations that earn up to 80 percent of the world’s wealth. 147 corporations within that group are totally interconnected with each other, and earn 40 percent of global revenues.

Global media was consolidated from 50 independent corporations to five giants in barely over 20 years – from 1983 to 2004.
One of the top two or three most profitable businesses in America is the healthcare industry. In order for the “super-entity” of 147 corporations to control 80 percent of the wealth, they would almost certainly need to invest in healthcare.
Six out of the top nine media corporations have directors with controlling interests in the pharmaceutical companies.
Eight out of the top nine media corporations have insurance and / or pharmaceutical company executives serving on their Board of Directors.

This is precisely the type of interconnectedness discovered by the Swiss team of scientists – using supercomputers.
Conan O’Brien was burned badly by Big Media – and got his revenge almost two years later, by revealing how virtually every television network was reading off of the same prepared script.
If this all seems very strange to you, it might start making more sense as we head into the next section of our investigation: The History.